Skip to main content

Full text of "The Princeton Seminary Bulletin"

See other formats


FOR  USE  IN  LIBRARY  ONLY 


PER  BV  4070  .P712  N.S.  v.10  c.2 

Princeton  Theological 
Seminary . 

The  Princeton  Seminary 
illetin 

C o y y z 


for  use  in  library  only 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


https://archive.org/details/princetonsemina1031prin_0 


THE 

PRINCETON 

SEMINARY 

BULLETIN 


VOLUME  X,  NUMBER  3 NEW  SERIES  1989 


Mackay  Centennial 
An  Eloquent  Witness 
John  Alexander  Mackay: 

A Centennial  Remembrance 
The  Form  of  a Servant 

Commencement  Address,  1989 
The  Last  Temptation  of  the  Church 

Farewell  Remarks  to  the  Class  of  1989 
Thinking  about  Everything,  All  the  Time 


DANIEL  L.  MIGLIORE 

THOMAS  W.  GILLESPIE 
JOHN  A.  MACKAY 

FRED  B.  CRADDOCK 

THOMAS  W.  GILLESPIE 


Inaugural  Address 

Mission  as  Kenosis  A LAN  neely 

Warfield  Lecture 

Reformed  Preaching  Today  john  h.  leith 


Sermons 

The  African-American  Christian  Heritage: 

Witness  and  Promise  clarice  j.  martin 

A Claim  Beyond  Imagining  Christine  m.  smith 


PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY 


Thomas  W.  Gillespie,  President 
James  I.  McCord,  President  Emeritus 

BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES 


David  B.  Watermulder,  Chair 

Robert  M.  Adams,  Secretary 

Johannes  R.  Krahmer,  Vice-Chair 

Frederick  F.  Lansill,  Treasurer 

Clarence  B.  Ammons 

Henry  Luce  III 

Eve  S.  Bogle 

Karen  Turner  McClellan 

Robert  W.  Bohl 

M.  Scott  McClure 

Stuart  Cummings-Bond 

David  M.  Mace 

John  H.  Donelik 

Donald  C.  McFerren 

James  G.  Emerson,  Jr. 

Earl  F.  Palmer 

Peter  E.  B.  Erdman 

George  T.  Piercy 

Rosemary  H.  Evans 

Jean  M.  Rech 

Sarah  B.  Gambrell 

Thomas  J.  Rosser 

Francisco  O.  Garcia-Treto 

Laird  H.  Simons,  Jr. 

Helen  H.  Gemmill 

Frederick  B.  Speakman 

C.  Thomas  Hilton 

William  P.  Thompson 

David  H.  Hughes 

Jay  Vawter 

Jane  G.  Irwin 

Samuel  G.  Warr 

F.  Martin  Johnson 

George  B.  Wirth 

Louis  Upchurch  Lawson 

Charles  Wright 

James  H.  Logan,  Jr. 

TRUSTEES  EMERITI/AE 

Ralph  M.  Wyman 

Clem  E.  Bininger 

Raymond  I.  Lindquist 

Frederick  E.  Christian 

J.  Keith  Louden 

Margaret  W.  Harmon 

William  H.  Scheide 

Bryant  M.  Kirkland 

John  M.  Templeton 

Harry  G.  Kuch 

Irving  A.  West 

THE 

PRINCETON 

SEMINARY 

BULLETIN 


VOLUME  X NUMBER  3 


Daniel  L.  Migliore,  editor 

Jane  Dempsey  Douglass,  book  review  editor 


NEW  SERIES  1989 


CONTENTS 


Mackay  Centennial 
An  Eloquent  Witness 
John  Alexander  Mackay: 

A Centennial  Remembrance 
The  Form  of  a Servant 

Commencement  Address,  1989 
The  Last  Temptation  of  the  Church 

Farewell  Remarks  to  the  Class  of  1989 
Thinking  about  Everything,  All  the  Time 

Inaugural  Address 
Mission  as  Kenosis 

Warfield  Lecture 
Reformed  Preaching  Today 

Sermons 

The  African-American  Christian  Heritage: 
Witness  and  Promise 
A Claim  Beyond  Imagining 


Daniel  L.  Migliore 

Thomas  W.  Gillespie 
John  A.  Mackay 


Fred  B.  Craddock 


Thomas  W.  Gillespie 


Alan  Neely 


John  H.  Leith 


Clarice  J.  Martin 
Christine  M.  Smith 


Book  Reviews 

The  Philosophical  Theology  of  Jonathan  Edwards,  by  Sang  Hyun 

Lee  Gerald  P.  McKenny 

Deadly  Sins  and  Saving  Virtues,  by  Donald  Capps  Michael  G.  Cartwright 

Imagining  God:  Theology  and  the  Religious  Imagination,  by 
Garrett  Green 


167 

I7I 

182 


!93 

199 

202 


224 


258 

267 


272 

274 


David  ].  Bryant  276 


Thinking  the  Faith:  Christian  Theology  in  a North  American 
Context,  by  Douglas  John  Hall 

On  Reading  Karl  Barth  in  South  Africa,  by  Charles  Villa- 
Vicencio  (ed.) 

A Theology  of  the  Jewish-Christian  Reality.  Part  III,  Christ  in 
Context,  by  Paul  M.  Van  Buren 

Paul  Tillich:  Theologian  of  the  Boundaries,  by  Mark  Kline  Taylor 

The  Literary  Guide  to  the  Bible,  by  Robert  Alter  and  Frank 
Kermode  (eds.) 

Griechisch-deutsches  Worterbuch  zu  den  Schriften  des  Neuen 
Testaments  und  der  fruhchristlichen  Literatur,  6th  fully 
reworked  edition,  by  Kurt  Aland  and  Barbara  Aland  (eds.) 

II  Kings:  A New  Translation  with  Introduction  and  Commentary. 
The  Anchor  Bible  n,  by  Mordechai  Cogan  and  Hayim  Tadmor 

Jeremiah.  Interpretation  Commentary,  by  Ronald  E.  Clements 

Congregations:  Their  Power  to  Form  and  Transform,  by  Ellis  C. 
Nelson 

Faithcare:  Ministering  to  All  God’s  People  Through  the  Ages  of 
Life,  by  Daniel  O.  Aleshire 

People  of  the  Truth,  by  Robert  E.  Webber  and  Rodney  Clapp 

The  Travail  of  Nature:  The  Ambiguous  Ecological  Promise  of 
Christian  Theology,  by  H.  Paul  Santmire 

Dinner  with  Jesus  and  Other  Left-Handed  Story-Sermons,  by 
Donald  F.  Chatfield 


Daniel  L.  Migliore 

27) 

Daniel  L.  Migliore 

27< 

Arthur  C.  Cochrane 

281 

Mary  Ann  Stenger 

28: 

Bruce  M.  Metzger 

28, 

Bruce  M.  Metzger 

28; 

].  ].  M.  Roberts 

281 

Dennis  T.  Olson 

28c 

D.  Campbell  Wycbpff 

291 

Donald  Capps 

29i 

Richard  J.  Mouw 

29' 

Thomas  Sieger  Derr 

2gt 

Donald  Macleod 

29I 

The  Princeton  Seminary  Bulletin  is  published  three  times  annually  by  the  Theological  Seminary 
of  the  United  Presbyterian  Church  at  Princeton,  New  Jersey. 

Each  issue  is  mailed  free  of  charge  to  all  alumni/ae  and  on  an  exchange  basis  with  various  insti- 
tutions. Back  issues  are  not  available. 

All  correspondence  should  be  addressed  to  Daniel  L.  Migliore,  Editor,  Princeton  Seminary  Bul- 
letin, CN  821,  Princeton,  NJ  08542. 

Because  the  policy  of  the  Bulletin  is  to  publish  lectures  and  sermons  by  Princeton  Seminary 
faculty  and  administration,  and  presentations  by  guests  on  the  Seminary  campus,  we  cannot  accep’ 
unsolicited  material. 


An  Eloquent  Witness 


In  this  issue  we  mark  the  centennial  of  the  birth  of  John  A.  Mackay,  third 
president  of  Princeton  Theological  Seminary  and  world-renowned  Chris- 
tian theologian  and  ecumenical  leader.  Along  with  a special  article  by 
Thomas  W.  Gillespie,  we  are  reprinting  one  of  Mackay’s  own  memorable 
convocation  addresses,  “The  Form  of  a Servant.” 

By  any  standard  John  Mackay  was  an  extraordinary  person.  This  was 
evident  not  only  to  his  many  students  and  colleagues  but  to  all  who  heard 
him  preach  or  lecture  or  who  spoke  with  him  in  private.  His  combination 
of  honest  piety,  prophetic  courage,  tough-minded  theology,  and  gifted  writ- 
ing was  both  rare  and  impressive. 

In  recent  weeks  I have  reread  portions  of  his  many  books  and  articles, 
and  have  been  struck  again  by  their  remarkable  vitality,  relevance,  and  clar- 
ity. I offer  a few  examples  that  may  serve  as  reminders  to  those  who  were 
privileged  to  study  under  Mackay  and  as  enticements  to  those  who  have  not 
yet  encountered  his  eloquent  Christian  witness. 

On  Basic  Christianity.  “What  is  basic  Christianity?  . . . How  do  we  find 
it?  The  only  authoritative  source  of  information  about  the  core  of  the  Chris- 
tian religion  is  the  Bible,  Holy  Scripture.  What  do  we  seek  when  we  take 
up  the  Bible?  We  endeavor  to  find  out  what  it  says,  what  its  basic  message 
is.  We  discover  when  we  take  the  Bible  seriously  and  listen  to  it  that  it  is 
basically  a book  about  a person,  Jesus  Christ.  When  we  fix  our  attention 
upon  him,  he  becomes  the  clue  to  our  understanding  of  the  Bible  and  also 
the  core  of  the  message  of  the  Bible.  What  is  the  highest  thing  that  the  Bible 
says  about  Jesus  Christ?  We  hear  its  central  affirmation  in  four  momentous 
words  of  St.  Paul:  “Jesus  Christ  is  Lord”  (Philippians  2:11).  That  is  basic 
Christianity.  Jesus  Christ  is  Lord.  That  is  the  first  creed  in  point  of  time,  and 
the  basic  creed  for  all  time.”  (“Basic  Christianity,”  The  Princeton  Seminary 
Bulletin  43  [Winter  1950],  p.  6.) 

On  the  Danger  of  Orthodoxy.  “Have  you  ever  known  people  who  were 
ready  to  challenge  the  world  to  point  out  a flaw  in  the  orthodoxy  of  their 
belief,  but  who  lived  nevertheless  complacent,  unsympathetic,  censorious 
lives,  utterly  devoid  of  the  spirit  of  Christ?  They  stooped,  when  occasion 
demanded,  to  unethical  procedures  to  further  their  worldly  interest  or  even 
to  propagate  their  religious  faith.  How  did  such  an  anomaly  become  possi- 
ble? Because  those  people  had  converted  their  ideas  about  God  into  God 
Himself.  They  became  idol-worshippers  without  knowing  it,  and  their  lives 
took  on  all  the  ethical  marks  of  idolatry.  They  patronized  and  manipulated 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


1 68 

their  God  at  will;  they  keep  him  in  their  pockets  or  on  their  book  shelves. 
Few  people  can  be  so  unlovely  or  so  utterly  lost  as  these.  The  publicans  and 
the  harlots  shall  go  into  the  Kingdom  of  Heaven  before  them.”  (“The  Res- 
toration of  Theology,”  The  Princeton  Seminary  Bulletin  31  ( April  1937],  pp. 
16-17.) 

On  the  Need  for  Community.  “The  major  problem  of  contemporary  civi- 
lization is  in  the  realm  of  community.  Communities  founded  on  blood  or 
soil  or  national  tradition  struggle  desperately  with  communities  founded 
upon  class.  That  being  so,  the  relevance  of  that  universal  community  which 
came  into  being  at  Pentecost  and  which  recognizes  no  barriers  of  soil  or 
blood  or  class  becomes  more  than  ever  apparent.  In  both  Communist  and 
Fascist  countries  the  state  tends  increasingly  to  become  converted  into  a 
church  with  its  Messiah,  its  holy  books,  its  liturgy,  and  its  theology.  Only  a 
community  of  love,  as  closely  knit  together  as  the  communities  of  race  and 
class  and  tradition,  and  rooted  as  much  as  they  in  a theological  conception 
of  its  nature  and  destiny,  can  withstand  the  assault  of  Christianity’s  new 
rivals  and  enable  the  Christian  community  to  fulfill  God’s  purpose  for  hu- 
manity.” (“The  Restoration  of  Theology,”  The  Princeton  Seminary  Bulletin 
31  | April  1937],  pp.  12-13.) 

On  the  Need  to  “Mal{e  Christians”'.  “In  the  course  of  a public  dialogue 
which  I had  some  years  ago  in  Santiago,  Chile,  with  a distinguished  Jesuit 
theologian,  this  question  was  addressed  to  my  fellow  panelist  when  the  dis- 
cussion period  came:  ‘Sir,  what  do  you  consider  to  be  the  main  problem  of 
your  church  today?’  His  answer:  ‘We  Catholics  must  make  Christians.’  This 
was  a most  revolutionary  reply,  for  in  the  Hispanic  tradition  it  was  not 
uncommon  for  a person  to  say,  ‘I  am  an  atheist,  but  I am  a Catholic.’  Con- 
gratulating my  Roman  Catholic  friend  for  his  frankness,  I remarked,  ‘We 
Protestants  too  must  make  Christians.’  And  I added,  ‘Speaking  as  a loyal 
Presbyterian,  we  Presbyterians  must  make  Christians.’  ” (“The  Great  Ad- 
venture,” The  Princeton  Seminary  Bulletin  64  (July  1971],  p.  32.) 

On  the  Prophetic  Tas/{  of  the  Church'.  “Whatever  concerns  men  and  women 
and  their  welfare  is  a concern  of  the  church  and  its  ministers.  Religion  has 
to  do  with  life  in  its  wholeness.  While  being  patriotically  loyal  to  the  country 
within  whose  bounds  it  lives  and  works,  the  church  does  not  derive  its  au- 
thority from  the  nation  but  from  Jesus  Christ.  Its  supreme  and  ultimate 
allegiance  is  to  Christ,  its  sole  Head,  and  to  his  Kingdom,  and  not  to  any 
nation  or  race,  to  any  class  or  culture.  It  is,  therefore,  under  obligation  to 
consider  human  life  in  the  light  of  God’s  purpose  in  Christ  for  the  world. 
While  it  is  not  the  role  of  the  Christian  church  to  present  blueprints  for  the 


169 


organization  of  society  and  the  conduct  of  government,  the  church  owes  it 
to  its  own  members  and  to  people  in  general,  to  draw  attention  to  violations 
of  those  spiritual  bases  of  human  relationship  which  have  been  established 
by  God.  It  has  the  obligation  also  to  proclaim  those  principles,  and  to  instill 
that  spirit,  which  are  essential  for  social  health,  and  which  form  the  indis- 
pensable foundation  of  sound  and  stable  policies  in  the  affairs  of  state.”  (“A 
Letter  to  Presbyterians,”  1953.) 

On  Revolution : “Let  us  frankly  recognize  that  many  of  the  revolutionary 
forces  of  our  time  are  in  great  part  the  judgment  of  God  upon  human  self- 
ishness and  complacency  . . . That  does  not  make  these  forces  right;  it  does, 
however,  compel  us  to  consider  how  their  driving  power  can  be  channeled 
into  forms  of  creative  thought  and  work.  History,  moreover,  makes  it  abun- 
dantly clear  that  wherever  a religion,  a political  system  or  a social  order, 
does  not  interest  itself  in  the  common  people,  violent  revolt  eventually  takes 
place.”  (“A  Letter  to  Presbyterians,”  1953.) 

On  Christian  Life  as  a “Great  Adventure:’’  “Let  it  become  more  and  more 
for  each  of  us  an  exciting  thing  to  be  a Christian.  Forgive  me  if  I say — and 
do  not  think  that  I am  being  merely  sentimental  or  romantic  when  I say 
it — my  one  regret  is  that  I am  not  a member  of  the  present  graduating  class 
. . . a member  of  your  generation.  For  your  generation  has  a tremendous  job 
to  do  as  you  face  tomorrow.  As  you  confront  the  time  ahead,  be  sure  that 
you  listen  to  Jesus  Christ  as  your  Savior,  Leader,  and  Companion,  who  con- 
tinues to  say,  ‘Come  to  me — Follow  me.’  Beloved  friends,  embark  on  the 
Great  Adventure,  and  in  doing  so  remember  the  words  of  the  great  musi- 
cian Handel:  ‘He  shall  reign  for  ever,  and  ever,  and  ever.’  Yes,  Jesus  Christ 
will  have  the  last  word  in  history.”  (“The  Great  Adventure,”  The  Princeton 
Seminary  Bulletin  64  [July  1971],  p.  38.) 

This  is  but  a sampling  of  the  rich  theological  and  spiritual  legacy  of  John 
A.  Mackay.  We  continue  to  find  this  legacy  compelling  not  least  because  in 
it  heart  and  mind,  passion  and  discipline,  personal  renewal  and  social  trans- 
formation— concerns  so  often  divorced  in  the  life  of  the  church  then  and 
now — are  inseparably  joined. 

Daniel  L.  Migliore 
Editor 


John  Alexander  Mackay 
1889-1983 


John  Alexander  Mackay: 

A Centennial  Remembrance 

by  Thomas  W.  Gillespie 


May  17  of  this  year  marked  the  one  hundredth  anniversary  of  the  birth 
of  Dr.  John  Alexander  Mackay — missionary,  theologian,  educator,  ec- 
umenist, author  and  for  twenty-three  years,  the  President  of  Princeton  The- 
ological Seminary  (1936-1959).  His  biographer  will  one  day  narrate  the  life 
story  of  this  extraordinary  Christian  leader,  plumbing  the  depths  of  his  fer- 
tile mind  and  noble  spirit,  and  exploring  the  frontiers  on  which  he  lived  out 
his  Christian  vocation  over  the  ninety-four  years  of  his  life.  This  tribute  is 
written  simply  from  the  perspective  of  one  who  knew  Dr.  Mackay  during 
student  days  here  at  the  Seminary,  whose  life  and  ministry  were  decisively 
influenced  by  his  vision,  and  who,  with  many  others,  remains  grateful  to 
God  for  the  legacy  he  provided. 


I 

It  was  as  a collegian  at  a summer  conference  that  I first  heard  Dr. 
Mackay.  His  morning  addresses  lifted  up  themes  that  were  new  to  me,  such 
as  “The  Balcony  and  the  Road,”  “Christianity  on  the  Frontiers,”  “The  Cos- 
mic Christ,”  and  “Let  the  Church  Be  the  Church.”  Each  one  was  an  hori- 
zon-expanding experience.  The  Christ  of  whom  he  spoke  was  clearly  the 
one  in  whom  I believed,  but  whose  magnitudes  exceeded  my  youthful  un- 
derstanding. Until  then  the  only  church  I knew  was  the  congregation  in 
which  I had  been  baptized,  nurtured,  and  confirmed.  Dr.  Mackay  con- 
fronted us  with  the  reality  of  the  Body  of  Christ  in  which  congregations  are 
but  living  cells.  The  week  was  not  only  memorable;  it  was  a preview  of 
coming  attractions  that  awaited  me  at  the  Seminary. 

Only  then  did  I begin  to  realize  that  these  recurring  themes,  articulated 
so  vividly  in  the  discourse  of  a “visualizing  Celt,”  represented  something 
more  than  novelties  of  theological  insight  or  linguistic  expression.  His  was 
not  a new  theology , but  theology  in  a new  key.  It  was  his  passionate  desire  to 
lift  the  church  above  its  polarities  and  divisions,  its  sectarianism  and  paro- 
chialism, to  the  ever  increasing  realization  of  that  unity  which  is  given  in 
Christ  and  honored  in  mission.  He  pitched  theology  in  a higher  key  that 
gave  promise  of  a new  harmony.  As  one  veteran  of  the  Seminary  during 
Dr.  Mackay’s  administration  attested,  “In  the  early  days,  when  people  were 
touchy,  he  used  to  lift  us  right  up  to  the  spheres  where  everybody  was  in 
agreement.”  So  also  he  lifted  others. 


172 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


The  upward  orientation  of  his  vision  of  Christian  unity  is  significant. 
There  is,  he  once  observed,  “a  beyond  ...  to  the  purely  theological,  ecclesi- 
astical and  liturgical.”  Indeed,  it  was  his  conviction  that  “there  is  a beyond 
to  Christianity  as  a religion.  . . Only  in  this  beyond  may  the  essence  of  the 
faith  be  found  and  the  oneness  of  its  community  grounded.  Ecumenical 
though  he  was  to  the  core  of  his  being,  he  nonetheless  saw  “no  future  to  any 
vague  ecumenism  whose  goal  is  the  minimum  common  ground  of  Christian 
agreement.”2  For  the  common  ground  is  not  a human  achievement  but  a 
divine  gift  that  is  received  by  the  church  in  its  faithfulness  to  its  mission 
mandate.  Thus  when  he  passionately  advocated  a “dynamic  centrism,”  the 
reference  was  not  to  the  middle  of  the  wad  but  to  the  pilgrimage  on  the  road 
itself  in  focused  obedience  to  the  Lord  of  the  church. 

II 

For  Dr.  Mackay,  the  name  of  this  beyond  was  Jesus  Christ.  It  was  his 
deepest  conviction  that  “in  its  essence  Christianity  is  Christ.”  Reflecting 
upon  the  early  period  of  his  Christian  life  in  a 1972  Alumni/ae  Day  address, 
he  told  his  audience: 

The  reality  and  significance  of  the  “Historical  Jesus,"  of  the  “Crucified 
and  Risen  Christ,”  of  the  Christ  who  said,  “Follow  me,”  of  the  Pauline 
“Christ  in  us,”  took  on  a luminous  and  dynamic  dimension  in  my  life. 
An  evangelical  affirmation  from  the  Middle  Ages  began  to  find  an 
echo  within  me:  “I  have  one  passion  in  life  and  it  is  He.”3 

It  is  no  wonder  that  he  was  known  during  his  sixteen  years  of  missionary 
service  in  Latin  America  (1916-1932)  as  “this  Scot  enamored  of  Christ.” 

He  often  quoted  the  words  of  Miguel  de  Unamuno,  the  Spanish  philos- 
opher under  whom  he  studied  in  Madrid  during  the  1915-1916  academic 
year,  “Get  a great  idea,  marry  it,  found  a home  with  it,  and  raise  a family.” 
Noting  the  influence  of  this  counsel  upon  her  subject  in  a feature  article 
carried  by  Presbyterian  Life , Janet  Harbison  commented: 

Mackay  has  been,  through  the  years,  essentially  a monogamous  intel- 
lectual. What  appear  to  be  different  threads  and  emphases  in  his  think- 
ing are  really  different  aspects  of  the  idea  he  married  many  years  ago.4 

1 “Let  Us  Remember,”  The  Princeton  Seminary  Bulletin  65  (July  1972),  p.  26. 

2 (ohn  A.  Mackay,  The  Presbyterian  Way  of  Life  (Englewood  Cliffs,  N.J.:  Prentice-Hall, 
Inc.,  i960),  p.  xvi. 

i “Let  Us  Remember,”  p.  26. 

< Janet  Harbison,  “John  Mackay  of  Princeton”  Presbyterian  Life , October  1,  1958,  p.  8. 


JOHN  ALEXANDER  MACKAY 


!73 


Though  central  to  his  thinking,  Jesus  Christ  was  more  than  an  idea  to 
Dr.  Mackay,  and  faith  more  than  an  intellectual  exercise.  He  was  an  un- 
ashamed advocate  of  personal  religion,  which  he  distinguished  sharply  from 
religion  that  is  merely  conventional.  Of  the  latter  type  he  said  in  a convoca- 
tion address  at  the  Seminary: 

Conventional  religion  is  for  the  most  part  inherited  religion.  One  is 
religious  primarily  in  loyalty  to  parents  or  grandparents,  or  because  of 
the  social  influence  of  the  environment  in  which  one  was  brought  up. 

By  contrast,  “personal  religion  is  religion  in  which  the  divine  reality, 
however  it  may  be  conceived  or  experienced,  exercises  an  overmastering 
influence  upon  life.”  Indeed,  “It  becomes  the  fountainhead  of  emotion,  the 
master  of  thought,  the  source  of  moral  energy.”5 

The  origin  of  this  distinction  was  clearly  his  own  life  experience.  Born  in 
Inverness,  Scotland,  and  raised  in  the  rich  heritage  of  that  Celtic  culture, 
which  included  the  strict  piety  of  the  Free  Presbyterian  Church  to  which 
his  parents  belonged  and  in  which  his  father  served  as  an  elder,  this  first- 
born son  knew  conventional  religion  in  his  childhood.  His  adult  faith, 
however,  was  more  than  a cultural  inheritance.  Although  he  seldom  spoke 
directly  of  the  moment  in  which  his  religious  life  moved  from  the  conven- 
tional to  the  personal  plain,  his  language  was  lyrical  when  he  did.  In  his 
1972  address  to  our  alumni/ae,  he  attested  to  “the  experience  of  a personal 
encounter  with  Christ  in  my  early  teenage  years.”  As  he  explained: 

I was  passing  through  a period  of  spiritual  yearning  when  something 
happened.  Suddenly  Christ  became  a living  reality  in  my  life.  I expe- 
rienced the  ecstatic  as  I roved  the  Scottish  hills.  I fell  in  love  with  the 
Bible,  which  began  to  speak  to  me  in  a very  personal  and  meaningful 
manner.  Paul’s  Letter  to  the  Ephesians  became  my  favorite  book.  In 
the  experience  I had  just  passed  through  these  words  were  reproduced: 
“And  you  He  made  alive,  when  you  were  dead”  (2:1).  A new  era  began 
in  my  life.6 

This  experience  itself  he  considered  neither  unique  nor  normative.  It  was 
to  his  mind  simply  an  example  of  that  personal  encounter  with  and  com- 
mitment to  Christ  that  is  basic  to  authentic  faith.  “We  become  Christian  in 
the  New  Testament  sense,”  he  believed,  “only  when  we  bow  ourselves  ador- 

5 “Personal  Religion,”  The  Princeton  Seminary  Bulletin  37  (December  1943),  pp.  3k 

6 “Let  Us  Remember,”  p.  27. 


>74 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


ingly  in  the  totality  of  our  selfhood,  before  the  living  reality  of  Jesus  Christ 
the  Lord,  into  whose  presence  we  are  guided  by  Holy  Scripture.”7  If  such 
an  event  be  called  “conversion,”  then  let  it  be  so  called.  As  he  declared  in  a 
sermon  at  the  Baccalaureate  Service  of  the  Seminary’s  159th  Commence- 
ment: 

The  primary  answer  ...  to  the  question,  “What  does  it  mean  to  be  a 
Christian?,”  is  to  respond  to  Christ’s  timeless  invitation,  “Come  to 
me.”  To  do  this  is  to  become  a new  being,  to  experience  conversion, 
spiritual  change.  Alas!  Alas!  In  many  church  circles  today  the  word 
“conversion”  sounds  meaningless  and  is  even  obnoxious.  But  conver- 
sion is  native  to  Christian  reality.  Through  commitment  to  Jesus  Christ 
people  become  real  men  and  women,  God’s  men  and  women,  mem- 
bers of  the  new  humanity  called  the  Church  in  its  full  spiritual  dimen- 
sion.8 

As  with  the  apostle  Paul,  his  own  spiritual  change  entailed  a call  to  the 
ministry  of  the  gospel.  In  a fuller  account  of  his  own  transforming  moment, 
provided  in  his  beautiful  exposition  of  the  Ephesian  Letter,  Dr.  Mackay 
wrote: 

It  was  a Saturday,  towards  noon,  in  the  month  of  July  of  1903.  The 
“preparation”  service  of  an  old-time  Scottish  Communion  season  was 
being  held  in  the  open  air  among  the  hills,  in  the  Highland  parish  of 
Rogart,  in  Sutherlandshire.  A minister  was  preaching  from  a wooden 
pulpit. ...  I cannot  recall  anything  that  the  minister  said.  But  some- 
thing, someone,  said  within  me  with  overwhelming  power  that  I,  too, 
must  preach,  that  I must  stand  where  that  man  stood.  The  thought 
amazed  me,  for  I had  other  plans.9 

The  sum  and  substance  of  his  later  proclamation  as  an  ordained  Presby- 
terian minister  is  stated  succinctly  in  the  “Jerusalem  Message”  issued  by  the 
1928  Christian  Missionary  Conference  that  betrays  his  influence:  “Our  mes- 
sage is  Jesus  Christ.” 

So  it  was  that  a lad  of  fourteen  years  experienced  the  divine  reality  that 
would  henceforth  exercise  an  overmastering  influence  upon  his  life,  and 
conceived  it  to  be  the  Jesus  Christ  attested  in  Scripture,  whom  he  now  knew 

7 “Basic  Christianity,”  The  Princeton  Seminary  Review  43  (Winter  1950),  p.  7. 

8 “The  Great  Adventure,”  The  Princeton  Seminary  Bulletin  64  (July  1971),  p.  33. 

9 John  A.  Mackay,  God's  Order  (New  York:  The  MacMillan  Company,  1953),  p.  7. 


JOHN  ALEXANDER  MACKAY 


l75 


as  a “personal  presence  in  life”  and  would  continue  to  know  as  his  “road 
companion”  along  the  way  of  his  journey. 

Ill 

The  road  led  him,  in  obedience  to  his  call,  first  to  the  University  of  Ab- 
erdeen where  he  took  an  M.A.  with  first  class  honors  in  Philosophy  (1912), 
and  then  to  Princeton  Theological  Seminary  where,  upon  graduation  (1915), 
he  was  awarded  the  graduate  study  fellowship  that  funded  his  year  in  Spain, 
which  he  would  later  describe  as  “the  most  decisive  cultural  experience  of 
my  life.” 

Returning  to  Scotland  in  1916,  he  married  Jane  Logan  Wells  whom  he 
had  met  while  both  were  students  in  Aberdeen.  Ordained  by  the  Free 
Church  of  Scotland  that  same  year,  he  and  his  bride  were  commissioned  as 
missionaries  to  Peru.  In  Lima  the  couple  founded  a school,  known  originally 
as  Colegio  Anglo-Peruano  and  later  Colegio  San  Andres , which  the  Peruvian 
government  in  time  would  acknowledge  as  the  leading  private  school  in 
their  country.  It  was  during  this  time  that  he  earned  his  doctorate  at  the 
National  University  (1918)  with  a thesis  on  the  life  and  thought  of  Una- 
muno. In  1925  he  was  named  to  the  chair  of  philosophy  in  the  same  univer- 
sity. 

From  1926  to  1932  Dr.  Mackay  served  as  a lecturer  and  writer  under  the 
South  American  Federation  of  YMCAs,  an  assignment  which  he  himself 
described  as  that  of  “an  itinerant  expounder  of  the  Christian  faith  in  Latin 
American  lands.”  While  first  working  out  of  Uruguay  and  then  Mexico,  he 
published  the  initial  three  of  the  twelve  books  his  pen  would  produce  over 
the  course  of  his  career.  The  third  of  these  volumes,  The  Other  Spanish  Christ 
(1932),  remains  a classic  on  the  history  of  Spanish  spirituality. 

During  this  period,  he  later  divulged,  “something  happened  of  a para- 
doxical character”  that  further  shaped  his  life  and  faith  decisively.  Many 
who  know  of  his  passionate  love  of  the  church  may  be  surprised  to  learn,  as 
I was,  that  it  was  not  always  so.  Disillusioned  by  the  growing  sectarianism 
of  his  own  denomination  and  abhorred  by  the  “tragic  phenomenon  of  the 
Hispanic  Catholic  Church”  to  which  he  was  now  exposed,  he  had  developed 
a mood  of  “antichurchism.”  In  his  own  words: 

While  Jesus  Christ  became  increasingly  real  and  meaningful  to  me,  I 

lost  faith  in  the  church,  I mean  the  church  as  an  organization,  a struc- 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


176 

ture.  I continued  to  attend  church  services,  but  I no  longer  belonged  to 

any  denomination.10 

A new  era  of  his  life  began,  however,  with  “a  rediscovery  of  the  church 
as  a Christian  ultimate  which  called  for  understanding  and  loyalty.”  Hence- 
forth, “Christ  and  the  church  became  inseparably  related  in  my  interpreta- 
tion of  the  Christian  task.  . . .”  The  occasion  of  this  crucial  change  of  mind, 
we  may  infer,  was  an  intuitive  insight  into  the  paradoxical  nature  of  the 
church,  an  insight  that  informs  the  meaning  of  the  famous  aphorism  which 
he  coined  and  introduced  at  the  1937  Oxford  Conference  on  Life  and  Work, 
“Let  the  Church  be  the  Church.”  As  he  later  explained,  “By  that  I meant: 
Let  the  church  be  in  its  historical  existence  what  it  is  in  its  eternal  essence.” 
“Speaking  personally,”  he  added,  “those  words  enshrined  my  basic  yearn- 
ing.”11 

Here  again  his  appreciation  of  the  beyond  was  decisive,  for  it  enabled  him 
to  perceive  the  dialectical  tension  between  the  eternal  essence  of  the  church 
and  its  historical  existence , and  to  devote  his  life  to  the  reduction  of  that 
tension  by  calling  the  church  to  a faithful  realization  of  its  authentic  identity 
in  obedience  to  the  Lordship  of  Jesus  Christ. 

To  the  question,  “What  is  the  Church?,”  he  would  respond,  “It  is  essen- 
tially the  ‘Community  of  Christ,’  ” “the  fellowship  of  those  for  whom  Jesus 
Christ  is  Lord.”  The  terms  community  and  fellowship  are  important  clues  to 
his  ecclesiology.  For  Dr.  Mackay  believed  the  church  was  a hpinonia  before 
it  became  an  ecclesia.  This  distinction  had  implications  for  his  understand- 
ing of  ecumenicity  as  well  as  the  task  of  the  Seminary,  which  we  will  come 
to  shortly.  Here  let  it  be  noted  that  it  also  had  implications  for  his  conception 
of  personal  religion.  Given  his  view  of  the  church,  personal  may  not  be  read 
as  a synonym  for  individual.  For  personal  religion  leads  those  who  have  it 
into  the  fellowship  of  the  Christian  church,  in  which  there  is  “no  place  . . . 
for  an  individualist  as  such.”12 

Because  the  church  confesses  the  Lordship  of  Christ,  it  lives  “as  Christ’s 
servant  and  as  the  instrument  of  God’s  glory,  that  is,  when  it  makes  manifest 
to  the  world  the  full  dimension  of  God’s  being  and  purpose.”'3  Faithfulness 
in  this  servanthood  requires  the  church  to  live  on  the  cultural,  political,  and 
missionary  frontiers  of  human  history.  Such  were  some  of  the  implications 

■°  “Let  Us  Remember,”  p.  28. 

" “Let  Us  Remember,”  p.  29. 

12  “Personal  Religion,”  p.  10. 

■3  “Let  Us  Remember,”  p.  29. 


JOHN  ALEXANDER  MACKAY  177 

of  his  recovery  of  faith  in  the  church,  and  the  resultant  call,  “Let  the  Church 
be  the  Church.” 


IV 


It  was  Robert  E.  Speer,  then  General  Secretary  of  the  Board  of  Foreign 
Missions  of  the  Presbyterian  Church  in  the  U.S.A.,  who  prevailed  upon  Dr. 
Mackay  in  1932  to  accept  appointment  as  the  Board’s  Secretary  for  Latin 
America  and  Africa.  Already  known  for  his  leadership  at  the  1928  Jerusa- 
lem meeting  of  the  International  Missionary  Council,  Dr.  Mackay ’s  new 
position  led  him  directly  into  the  arena  of  the  church’s  world  missionary 
task  at  the  time  of  the  emerging  ecumenical  movement. 

The  emphasis  he  would  bring  to  the  movement  was  clear  already  in  these 
lines  from  a 1934  study  paper  he  had  been  asked  to  prepare  for  the  upcom- 
ing Oxford  Conference: 

The  supreme  need  is  that  the  Christian  Church  be  a fellowship.  Let 
the  Church  be  the  Church,  let  it  be  true  to  its  inmost  self,  that  is,  to  the 
reality  of  fellowship.  The  early  Christian  Community  was  a ^oinonia , 
a fellowship,  before  it  was  an  ecclesia , or  assembly. . . . Let  the  idea  of 
fellowship  be  worked  out  to  the  fullest  degree  in  the  Christian  com- 
munity, locally,  nationally,  and  internationally.14 

At  the  1937  Conference  itself,  Dr.  Mackay  chaired  the  section  on  the 
Universal  Church  and  the  World  of  Nations,  which  included  such  notables 
as  William  Temple,  John  Foster  Dulles,  and  W.  A.  Visser’t  Hooft.  The 
report  issued  by  this  group  restored  to  currency  the  venerable  term  “ecu- 
menical” as  a designation  of  the  perception  that  the  mission  of  the  church  is 
coextensive  with  the  inhabited  globe  (the  oihpumene)  and  the  oneness  of  the 
church  is  realized  in  the  fulfillment  of  this  mission.  What  gives  the  theolog- 
ical term  “ecumenical”  semantic  superiority  in  a Christian  context  to  the 
political  word  “international,”  the  report  explains,  is  that  the  latter  “neces- 
sarily accepts  the  division  of  mankind  into  separate  nations  as  a natural,  if 
not  a final,  state  of  affairs,”  while  the  former  “refers  to  the  expression  within 
history  of  the  given  unity  of  the  Church.”  Put  simply,  “The  one  starts  from 
the  fact  of  division  and  the  other  from  the  fact  of  unity  in  Christ.”  This  way 
of  perceiving  reality  gives  credence  to  Dr.  Mackay’s  alleged  assertion  that 
the  term  ecumenical  is  “not  only  linguistically  legitimate  but  conceptually 
inevitable.” 


14  John  A.  Mackay,  Ecumenics:  The  Science  of  the  Church  Universal  (Englewood  Cliffs,  N.J.: 
Prentice-Hall,  Inc.,  1964),  p.  6. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


178 

One  further  statement  in  the  report  of  the  section  at  Oxford  chaired  by 
Dr.  Mackay  is  important  for  understanding  the  scope  of  his  ecumenical  vi- 
sion. It  reads: 

This  fact  of  the  ecumenical  character  of  the  Church  carries  with  it  the 
important  consequence  that  the  Church  brings  to  the  task  of  achieving 
a better  international  order,  an  insight  which  is  not  derived  from  or- 
dinary political  sources.  To  those  who  are  struggling  to  realize  human 
brotherhood  in  a world  where  disruptive  nationalism  and  oppressive 
imperialism  make  such  brotherhood  seem  unreal,  the  Church  offers 
not  an  ideal,  but  a fact,  man  united  not  by  his  aspiration  but  by  the 
love  of  God.  True  ecumenicity,  therefore,  must  be  the  goal  of  all  our 
efforts.'5 

Although  written  long  before  present  sensitivities  to  inclusive  language, 
the  statement  nonetheless  expresses  a vision  of  authentic  ecumenicity  that 
directs  the  Church  to  cultural  and  geographical  frontiers,  as  well  as  to  evan- 
gelistic and  social  responsibility.  For  John  A.  Mackay,  this  too  was  entailed 
in  personal  religion. 

If  his  commitment  to  the  church  prevents  us  from  interpreting  the  word 
personal  in  his  formulation  as  a synonym  for  individual , so  also  his  under- 
standing of  the  truly  ecumenical  church  precludes  its  being  read  as  a code 
word  for  private , in  distinction  from  social.  He  saw  too  clearly  that  God’s 
love  for  humanity  in  Jesus  Christ  is  a love  both  for  the  whole  person  and 
for  the  wholeness  of  life  in  its  social  and  political  settings. 

No  one  in  the  Seminary  during  Dr.  Mackay’s  moderatorial  year  (1952- 
53)  will  ever  forget  either  the  public  hysteria  of  the  so-called  McCarthy  Era 
or  the  courageous  “Letter  to  Presbyterians”  penned  by  and  published  over 
the  signature  of  the  Moderator  of  the  General  Assembly.  Not  only  was  this 
historic  text  printed  in  full  by  major  newspapers  around  the  world,  but 
many  now  credit  it  with  being  the  manifesto  which  turned  the  tide  of  public 
opinion  at  the  critical  time  in  our  national  history.  Personal  religion  for  John 
A.  Mackay,  true  to  his  Reformed  tradition,  clearly  included  public  respon- 
sibility. 

While  he  could  not  abide  the  sectarian  spirit  and  rejected  all  claims  “to  a 
proud  absolutistic  confessionalism,”  he  was  and  remained  a Presbyterian. 
Convinced  that  “the  fullness  of  Christ  is  beyond  Presbyterianism,”  he  also 
recognized  that  the  church  in  its  historical  existence  is  characterized  by  a rich 


15  Ibid , p.  8. 


JOHN  ALEXANDER  MACKAY 


179 


variety  of  theological  and  ecclesiastical  traditions.  Thus  he  could,  on  the  one 
hand,  claim  Theresa  of  Avila  as  his  saint,  enjoy  the  inspiration  of  “Faith 
missionaries,”  celebrate  the  Pentecostal  movement  in  Chile,  worship  regu- 
larly in  a Methodist  Episcopal  church  in  Montevideo,  and  credit  important 
insights  to  Soren  Kierkegaard,  a Lutheran,  and  to  Feodor  Dostoevski,  a son 
of  Russian  Orthodoxy.  “Yet,”  he  could  say  on  the  other  hand,  “notwith- 
standing these  experiences,  my  grateful  spirit  has  not  been  de-Presbyterian- 
ized.  I believe  with  greater  fervor,  and  I trust,  for  more  intelligent  reasons 
than  ever  before  in  my  life,  that  there  are  some  unique  elements  in  Presby- 
terianism.”'6 Again  a paradox,  this  time  that  of  a great  human  spirit  both 
open  and  focused.  Ultimate  commitments,  he  believed,  belong  to  ultimate 
realities.  But  in  our  historical  existence,  he  realized,  ultimate  commitments 
are  lived  of  necessity  in  and  through  penultimate  realities. 

V 

The  Oxford  Conference  occurred,  of  course,  one  year  after  Dr.  Mackay 
had  accepted  appointment  to  the  office  of  President  of  the  Seminary.  Once 
again  it  was  Robert  E.  Speer,  this  time  as  the  President  of  the  Seminary’s 
Board  of  Trustees,  who  had  come  knocking  on  Dr.  Mackay’s  door.  Given 
the  condition  of  the  institution  in  1936,  following  “the  time  of  the  troubles” 
which  had  led  to  the  disruption  of  the  faculty  and  the  reorganization  of  the 
Seminary  by  the  1928  General  Assembly,  it  is  not  surprising  that  the  Board 
had  to  knock  twice  before  Dr.  Mackay  agreed  to  succeed  Dr.  J.  Ross  Steven- 
son in  the  presidency. 

What  the  third  President  of  the  Seminary  brought  to  the  task  of  theolog- 
ical education  was  primarily  the  vision  of  Christ  and  the  church  attested 
above.  His  immediate  task  was  to  rebuild  the  faculty,  making  appointments 
on  the  basis  of  two  criteria:  Christian  commitment  first;  then  academic  com- 
petence. This  was  in  keeping,  of  course,  with  the  historic  Plan  of  the  Semi- 
nary which  called  for  the  uniting  of  “piety  of  the  heart”  with  “solid  learn- 
ing,” and  warned  that  “religion  without  learning,  or  learning  without 
religion,  in  the  ministers  of  the  gospel,  must  ultimately  prove  injurious  to 
the  Church.” 

Early  in  his  tenure,  Dr.  Mackay  spoke  editorially  of  “The  Role  of  Prince- 
ton Seminary,”  declaring: 

The  primary  and  most  important  function  of  a theological  seminary  is 

to  prepare  heralds  of  the  Gospel  and  shepherds  of  souls.  This  function 

16  The  Presbyterian  Way  of  Life,  p.  xv. 


i8o 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


is  worthily  discharged  when  the  Seminary  makes  adequate  provision 
for  the  progress  of  its  students  in  learning  and  piety.  . . . Neither  of 
these  can  be  a substitute  for  the  other  in  a Christian  minister. 

This,  however,  was  but  one  focus  of  his  vision,  as  he  went  on  to  explain: 

Some  seminaries  . . . , of  which  this  Seminary  is  one,  have  a further 
part  to  play  in  the  religious  life  of  their  time.  In  addition  to  discharging 
the  task  common  to  all  seminaries,  it  is  theirs  to  match  in  the  sphere  of 
evangelical  learning  the  studies  offered  by  influential  graduate  colleges 
in  the  several  branches  of  secular  culture.  That  Princeton  Seminary 
should  discharge  such  a role  is  inherent  in  its  nature  and  consonant 
with  its  tradition.'7 

Over  the  twenty-three  years  of  his  presidency,  Dr.  Mackay  led  the  Semi- 
nary to  the  realization  of  this  vision,  including  the  inauguration  of  the  doc- 
toral program  in  theological  studies  that  continues  to  flourish. 

But  his  “deepest  concern  and  most  crucial  task”  in  his  new  office,  as  he 
later  acknowledged,  “was  to  transform  Princeton  Seminary  from  being 
merely  a distinguished  institution  of  theological  education  to  becoming  a 
vital  manifestation  of  Christian  togetherness.”  Dr.  Mackay  was  convinced 
that  the  community  which  belongs  to  the  eternal  essence  of  the  Church  and 
requires  realization  in  its  historical  existence  is  equally  God’s  gift  and  man- 
date to  the  Seminary.  The  venerable  eating  clubs  were  symbolic  to  him  of 
the  divisions  in  the  Church,  determining  their  memberships  to  a consider- 
able extent  along  lines  of  theological  outlook  and  social  background.  To 
provide  a place  for  common  meals  he  effected  the  construction  of  the  Cam- 
pus Center  (that  now  bears  his  name)  which  opened  in  the  fall  of  1952  and 
continues  to  serve  as  the  Seminary’s  refectory. 

Five  years  later,  under  Dr.  Mackay’s  leadership,  the  Seminary  con- 
structed and  dedicated  the  Robert  E.  Speer  Library.  The  collection,  for- 
merly housed  in  two  outdated  buildings,  had  at  last  a home  worthy  of  its 
reputation  as  the  finest  in  the  western  hemisphere.  Other  campus  improve- 
ments included  the  purchase  of  the  Hun  School  on  Stockton  Street,  which 
became  the  Seminary’s  Tennent  Campus. 

New  programs,  in  addition  to  the  doctoral  degree,  included  the  founding 
of  the  School  of  Christian  Education  in  1944,  the  inauguration  of  the  Sum- 
mer Institute  of  Theology  in  1943,  and  the  founding  of  the  respected  journal 
Theology  Today  in  1944. 

17  “The  Role  of  Princeton  Seminary,’-  The  Princeton  Seminary  Bulletin  31  (November  1937), 
p.  1. 


JOHN  ALEXANDER  MACKAY 


Over  the  years  of  his  presidency,  Dr.  Mackay  published  four  books:  A 
Preface  to  Christian  Theology  (1943),  Heritage  and  Destiny  (1943),  Christianity 
on  the  Frontier  (1950),  and  God’s  Order : The  Ephesian  Letter  and  This  Present 
Time  (1953)-  Upon  his  retirement  in  June  of  1959,  he  authored  The  Presby- 
terian Way  of  Life  (i960),  Ecumenics:  The  Science  of  the  Church  Universal 
(1964),  His  Life  and  Our  Life  (1964),  and  Christian  Reality  and  Appearance 
(1969).  All  this  in  addition  to  numerous  pamphlets  and  articles.  His  pen 
never  ran  dry. 

Some  have  called  him  “the  second  founder  of  the  Seminary,”  and  that 
may  well  be  the  case.  What  is  undisputable,  however,  is  that  whatever 
Princeton  Seminary  is  today,  it  is  in  large  measure  because  of  the  indelible 
influence  of  John  A.  Mackay. 

VI 

In  this  centennial  year  of  his  birth,  the  church  needs  to  see  anew  the  vision 
and  hear  afresh  the  voice  of  John  Alexander  Mackay.  For  the  old  polarities 
which  he  sought  to  transcend  have  returned  with  a vengeance  under  the 
guise  of  new  labels  to  afflict  the  church.  The  one  Christian  life  of  personal 
devotion,  moral  responsibility,  and  theological  reflection  is  once  again  frag- 
mented by  the  myopic  champions  of  each  dimension  who  mistake  the  part 
for  the  whole.  Religion  is  viewed  often  in  academia  as  a phenomenon  to  be 
studied  scientifically  rather  than  a reality  to  be  embraced  personally.  Many, 
disillusioned  with  the  church  even  as  Dr.  Mackay  once  was,  leave  its  fellow- 
ship because  they  are  unable  to  discern  and  accept  the  paradox  of  its  eternal 
essence  and  historical  existence.  The  ecumenical  movement  has  been  trans- 
formed in  large  measure  from  the  missionary  expression  of  the  church’s 
given  unity  in  Christ  to  an  ecclesiastical  quest  for  achieved  church  union. 

The  vision  of  John  Alexander  Mackay,  however,  remains  valid.  The  re- 
ality of  Jesus  Christ  transcends  our  theological  efforts  to  attest  him.  The 
church  has  an  eternal  essence  that  ever  impinges  upon  its  historical  existence 
in  the  power  of  its  Lord.  The  Christian  life  remains  a personal  response  to 
the  divine  presence  that  becomes  “the  fountainhead  of  emotion,  the  master 
light  of  thought,  the  source  of  moral  energy.”  Frontiers  with  new  names 
abound  for  Christian  exploration  and  involvement.  The  missionary  man- 
date to  the  servant  church  continues  in  force,  even  if  it  must  be  obeyed  today 
in  new  ways.  It  is  the  abiding  greatness  of  Dr.  Mackay  that  he  left  to  us  a 
spiritual  legacy  that  continues  to  challenge  the  church  of  today.  A century 
after  his  birth  it  remains  our  task  to  appropriate  and  express  the  reality  of 
Jesus  Christ  and  his  church,  to  which  Dr.  Mackay  bore  such  eloquent  and 
powerful  witness. 


The  Form  of  a Servant: 
The  Restoration  of 
a Lost  Image 

by  John  A.  Mackay 


This  convocation  address  was  given  by 
President  John  A.  Mackay  on  September 
24,  7957  and  appeared  in  The  Princeton 
Seminary  Bulletin,  vol.  LI,  no.  3 ( Janu- 
ary 1958),  pp.  3-12.  It  is  reprinted  here 
with  minor  editorial  changes. 


For  a number  of  years  now  the  Biblical  image  of  the  “servant”  has  fasci- 
nated me.  I have  come  increasingly  to  feel  that  it  is  the  symbol  which, 
on  the  one  hand,  is  most  deeply  significant  in  the  Bible  and  Christianity, 
and  which,  on  the  other  hand,  is  most  needed  by  the  religion,  the  culture, 
and  the  civilization  of  our  time. 

There  are  three  things  I want  to  say,  three  affirmations  I wish  to  make, 
about  the  servant  image. 


I 

First,  the  servant  image  is  the  most  significant  symbol  in  the  Bible  and  in  the 
Christian  religion.  It  pervades  the  Old  Testament.  Moses,  the  lawgiver  and 
prophet  of  Israel,  is  called  the  “servant  of  God.”  So,  too,  is  David,  Israel’s 
greatest  king.  Israel  itself,  the  people  of  God,  is  called  the  “servant  of  God.” 
“You  are  my  servant,  Israel,  in  whom  I will  be  glorified.”  Through  Israel 
God  would  make  his  nature  known;  through  the  Hebrew  people  his  pur- 
pose would  be  achieved  upon  earth.  Israel’s  true  destiny  was  to  serve  God 
to  be  “a  light  to  the  nations,”  that  God’s  salvation  might  be  carried  to  the 
ends  of  the  earth. 

So,  too,  in  the  New  Testament.  The  One  greater  than  Moses  and  Solo- 
mon, David’s  greatest  son,  Jesus  Christ,  who  knew  that  he  was  one  with  the 
Father,  the  only-begotten  Son  of  God,  gloried  in  making  clear  that  he  came 
to  be  a servant.  “I  have  glorified  Thee  on  the  earth,”  he  said.  “I  have  finished 
the  work  that  Thou  gavest  me  to  do.”  Picking  up  the  ancient  designation 
of  Israel  as  a “servant,”  even  as  the  “suffering  servant,”  he  exclaimed,  “The 
Son  of  Man  came  not  to  be  served,  but  to  serve,  and  to  give  his  life  as  a 
ransom  for  many.”  It  was  as  a servant  that  Jesus  unveiled  the  splendor  of 
God  and  served  the  purpose  of  God.  It  was  as  a servant,  and  to  fulfill  his 
destiny  as  a servant,  that  he  allowed  himself  to  be  captured  and  manhan- 
dled. He  was  eventually  crucified  as  the  “suffering  servant,”  who  rose  again 
from  the  dead  to  reap  the  reward  of  his  faithfulness. 

So,  too,  with  St.  Paul,  Christianity’s  greatest  convert.  The  man  from  Tar- 
sus interpreted  the  significance  of  Jesus  Christ  as  that  of  one  who  “though 
he  was  in  the  form  of  God  did  not  think  equality  with  God  a thing  to  be 


FORM  OF  A SERVANT 


183 

grasped”  (or  to  be  graspingly  retained),  but  who  took  “the  form  of  a ser- 
vant.” In  the  “form  of  a servant”  he  unveiled  the  splendor  of  Deity  and 
fulfilled  the  divine  redemptive  purpose  for  humanity.  It  might  be  said  that 
God  was  never  so  truly  God  as  when  he  took  the  form  of  a servant  and 
became  human.  It  was  no  wonder  that  being  fascinated  by  that  figure,  and 
in  thrall  to  allegiance,  Paul  was  proud  to  call  himself  “a  servant  of  Jesus 
Christ”  who  was  “called  to  be  an  apostle,  set  apart  for  the  Gospel  of  God” 
(Rom.  1:1).  He,  too,  the  greatest  Christian  of  all  time,  “took  the  form  of  a 
servant.”  The  man  who  knew  what  it  meant  to  be  in  an  ecstatic  rapture  “in 
the  third  heaven”  labored  with  his  own  hands  to  support  himself.  On  his 
last  voyage  to  Rome  Paul  was  the  one  man  who  behaved  like  a hero  during 
the  hurricane  in  the  Adriatic.  Yet  when  he  and  his  ship-wrecked  compan- 
ions got  ashore  he  did  not  try  to  cash  in  on  the  prestige  he  won  aboard. 
Rather  he  scurried  off  among  the  bushes  to  get  sticks  to  make  a roaring  fire 
for  storm-battered,  rain-sodden,  weary  men.  Like  his  Master,  he  did  not 
regard  honor  or  status  as  a “prize  to  be  grasped.” 

How  can  we  best  describe  the  servant  image?  There  is,  happily,  in  the 
New  Testament  itself  an  episode  which  provides  us  with  the  pictorial  set- 
ting and  the  psychological  inwardness  necessary  to  understand  what  it 
means  truly  to  be  a servant  in  form  and  in  spirit.  I refer  of  course  to  the 
foot-washing  in  the  Upper  Room.  The  same  night  in  which  our  Lord  was 
betrayed,  he  laid  aside  his  garments  after  supper.  Girding  himself  with  a 
towel,  he  poured  water  into  a basin  and  washed  his  disciples’  feet.  In  this 
scene  we  have  both  the  divine  pattern  of  the  servant  and  the  human  possi- 
bility of  assuming  the  servant  form. 

To  appraise  the  significance  of  any  deed  it  is  important  to  know  the  mood 
in  which  it  was  done,  the  psychological  state  out  of  which  it  was  born.  What 
was  the  state  of  mind  which  gave  birth  to  the  act,  the  menial  act,  of  the  foot- 
washing? Says  the  writer  of  the  Fourth  Gospel,  “Jesus,  knowing  that  the 
Father  had  given  all  things  into  his  hands,”  being  intensely  aware  that  all 
power,  cosmic  power,  was  his,  that  he  was  the  Lord  of  History,  did  not  take 
into  his  hand  the  symbol  of  a scepter  to  overawe  his  disciples  or  to  engrave 
upon  their  imagination  a regal  image.  Instead  he  borrowed  a towel  with 
which  to  perform  a menial  act.  Again,  “knowing  that  he  had  come  from 
God  and  was  going  to  God,”  aware  that  is  of  his  essential  nature,  of  his 
kinship  with  God,  of  the  source  and  goal  of  his  life,  Jesus  broke  out  of  the 
divine  cycle.  He  did  not  summon  his  disciples  to  an  act  of  worship  at  his 
feet;  no,  he  moved  from  Deity  towards  humanity,  to  express  what  is  in  the 
deepest  heart  of  God,  a loving  concern  for  human  welfare.  Here  is  a perfect 


184  THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 

transcript  of  what  it  means  to  be  a “servant”  in  the  Biblical  sense.  It  denotes 
a complete  absence  of  external  compulsion.  It  means  voluntariness,  sponta- 
neity, a certain  inner  joy  and  even  exultancy.  Nobody  obliges  the  true  ser- 
vant to  assume  a menial  role.  Knowing  fully  who  we  are  and  aware  of  our 
high  destiny  as  God’s  elect  children,  we  are  moved  to  perform  the  lowliest 
act,  joyously,  voluntarily,  in  the  “form  of  a servant.” 

But  here  we  confront  a problem.  How  can  we  who  are  by  nature  self- 
centered  and  want  to  be  like  God,  be  made  willing  to  take  the  form  of  a 
servant,  and  fulfill  the  imperative  which  Christ  left  with  his  disciples, 
namely,  that  if  he,  their  Lord  and  Master,  washed  their  feet,  so  they,  too,  in 
lowliest  mien  and  obedience,  should  wash  the  feet  of  their  fellows.  The 
answer  to  this  problem  is  found  in  the  context  in  which  the  footwashing 
scene  occurred.  The  washing  of  feet  was  preceded  by  the  “breaking  of 
bread.”  We  can  be  like  Christ;  we  can  take  the  “form  of  a servant”  and  obey 
Christ’s  commands  only  when  He  Himself  is  formed  in  us.  We  must  live  by 
him  if  we  would  act  like  him  and  for  him. 

In  the  background  and  preceding  the  feetwashing  is  the  Holy  Supper,  the 
Eucharistic  feast.  Christ  gave  an  imperative  to  his  disciples  because  he  had 
already  invited  them  to  partake  of  the  symbols  of  his  broken  body  and  his 
shed  blood.  The  only  way  in  which  a Christian  imperative  can  be  fulfilled, 
the  only  way  in  which  Christian  ethics  can  take  on  concrete  reality,  is  when 
the  Crucified  and  Living  Christ  enters  into  and  becomes  part  of  our  human- 
ity, bone  of  our  bone  and  flesh  of  our  flesh.  In  other  words,  in  the  back- 
ground of  the  feetwashing  and  preceding  it,  stands  the  eucharistic  meal. 
This  must  always  be  the  order.  First  the  Real  Presence,  Christ  becoming  a 
part  of  us,  through  faith,  and  we  living  upon  him,  participating  in  his  being, 
that  we  may  express  his  spirit,  and,  like  him,  take  the  servant  form.  This  is 
of  supreme  importance.  It  lifts  the  whole  question  of  ethical  obedience  out 
of  the  realm  of  pure  morality  and  puts  it  where  it  belongs.  The  possibility 
of  likeness  to  Christ  derives  from  that  communion  with  Christ,  that  reali- 
zation of  the  Real  Presence  which  is  at  the  heart  of  the  Lord’s  Supper. 

There  have  been  notable  cases  in  which  the  episode  of  the  feetwashing 
has  made  a transforming  impact  upon  thought  and  life.  Some  of  you  have 
heard  me  speak  of  that  young  Oxford  tutor,  H.  A.  Hodges,  professor  of 
philosophy  in  the  University  of  Reading,  England,  and  one  of  the  most  orig- 
inal minds  in  British  thought  today.  Strolling  along  an  Oxford  street  one 
Saturday  afternoon,  Hodges,  a thorough-going  agnostic,  saw  in  a bookstore 
window  a picture  of  the  feetwashing.  The  scene  gripped  him.  He  himself 
tells  the  story,  “As  I looked  at  that  picture,”  he  says,  “I  knew  that  the  Ab- 


FORM  OF  A SERVANT 


i85 

solute  was  my  footman.”  The  doubting  philosopher  passed  through  an  ex- 
perience of  conversion.  Memories  of  childhood,  of  home  and  Sunday  School, 
were  set  in  a new  perspective.  There  was  born  a flash  of  spiritual  insight 
and  intuition.  He  said  to  himself:  If  Ultimate  Reality,  if  the  Absolute,  is  like 
that  stooping  Figure,  that  God  has  my  allegiance.  Young  Hodges  became  a 
Christian.  His  whole  world  view  was  changed.  He  knew  that  in  God’s 
world  the  human  absolute  is  the  servant,  that  it  is  the  meek  who  “shall 
inherit  the  earth,”  that  there  is  no  ultimate  place  for  pure  force,  for  the 
tyrant  or  the  dictator,  but  only  for  those  who  are  willing  to  serve  God  and 
humanity  in  the  form  of  servants. 

II 

The  second  affirmation  which  I would  make  is  this:  The  servant  image 
has  been  degraded  in  our  time.  There  is  a contemporary  thinker  who  discusses 
this  question,  the  French  Christian  existentialist,  Gabriel  Marcel.  In  a re- 
markable book  entitled,  Men  against  Humanity,  Marcel  stresses  the  point 
that  in  our  time  the  servant  image  has  been  degraded.  “To  think  of  a ser- 
vant,” he  says,  “is  to  think  of  one  who  is  obliged  to  do  what  he  does  because 
of  compulsion,  who  is  merely  passive,  whose  obedience  is  forced,  who  would 
not  do  what  he  does  if  he  could  do  anything  else  to  avoid  it.”  That  is  to  say, 
in  our  contemporary  culture  and  civilization,  to  be  a servant  tends  to  be 
interpreted  in  terms  of  enforced  obedience  and  pure  passivity.  Colonialism 
and  Communism  have  been  responsible  for  this  in  large  sectors  of  the  world. 
In  vast  regions  of  the  globe  today  to  be  a servant  is  to  be  a person  who  lacks 
freedom  because  of  social  or  political  subjection.  A servant  is  one  associated 
with  social  servitude  or  with  racial  inferiority,  so  that  nobody  would  be  a 
servant  if  he  could  be  anything  else.  Elsewhere,  industrialism,  the  child  of 
technology,  has  tended  to  depersonalize,  to  dehumanize  people,  and  so  to 
take  all  pristine  and  inherent  value  from  the  concept  of  the  servant.  Men 
and  women  become  types  and  mere  cogs  in  a wheel;  they  have  value  not  in 
themselves  but  because  they  are  useful,  because  they  fit  into  a system.  The 
supreme  norm  whereby  ordinary  human  beings  are  judged  is  their  utilitar- 
ian value  for  an  organization. 

Strangely  enough,  however,  a form  of  false  equalitarianism,  which  distin- 
guishes a certain  type  of  democracy,  has  done  the  same  thing  to  the  servant 
image.  There  is  a kind  of  democracy  in  which  this  sentiment  is  common. 
Why  should  I do  this?  I am  your  equal;  I am  as  good  as  you.  The  suggestion 
is  that  readiness  to  do  a certain  job  is  to  admit  inferiority.  Might  one  not 
even  say  that  there  is  an  extreme  form  of  democracy,  based  upon  an  abstract 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


1 86 

sense  of  equality,  which  can  be,  and  is  becoming,  positively  satanic  in  its 
implications.  Recall  that  in  John  Milton’s  interpretation  of  the  psychology 
of  Satan,  the  Archangel  fell  because  he  could  not  endure  the  thought  that 
anyone  should  be  better  than  he.  He  wanted  to  be  equal  to  the  Highest,  and, 
if  possible,  his  superior. 

aspiring 

To  set  himself  in  glory  above  his  peers, 

He  trusted  to  have  equalled  the  Most  High. 

Even  to  feel  gratitude  was  a sign  of  weakness.  So,  “Better  to  reign  in  Hell 
than  serve  in  Heaven.” 

One  thing  is  becoming  clear.  The  typical  servant  in  our  time  lacks  a sense 
of  belonging,  a great  attachment,  a something  beyond  equality,  an  inner 
compulsion,  a spiritual  motivation,  a joyous  self-giving.  But  to  be  a servant 
in  a deeper,  truer  sense  is  to  give  oneself  with  enthusiasm  and  unreserved 
abandon  to  something  that  is  conceived  as  being  bigger  than  oneself,  in 
which  one  can  and  should  lose  oneself.  Our  Lord  in  the  footwashing  gave  a 
native,  symbolical  expression  to  what  he,  the  Son  of  God,  accepted  as  his 
role  in  taking  the  “form  of  a servant,”  when  he  undertook  to  be  God’s 
redemptive  instrument  for  human  salvation.  The  obedience  unto  death  of 
the  suffering  Servant  of  the  Lord  was  something  voluntarily  and  joyously 
accepted.  What  is  needed  in  our  time,  if  the  servant  image  is  to  become 
meaningful  and  potent,  is  a sense  of  reverence  and  commitment  to  some- 
thing bigger  than  ourselves.  Let  this  something  be  our  brothers  and  sisters; 
let  it  be  a human  need,  a great  idea,  a worthy  cause.  Above  all,  let  it  be  a 
sense  of  God,  and  of  one’s  indebtedness  to  Him  and  one’s  partnership  in 
His  divine,  redemptive  purpose. 

Ill 

I come  now  to  the  third  affirmation.  One  of  the  major  tasf(s  of  our  time  is 
to  restore  the  servant  image.  This  needs  to  be  done  both  in  secular  society  and 
in  the  Christian  Church. 

The  statesmen  of  today  need  to  envisage  the  servant  image.  They  need  to 
realize  that  the  state  or  nation  whose  destinies  they  seek  to  control  exists  not 
for  its  own  sake  but  to  serve  God  and  man.  The  totalitarian  state,  of  course, 
assumes  the  role  of  Deity  and  takes  on  all  the  airs  and  attributes  of  the 
Master.  Because  of  that  the  world  has  witnessed  the  tragedy  of  Hungary;  it 
has  witnessed,  too,  the  tragedy  of  Spain,  an  equally  sad  country.  Yet,  in  what 
we  call,  mythically  and  unreally,  the  “free  world,"  a responsible  statesman 


FORM  OF  A SERVANT 


187 

has  dared  to  affirm  that  a state  or  a nation,  and  this  nation  in  particular, 
must  act  from  pure  self-interest  as  its  highest  motivation.  Could  anything 
be  sadder  or  more  tragic?  Could  anything  be  more  perilous  for  our  national 
life  and  destiny  than  to  affirm  to  the  world  that  the  good  that  is  done  by  a 
people  naturally  generous  above  all  the  peoples  of  the  earth,  is  done  ulti- 
mately because  it  is  in  our  national  interest  that  it  should  be  done.  How  can 
anyone  acquainted  with  history  and  human  nature  affirm  that  it  matters 
nothing  whether  or  not  this  country  has  friends  in  the  world,  or  whether 
people  love  us  or  hate  us,  so  long  as  they  serve  our  purpose  and  contribute 
to  our  security?  It  is  time  that  we  realized  as  the  English  historian,  Butter- 
field, puts  it,  that  “civilization  needs  forgiveness.”  “There  is  none  righteous, 
no  not  one.” 

Yes,  the  time  has  come  for  the  rulers  of  nations  to  forget  their  “cold  war,” 
to  sit  down  together  in  penitence  before  God,  each  to  listen  to  the  other,  and 
to  be  brutally  frank  with  one  another.  It  is  time  for  statesmen  who  claim  to 
represent  the  Christian  tradition  in  politics  to  do  their  thinking  in  terms  of 
the  light  and  majesty  of  him  who  took  the  form  of  a servant.  Repentance, 
too,  is  needed,  as  we  contemplate  our  national  sins  and  short-comings,  the 
betrayal  of  Republican  Spain,  for  example,  and  our  alliance  with  contem- 
porary tyrants  and  slave  dealers  because  they  serve  our  interests.  This  does 
not  mean  that  we  should  be  unaware  of  the  necessity  of  self-defense,  or  of 
national  security.  It  does  mean,  however,  that  we  should  realize  that  we 
belong  to  a society  of  sinners  in  need  of  forgiveness.  It  means  that  we  should 
become  vividly  aware  of  the  great  inexorable  principles  of  God’s  govern- 
ment of  human  affairs.  It  means  a concern  for  truth  and  righteousness  and 
a desire  to  understand  why  certain  nations  and  people  think  and  act  as  they 
do.  When  we  come  to  understand  them  we  can  perchance  forgive  them. 
God,  moreover,  can  operate  in  human  hearts.  The  outlook  of  men  and 
nations  changes.  Many  a political  theory  breaks  down  when  it  confronts  the 
stark  reality  of  human  nature.  Men  and  women  were  made  for  freedom  and 
they  will  affirm  it.  Profound  changes  are  taking  place  even  within  Com- 
munist countries.  Let  us  contribute  to  social  change  by  increasing  human 
contacts  and  by  an  exchange  of  commodities  rather  than  by  a mere  increase 
of  armaments.  Let  us  beware  of  sanctifying  hate  under  the  guise  of  disliking 
a system.  Let  us,  in  a word,  be  willing  to  be  the  “servant”  of  another  people’s 
best  interests  and  cease  equating  our  own  interests  and  actions  with  the  will 
of  God  and  his  righteousness. 

So,  too,  the  leaders  of  culture  need  to  recover  the  servant  image.  Too  long 
have  they  lived  with  the  image  of  the  “master,”  the  image  of  one  who  mas- 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


1 88 

ters  facts,  who  acquires  knowledge,  who  becomes  encyclopedic,  who  wins 
the  $64,000  prize,  and  who,  nevertheless,  may  be  a plain  jackass  in  matters 
involving  ordinary  human  wisdom.  Not  knowledge  but  wisdom  is  human- 
ity’s supreme  need  and  glory,  a capacity  for  right  relations  between  each 
person  and  God  and  between  ourselves  and  others.  “The  beginning  of  wis- 
dom,” let  it  never  be  forgotten,  is  the  “fear  of  the  Lord.”  Wisdom  comes, 
truth  is  envisaged,  when  men  and  women  take  up  a true  servant’s  attitude 
of  reverent,  joyous  devotion  to  the  Great  Master. 

It  is  time,  moreover,  that  some  thinkers  go  beyond  the  idea  that  to  be 
cultured  is  to  be  a mere  master  of  dialectic,  to  be  aware  of  the  dialectical 
movement  in  thought  and  in  history,  so  that  a person  comes  to  the  point  of 
never  being  able  to  become  a servant  of  any  single  idea  or  attitude.  In  that 
case,  the  only  absolute  becomes  the  absolute  of  compromise,  which  is  sanc- 
tified by  a plea  for  forgiveness.  When  that  happens,  when  it  becomes  the 
mark  of  a cultured  person  to  refrain  from  making  a forthright  decision  that 
is  followed  by  dynamic  action,  then  creative  endeavor  will  be  carried  out  by 
people  whom  we  may  despise  and  who  live  on  the  fringes  of  our  traditional 
and  classical  culture. 

How  common  it  is  in  our  university  system  to  consider  that  the  training 
of  minds,  the  production  of  a critical  intelligence,  is  the  ultimate  ideal  of  a 
liberal  education!  God  forbid  that  our  minds  should  not  be  trained,  that  our 
intelligence  should  not  be  critical,  or  that  we  should  not  have  the  gift  of 
forming  right  judgments.  But  how  true  it  is  that  many  people  who  call 
themselves  cultured  are  mere  patrons  of  truth.  They  see  in  life  so  many 
ambiguities  and  ambivalences,  they  are  so  overwhelmed  by  a dialectical 
view  of  things,  that  they  do  not  commit  themselves  to  any  single  idea  or 
cause.  The  oncoming  generation  of  educated  youth  are  becoming  aware  of 
this.  In  the  course  of  the  last  year  a Student  Council  Committee  of  Harvard 
University  issued  a very  significant  document  ( Religion  at  Harvard).  It  lays 
stress  upon  the  need  of  commitment  in  any  person  wrho  would  claim  to  be 
educated.  Here  are  some  of  the  emphases  in  the  document  in  question: 
“Commitment  is  an  active,  personal  affirmation  of  ultimate  worth.  . . . 
Commitment  is  important  to  each  person’s  full  development.  . . . The  idea 
of  commitment  has  a central  place  in  the  theory  of  the  liberal  university.  . . . 
An  unclear  understanding  of  ultimate  ends  is  frequently  the  cause  of  the 
misuse  of  means;  this  is  as  true  in  private  as  in  public  life.  . . . The  greatest 
figures  of  history  have  been  strongly  committed  and  yet  have  retained  wide 
vision  and  broad  sympathies.”  What  is  here  involved  is  not  necessarily  reli- 
gious but  some  ultimate  value  to  which  one  gives  allegiance.  The  truth  is  that 


FORM  OF  A SERVANT 


189 


if  a people  are  to  be  truly  educated  and  alive  they  must  sooner  or  later  find 
their  value,  their  idea,  their  cause,  and  commit  themselves  to  it.  That  is  to 
say,  they  must  become  “servants”  of  something  to  which  they  can  give  them- 
selves with  adventurous  abandon. 

At  an  early  stage  in  my  own  youth  this  truth  was  burned  into  me  by  that 
great  Spanish  thinker,  Miguel  de  Unamuno,  to  whom  I personally  owe 
more  than  to  any  secular  writer.  When  face  to  face  with  Spanish  intellec- 
tuals who  gloried  in  butterflying  over  the  realms  of  truth,  without  commit- 
ting themselves  to  any  truth  in  particular,  he  used  to  say,  “Get  a great  idea, 
marry  it,  found  a home  with  it,  and  raise  a family.”  Just  what  was  Unamuno 
saying?  He  was  saying  this:  Become  the  servant  of  an  idea,  or  a cause  that 
is  big  enough  and  true  enough,  and  let  yourself  go  in  devotion  to  it,  taking 
all  the  consequent  risks. 

But  today  people  are  in  a mood  of  conformism;  everyone  is  engaged  in 
the  great  quest  for  security.  Students  are  literally  afraid,  as  we  say  vulgarly, 
to  “stick  their  necks  out.”  . . . This  is  one  of  the  hallmarks  of  student  life  in 
our  time.  There  are  reasons  for  this,  of  course.  Our  generation  is  suffering 
from  the  disillusionment  that  has  followed  two  world  wars.  People  ask,  “Is 
it  worthwhile  getting  excited  about  anything?”  There  is  a tendency  to  re- 
gard with  suspicion,  or  as  an  inferior  sort  of  being,  the  person  who  has 
strong  convictions,  or  who  links  his  destiny  to  an  idea  or  cause  which  means 
everything  to  him.  And,  yet,  we  should  remind  ourselves  that  it  is  not  nat- 
ural for  true  men  and  women  to  be  mere  conformists  in  some  comfortable 
status  quo;  it  is  not  natural  to  live  for  the  mere  sake  of  being  secure.  The 
uncommitted  life  is  as  unworthy  of  human  beings  as  the  unexamined  life. 
Life  begins  for  human  beings  when  they  commit  themselves  to  the  worthy 
Master,  when  they  joyously  take  the  form  of  a servant. 

IV 

All  this  is  still  more  true  and  relevant  in  the  community  of  Christians. 
Churchmen  need  to  recover  the  servant  image.  They  need  to  recover  it  for 
example  in  their  thinking  about  the  Church  as  an  institution.  We  face  no 
greater  peril  in  the  Christianity  of  our  time  than  the  peril  of  the  Christian 
Church  regarding  itself  as  an  end  in  itself,  whether  as  a world  body,  as  a 
national  denomination,  or  as  a local  congregation.  The  Church  as  “The 
Israel  of  God,”  exists  as  did  its  prototype,  God’s  ancient  people,  to  be  the 
“servant  of  God.”  The  standard  by  which  the  Christian  Church,  wherever 
located  or  whatever  its  name,  must  be  judged  is  by  the  measure  in  which  it 


190 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


has  taken  the  “form  of  a servant”  and  shows  itself,  by  every  evidence,  to  be 
in  very  truth,  “the  servant  of  Jesus  Christ.” 

The  purity  of  the  Church  and  the  unity  of  the  Church  are  not  enough  if 
purity  and  unity  come  to  be  regarded  as  ends  in  themselves.  It  is  not  Chris- 
tian to  lay  claim  to  absolute  purity,  whether  of  belief,  worship  or  church 
organization.  Some  glory  in  their  theological  purity,  that  is,  in  their  ortho- 
doxy. They  glory  in  having  the  right  ideas;  they  defy  anyone  to  prove  that 
they  are  tainted  with  false  doctrine. 

Now  orthodoxy,  that  is,  right  or  sound  doctrine,  is  important.  Yet  we  can 
have  the  truth  in  a purely  intellectual  sense  without  the  truth  having  us. 
And  Christian  truth,  let  it  never  be  forgotten,  is  personal  truth;  it  centers  in 
a Person  and  it  must  possess  the  lives  of  persons  who  in  the  fullest  sense 
become  servants  of  the  Truth.  Christian  truth  must  not  only  be  believed,  it 
must  be  obeyed.  Human  beings  must  do  the  truth.  “Dead  orthodoxy,”  as 
Archibald  Alexander,  the  founder  of  this  Seminary  called  it,  can  deny  the 
faith,  and  even  betray  it.  Here  is  the  paradox.  Loyalty  to  ideas  about  Christ 
can  become  a subtle  substitute  for  loyalty  to  Christ  Himself.  Ideas  can  be- 
come idols.  The  heresy  of  orthodoxy,  that  is,  the  heresy  to  which  orthodoxy 
is  everlastingly  subject,  can  be  the  most  soul-destroying,  mind-shattering  of 
all  heresies. 

Others  say,  “Ours  is  the  true  ministry.  We  can  trace  our  descent  to  the 
apostles.”  So  what?  Can  apostolic  succession  save  you  and  give  you  good 
and  regular  standing  in  the  Church  of  God?  Who  are  you?  Do  you  serve? 
Do  you  truly  minister?  Do  you  measure  up  to  him  who  took  the  “form  of 
a servant”?  Do  you  do  the  work  of  Christ?  Do  you  manifest  the  spirit  of 
Christ?  The  proof  of  a true  ministry  is  that  it  serves  Jesus  Christ  the  Truth. 

Still  others  say,  “Our  Church  is  the  true  Church;  it  was  founded  by  Christ 
himself  and  its  structure  was  revealed  by  the  Holy  Spirit.”  The  answer  is, 
structure  of  any  kind  is  not  the  essence  of  the  Christian  Church.  Structure, 
too,  must  be  a “servant”  and  must  be  judged  by  the  degree  in  which  it  shows 
itself  to  be  a servant  of  the  redemptive  will  of  God  in  Christ.  In  the  ecu- 
menical movement  of  today  it  is  only  on  the  road  of  Christian  obedience 
that  the  Holy  Spirit  will  reveal  the  structure  which  is  most  consonant  with, 
and  can  best  express,  the  truth  and  unity  of  the  Church  of  Christ. 

But  even  the  unity  of  the  Church  cannot  be  an  end  in  itself.  The  question 
must  be  asked,  “Unity  for  what?”  At  the  risk  of  becoming  an  idol  the 
Church’s  unity  cannot  be  for  its  own  sake.  The  possibility  that  this  should 
happen  is  one  of  the  perils  of  the  ecumenical  movement  to  which  I am  so 
deeply  committed.  The  ideal  of  Christian  unity  can  never  be  tensionless 


FORM  OF  A SERVANT 


191 

harmony.  The  unity  of  the  Church  must  be  for  the  sake  of  the  mission  of 
the  Church.  The  unity  of  the  Body  of  Christ  is  fulfilled  when  all  the  mem- 
bers, functioning  harmoniously  together,  serve  the  mandates  of  the  Head 
and  the  impulses  of  the  Heart.  The  unity  of  the  true  Church  must  be  that 
of  a world  missionary  community , that  is,  a community  which  is  both  mis- 
sionary and  world-wide. 

It  is  possible  to  conceive  a form  of  Church  organization  world-wide  in  its 
scope.  Church  structure  may  be  created  which  would  fulfill  all  the  proprie- 
ties and  prerequisites  of  true  Christian  relationship.  It  would  have  an  equal 
place  for  people  of  all  races.  It  would  transcend  nationality.  It  would  grant 
equal  status  to  missionaries  and  “fraternal  workers”  among  the  native-born 
sons  and  daughters  of  the  Church.  Ecclesiastical  autonomy  would  be  effec- 
tive and  Christian  harmony  would  prevail.  But  autonomy  and  harmony  for 
what?  A Church  can  never  be  in  very  truth  the  Church  unless  it  shows  itself 
to  be  the  servant  of  Christ,  unless  it  takes  seriously  the  missionary  task  of  the 
Church.  A true  Church  of  Christ  must  be  loyal  to  the  last  mandate  which 
Christ  gave  his  followers  to  make  disciples  of  all  nations.  The  Church’s 
unity  must  be  above  all  a unity  in  mission.  It  must  carry  the  whole  Body  to 
the  frontiers,  not  merely  to  the  geographical  frontiers,  but  also  to  the  un- 
numbered frontiers  which  begin  in  the  home  and  extend  to  the  backwoods 
and  the  high  places  of  Government. 

Christians  as  individuals  must  recover  the  servant  image  for  themselves. 
When  are  we  truly  human?  When  we  fulfill  our  human  vocation.  In  a doc- 
ument of  the  reformed  tradition  to  which  this  Seminary  belongs  there  is  a 
famous  question  which  runs,  “What  is  the  chief  end  of  man?”  What  do 
men  and  women  exist  for?  When  do  they  fulfill  their  destiny?  The  answer 
is,  “Man’s  chief  end  is  to  glorify  God,  and  to  enjoy  Him  forever.”  We  are 
truly  human  when  we  become  God’s  medium,  God’s  servant.  Through  such 
persons  God  manifests  the  splendor  of  his  character  and  carries  forward  his 
purpose,  in  holy  fellowship  with  those  who  become  his  human  instruments. 
Such  men  and  women  become  like  their  Master,  who  said,  “I  have  glorified 
Thee  on  the  earth;  I have  finished  the  work  which  Thou  gavest  me  to  do.” 
This  is  what  human  beings  are  for,  to  unveil  the  splendor  of  their  Maker 
and  Redeemer,  in  their  thinking,  in  their  behavior,  and  in  their  daily  toil.  It 
is  on  the  road  to  obedience,  in  the  “form  of  a servant”  that  a Christian  comes 
to  know  in  his  deepest  heart  the  meaning  of  God’s  presence,  and  to  experi- 
ence “fellowship  with  the  Father,  and  with  his  Son  Jesus  Christ.”  Christ- 
likeness  means  letting  oneself  go  in  obedience  to  the  Crucified  and  Risen 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


192 

One,  making  some  facet  of  the  divine  nature  visible  to  others,  fulfilling 
God’s  redemptive  will  to  the  last  frontier  and  till  the  sun  of  life  goes  down. 

In  the  historic  Plan  of  this  Seminary  there  occur  two  great  words,  “learn- 
ing” and  “piety.”  These  two  dare  never  be  separated.  “Learning,”  the  pur- 
suit of  knowledge,  the  exercise  of  thought,  the  cultivation  of  intellectual 
judgment  is  supremely  important;  but  it  can  never  stand  alone  or  be  an  end 
in  itself.  It  must  always  be  related  to  true  piety  of  heart.  Piety  means  a sense 
of  the  presence  of  God,  an  experience  of  communion  with  God,  a dedication 
to  the  service  of  God.  . . . 

He  who  himself  took  the  “form  of  a servant”  asks  that  we  whom  God 
has  called  into  the  “fellowship  of  His  son,”  may  also  bear  the  servant  like- 
ness, in  spirit,  word  and  deed,  on  this  campus  and  beyond. 


The  Last  Temptation  of 
the  Church 

by  Fred  B.  Craddock 


Professor  Fred  B.  Craddock^  holds  the 
Bandy  Distinguished  Chair  in  Preaching 
and  New  Testament  in  the  Candler  School 
of  Theology,  Emory  University.  An  or- 
dained minister  of  The  Christian  Church 
( Disciples  of  Christ),  Dr.  Craddoc\  has 
served  pastorates  in  Tennessee  and  Okla- 
homa, and  is  the  author  of  many  boo/{s,  in- 
cluding Overhearing  the  Gospel  (1978), 
Preaching  (1985),  the  volume  on  Philip- 
pians  in  the  Interpretation  commentary  se- 
ries (1985),  and  the  “Commentary  on  the 
Gospel  of  Lul^e”  in  the  Harper’s  Bible 
Commentary  (1988). 


Commencement  Address,  1989 

President  Gillespie,  trustees,  faculty,  staff,  families,  friends,  and  espe- 
cially the  graduates  of  1989,  I congratulate  you.  I thank  you  for  the  in- 
vitation to  share  with  you  on  this  occasion.  I understand  you  had  something 
to  do  with  my  invitation.  If  you  didn’t,  you  ought  to  be  ashamed  of  your- 
selves! 

I am  honored  to  stand  with  you  for  a few  moments  on  this  pleasant  sum- 
mit. This  is  a rare  occasion.  I know  some  people  get  a little  jaded  about 
commencements,  the  repetition  year  after  year.  But  it  is  a rare  moment.  It 
is  a time  when  the  church  and  the  academy,  sometimes  at  odds,  are  unusu- 
ally close  to  each  other.  It  is  a time  when  the  enthusiasm  with  which  you 
came  and  the  knowledge  which  you  have  acquired,  join  in  happy  union.  It 
is  a time  when  that  which  you  must  do  and  that  which  you  want  to  do,  do 
not  stand  at  any  distance  from  each  other.  Now  and  then,  the  service  of 
Christ  fits  our  natural  inclinations,  and  we  are  able  to  please  both  Christ 
and  ourselves.  And  this  moment  is  very  much  like  that. 

I want  to  say  something  about  a pressing  temptation  facing  the  church. 
But  I will  do  so  by  speaking  to  you  about  Jesus  of  Nazareth.  I feel  justified 
in  this  approach  for  two  reasons.  The  gospel  narratives  that  tell  us  about 
him  tell  us  about  ourselves.  For  it  was  the  church  that  wrote,  preserved, 
collected,  and  respects  as  normative  the  story  of  Jesus.  The  church’s  finger- 
prints are  all  over  those  gospel  narratives.  I speak  of  him;  I speak  about  us. 

Secondly,  I feel  justified  by  the  fact  of  the  incarnation,  for  if  he  became 
as  we  are,  to  speak  of  him  is  to  speak  of  ourselves.  Jesus,  too,  was  tempted. 
The  Hebrew  writer  says  he  was  tempted  in  every  way  as  we  are  tempted. 
But  the  temptations  of  Jesus  seemed  to  have  been  especially  strong,  clustered 
about  the  subject  of  his  death.  How  early  in  his  life  Jesus  thought  of  his 


i94 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


death  we  do  not  know.  We  have  no  access  to  that  information.  The  gospel 
writers  place  the  thought  of  his  death  quite  early,  as  you  know.  But  that 
doesn’t  mean  that  he  thought  of  it  that  early.  It  is  the  tendency  of  the  gospel 
writers  and  the  church  after  them  to  put  the  shadow  of  the  cross  even  over 
the  crib.  And  I notice  in  some  parts  of  the  country  it  is  customary  to  put  a 
lighted  cross  on  top  of  the  Christmas  tree. 

There  was  an  attempt  upon  his  life  when  he  was  still  an  infant  by  the 
very  disturbed  Herod  the  Great.  And  though  that  attempt  was  foiled,  the 
reader  knows  somebody  will  try  again  (Matthew,  chapter  two).  “Why  don’t 
your  disciples  fast?”  “Oh,  you  don’t  fast  at  a party.  But  the  time  will  come 
when  the  bridegroom  is  taken  away  from  them.  And  in  that  day  they  will 
fast”  (Mark,  chapter  two).  “And  old  Simeon  took  the  baby,  six  weeks  old, 
held  him  in  his  arms  and  said  to  Mary  his  mother,  ‘Because  of  this  child,  a 
sword  will  pierce  your  heart’  ” (Luke,  chapter  two).  “Destroy  this  temple, 
and  I’ll  build  it  again  in  three  days.”  He  spoke  of  the  temple  of  his  body 
(John,  chapter  two). 

Quite  early  in  the  Gospels,  but  how  early  in  his  life?  We  cannot  know.  If 
it  was  in  his  youth,  I would  not  be  surprised.  Young  people  think  about 
death.  You  go  into  any  church  and  sit  down  in  an  informal  discussion  with 
the  young  people  and  once  they  trust  you,  once  they  know  you  will  take 
seriously  their  questions,  even  high  school  young  people  will  ask  you  about 
death.  There  is  not  a one  of  them  that  did  not  have  a friend  commit  suicide, 
or  have  them  killed  in  a car  wreck.  They  want  to  know  about  death.  How 
soon  did  Jesus  think  about  death? 

When  I began  my  teaching  in  the  early  sixties — my  seminary  teaching — 
it  was  quite  common  then  to  talk  about  Jesus’  attempt  at  suicide.  Have  you 
run  across  that?  This  was  from  the  middle  sixties.  This  was  an  interpreta- 
tion given,  an  old  interpretation  resurrected  from  the  early  eighteen  hun- 
dreds, that  the  temptation  to  leap  from  the  pinnacle  of  the  temple,  was  a 
temptation  to  commit  suicide.  “Why  don’t  you  get  up  on  the  pinnacle  of  the 
temple  and  jump?  Move  to  the  center  of  political  power  and  religious 
power.  Move  to  the  center  of  where  everything  is  oppressive  for  the  com- 
mon people  and  there  make  a statement,  by  taking  your  own  life  in  the 
presence  of  all  the  people  and  let  your  body  crash  in  front  of  that  sacred 
place  as  a statement.”  This  is  what  my  students  said.  “And  if  God  wishes  it 
otherwise,  God  will  send  angels  to  take  care  of  you  and  you  will  waft  to  the 
ground,  like  a feather  from  an  eagle’s  wing.  Do  it,  Jesus.”  And  I remember 
those  days  as  a young  professor,  going  to  various  informal  gatherings  and 
sitting  on  the  floor  and  reading  poems  about  death  and  the  death  wish  that 


LAST  TEMPTATION 


i95 


pervaded  just  about  everything  that  was  done  and  thought,  a self-destruc- 
tive streak  in  all  of  the  thinking  at  that  time.  It  disturbs  me  now,  as  a kind 
of  sickness.  But  I recall,  we  sat  on  the  floor  and  we  read  Sylvia  Plath,  the 
suicide  poet.  You  remember  her:  “Dying  is  an  art,”  she  said,  “I  do  it  excep- 
tionally well.  I guess  you  could  say  I have  a gift.” 

But  when  you  say,  “I  give  my  life  to  God,”  have  you  not  raised  the  subject 
of  death?  How  soon  did  Jesus  begin  to  think  about  it?  We  don’t  really 
know.  There  is  no  evidence  that  he  had  a death  wish,  that  he  went  in  search 
of  a cross.  We  don’t  have  here  some  melancholy  Lincoln,  some  brooding 
Hamlet,  always  looking  for  the  sepulchre.  We  don’t  have  here  Bishop  Ig- 
natius who,  upon  his  arrest  wrote  to  all  the  churches  between  his  home  and 
Rome  saying,  “Don’t  pray  for  me,  now  is  my  chance  to  die  with  Jesus.” 
None  of  that.  In  fact,  the  gospel  records  give  every  indication  that  he  tried 
to  avoid  death.  Even  John,  whose  Jesus  is  almost  untouchable,  says,  “And 
he  withdrew,  for  his  hour  had  not  yet  come.”  Luke  says  that  he  was  com- 
fortable in  the  day  in  the  city  because  he  was  surrounded  by  a welcoming 
crowd.  But  at  night  he  went  out  to  the  Mount  of  Olives.  He  tried  to  hold 
on  to  his  life,  didn’t  he?  But  the  time  came  when  he  accepted  what  lay 
before  him. 

When  Carl  Sandberg  was  still  Charles  Sandberg,  before  he  changed  his 
name  to  Carl,  he  wrote  a little  poem — little  known — and  I don’t  know  if 
he  addressed  it  to  himself  or  addressed  it  to  Jesus: 

Take  up  your  cross  and  walk  the  thorn  way 

And  if  a sponge  of  vinegar  be  passed  you  on  a spear, 

Take  that  too.  Souls  are  made  of  endurance. 

God  knows. 

However  he  came  to  it — sooner,  later — the  thought  of  giving  his  life  in  an 
effective  way  impressed  itself  upon  Jesus,  but  he  found  it  very  difficult  to 
talk  about  with  his  friends.  Matthew  and  Mark  say  he  withdrew  with  them 
to  the  north  country  away  from  the  crowds,  and  it  was  in  the  region  of 
Caesarea  Philippi  that  he  first  brought  up  the  subject.  Luke  says  they  with- 
drew and  Jesus  was  in  prayer,  when  he  mentioned  it.  And  the  reaction  he 
got  from  them  was  not  one  of  silence,  as  is  customary  with  us  when  the 
subject  of  death  is  brought  up.  It’s  hard  to  bring  up  the  subject  of  making  a 
will;  what  a silence  falls  over  the  house:  “Oh  no,  no,  no,  don’t  talk  of  that.” 
When  he  mentioned  death  he  did  not  meet  silence  among  his  friends,  he 
met  a storming  protest:  “No!  This  will  never  happen  to  you!  You  are  not 
going  to  die!  We  will  survive!  There  is  a way  to  survive,  you  will  survive!” 


196 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


They  were  screaming  there — Jesus  screaming  at  Simon  Peter  and  Simon 
Peter  screaming  at  Jesus.  They  screamed  as  though  they  were  trying  to  cast 
out  demons.  Of  course  Peter  screamed.  You  don’t  accept  the  fact  of  death 
like  that.  What  good  is  a dead  Jesus?  Life  is  the  thing,  the  tenacity  of  life. 
It’s  hard  to  die.  Babies  just  months  old  have  open  heart  surgery  and  live. 

Life  is  a tenacious  thing.  I remember  when  first  I learned  that.  I was  a 
boy,  maybe  ten  years  old,  chopping  cotton.  I don’t  know  if  that  means  a lot 
to  some  of  you.  You  have  a hoe,  and  it’s  hot,  and  you’re  in  a field  cutting 
weeds  out  of  the  cotton.  I came  upon  a snake.  I didn’t  take  time  to  figure 
out  what  kind  of  snake  it  was,  because  a snake  comes  in  several  categories, 
all  of  which  are  called  snake.  I killed  the  snake — or  at  least  I thought  I killed 
the  snake,  but  I had  not.  Chop,  chop,  chop.  Finally  I went  to  my  father  and 
I said,  “I  killed  a snake,  but  it  won’t  die.”  And  he  said,  “You’ll  have  to  take 
the  snake  and  hang  it  on  the  fence,  and  it  will  die  at  sundown.”  I didn’t 
know  snakes  didn’t  die  ’til  sundown.  I took  the  snake  and  hanged  it  on  a 
fence,  and  the  rest  of  the  day  I looked  toward  the  fence  and  the  tail  of  the 
snake  continued  to  move,  haunting  me  with  life. 

And  when  Jesus  said,  “I’m  going,  I will  be  killed,”  no  wonder  Simon 
Peter  screamed  in  his  face  and  said  “No!  We  can  survive.”  And  in  that  bitter 
exchange,  not  bitter  so  much  as  loud  and  violent  exchange,  finally  Jesus  said, 
“Hush,  no  more  of  this.  You  represent  to  me  a tempter.  Get  behind  me.  The 
voice  that  insists  upon  survival!  survival!  survival!  No!  In  fact  you’re  wrong 
about  me,  Simon  Peter,  in  fact  you’re  wrong  about  yourself,  because  the 
church  that  follows  me  must  also  take  up  the  cross.”  “Oh,  no.  You  mean 
the  church  might  die?”  “Yes.”  With  one  hand  he  took  his  own  cross,  with 
the  other  he  handed  a cross  to  the  church,  and  the  church  has  said  with 
Simon  Peter  ever  since:  “No,  no,  we  can  survive!  We  know  ways  to  survive. 
We  can  survive.  I know  attendence  is  dropping,  I know  the  budget’s  going 
down.  I know  the  public  press  is  making  fun  of  the  church.  I know  they 
talk  about  mainstream  Christianity  being  on  the  way  out.  I know  that,  but 
we  can  survive.” 

You  can  write  to  Colorado  Springs  and  get  these  survival  kits.  And  there 
are  some  tapes  by  motivators,  and  there’s  the  possibility  thinking  and  all 
that.  We  can  make  it.  We  can  cut  back  on  the  budget  a little  bit.  We  may 
have  to  take  some  of  the  money  out  of  outreach  and  put  it  in  a savings 
account,  in  case  we  get  a little  low.  I know  we  ll  have  to  cut  back  on  staff, 
we  ll  have  to  reduce  our  program.  But  we  can  survive.  We  can  survive.  We 
can  do  like  some  of  the  churches  and  have  some  special  events.  I notice  a 
big  booming  church  in  Florida.  Every  once  in  a while  they’ll  have  a beauty 


LAST  TEMPT  A TION 


197 


queen  come  in  and  say  a little  word  for  Jesus.  “A  Miss  Ochra  from  South 
Texas  will  now  say  a little  witness  for  us.”  They  have  basketball  players, 
seven  foot  eight,  come  and  say  a word  of  witness,  and  the  crowds  are  great. 
And  there  was  a church  in  Atlanta — they  tell  me  the  place  was  full — that 
had  a midget  who  was  a professional  yo-yoer  who  did  all  these  marvelous 
things  with  a yo-yo  and  quoted  scripture  for  an  hour  all  during  the  act.  And 
they  say  the  place  was  packed.  Now  listen,  we  can  survive!  There  are  ways 
to  survive! 

I know,  I know  as  well  as  you  do,  that  there  is  a lot  of  death  around  the 
church,  a lot  of  deadliness  about  the  church.  You  experience  it,  I experience 
it.  I recall  reading  about  Charles  Dickens  once  attending  a gathering  of 
clerics.  And  he  said  the  meeting  was  so  dead,  so  boring,  so  dull,  that  after  a 
couple  of  hours  he  said,  “May  I make  a suggestion?  Let’s  move  over  to  a 
table  and  join  hands  and  sit  in  silence  and  see  if  we  can  commune  with  the 
living.”  We  all  know  that  feeling. 

But  I am  not  here  to  read  the  coroner’s  report  about  the  church,  to  hang 
crepe  on  the  door  of  half-filled  sanctuaries.  I have  not  myself  heard  the  flap 
of  the  condor’s  wing  over  the  church.  In  fact,  the  whole  idea  of  the  church 
taking  a cross  and  possibly  dying,  is  not  a welcome  one  for  me.  I have  a 
tendency  to  think  of  the  church  as  immortal!  immortal!  immortal!  It  is  hard 
to  say,  “The  church  is  dead.”  Just  as  it  was  hard  for  them  to  say,  “Jesus  is 
dead.”  The  church  has  never  been  able  to  pronounce  that.  “Jesus  is  dead!” 
Even  on  that  awful  Saturday,  the  church  could  not  say,  “Jesus  is  dead.” 
They  thought  up  stories:  “You  know  the  one  they  really  crucified  was  the 
one  carrying  the  cross,  Simon  of  Cyrene,  that’s  the  one  that  was  crucified.” 
“Do  you  know  that  sponge  they  passed  to  him  on  the  cross?  It  was  a plan. 
It  had  a drug  in  it.  He  would  pass  out.  His  bodily  functions  would  recede 
almost  to  imperceptible  depth,  and  they  would  take  him  down  and  revive 
him.  He  didn’t  die!  He  didn’t  die!  No,  Jesus!  Survival  is  the  word.”  I feel 
the  same  way  about  the  church.  But  I know  this.  There  is  something  faulty 
in  the  thinking  that  says  the  death  of  Jesus  is  the  life  of  the  world,  and  the 
death  of  the  church  is  the  end  of  the  world.  No. 

When  you  move  to  lead  the  churches  across  this  land  and  around  the 
world,  pressure  will  be  put  on  you  as  though  the  number  one  item  on  the 
agenda  is  survival  at  any  cost.  Survival!  survival!  survival!  And  I hope  in 
that  pressure  for  success  and  booming  anything — let’s  get  them  here 
again! — I do  hope  you  will  hear  his  voice.  “Get  behind  me  tempter.  Take 
up  your  cross.  You  must  give  your  life.”  What  does  that  mean,  give  your 
life?  I don’t  know.  I think  it  means  to  be  willing  to  empty  your  pockets  for 


198 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


somebody  else’s  children.  I think  it  means  to  treat  as  mother  and  father 
those  who  are  not  really  your  mother  and  father.  I think  it  means  to  claim 
as  brother  and  sister  people  to  whom  you  are  not  kin.  I think  it  means  to 
reach  out  and  touch  untouchable  people  as  far  as  our  society  is  concerned.  I 
think  it  means  to  sit  at  table  with  people  who  live  far  outside  the  tight  social 
circle  ot  some  of  your  friends.  Break  bread  together.  It  means  to  be  a voice 
for  moral  values  in  a culture  that  will  immediately  accuse  you  of  sinking 
into  a bunch  of  moralistic  thinking.  It  means  to  witness  for  Jesus  Christ 
when  evangelism  is  being  laughed  at  everywhere.  It  means  being  an  advo- 
cate, being  an  advocate  to  speak  the  gospel  as  though  something  were  at 
stake.  Not  stand  up  and  just  describe  how  it  is  on  one  hand  and  how  it  is 
on  the  other,  as  though  we  were  serving  afternoon  tea  to  the  pros  and  cons 
of  every  issue.  To  advocate!  It  means  to  continue  to  give  money  to  others 
even  when  the  paint  is  peeling  in  the  sanctuary.  I think  it  means  that.  And 
if  you  go  that  way,  there  will  be  leaders  in  your  own  church  who  will  say, 
“Look,  this  is  suicide.  We’re  losing.  This  is  suicide.’’  And  you’ll  have  to 
decide  whether  it  is  suicide,  or  giving  your  life.  Who  can  say? 

That  little  poem  of  Charles  Sandberg — Carl  Sandberg — I don't  think  he 
addressed  it  to  Christ  or  to  himself,  I think  he  addressed  it  to  the  church. 

Take  up  your  cross,  and  go  the  thorn  way 

And  if  a sponge  of  vinegar  be  passed  you  on  a spear. 

Take  that  too.  Souls  are  made  of  endurance. 

God  knows. 


May  God  bless  you. 


Thinking  about  Everything,  All  the  Time 

by  Thomas  W.  Gillespie 

Farewell  Remarks  to  the  Class  of  1989 
by  the  President  of  the  Seminary 

In  his  latest  book,  Thinking  the  Faith , Douglas  John  Hall  gives  us  this 
vignette  which  suggests  the  scope  of  our  theological  task. 

“Once,  when  I was  making  a long  journey  by  air,”  he  writes,  “I  was  asked 
by  a fellow  passenger  to  describe  my  work  as  a theologian.  Since  it  was  a 
lengthy  flight,  and  since  my  companion  seemed  willing  to  listen,  I took  my 
time  and  attempted  to  answer  his  question  in  a responsible  way.  At  the  end 
of  my  discourse,  he  looked  at  me  very  earnestly  and,  without  a trace  of  irony 
in  his  voice,  said:  ‘It  must  be  wonderful  to  think  about  everything,  all  the 
time!’  ” 

Professor  Hall  continues:  “I  took  this  rejoinder  as  a compliment — not  to 
myself,  but  to  the  discipline;  for  it  was  followed  by  a sort  of  confession,  in 
which  my  traveling  companion  confided  to  me  that  he,  too,  had  once  wished 
to  think  ‘about  everything  all  the  time’;  he  had  even,  he  said,  ‘prayed.’  But 
now,  as  an  executive  for  a large  multinational  firm,  his  life  had  become  so 
centered  in  his  work  that  he  no  longer  could  afford  to  be  drawn  into  such 
flights  of  contemplation.  It  was,  he  said,  a great  pity.” 

You  who  graduate  today  from  Princeton  Theological  Seminary,  who  go 
forth  now  to  enter  the  practice  of  ministry  or  to  pursue  further  your  studies 
before  taking  up  this  practice,  are  privileged  to  center  your  vocational  lives 
in  this  theological  task  of  “thinking  about  everything,  all  the  time.” 

Perhaps  you  are  too  weary  just  now  from  your  years  of  study  at  the  Sem- 
inary to  appreciate  this  task  as  a privilege.  Many  of  you,  I realize,  are  verily 
“chomping  at  the  bit”  in  your  desire  to  be  rid  of  academics  in  an  ivory  tower 
and  get  on  with  the  work  of  ministry  in  “the  real  world.”  You  are  convinced 
that  you  now  “have”  your  theology,  and  all  that  remains  to  be  done  is  put  it 
into  practice. 

Quite  possibly  I am  guilty  of  projecting  on  you  the  thoughts  and  feelings 
I had  thirty-five  years  ago  when  I sat  with  the  Class  of ’54  where  you  sit  this 
morning.  It  is  even  conceivable  that  such  thoughts  and  feelings  are  indige- 
nous to  all  graduating  classes  from  theological  schools. 

Please  understand  that  I am  in  no  way  attempting  to  pour  cold  water  on 
the  fires  of  your  passion.  The  church  needs  passionate  leaders,  women  and 
men  who  care  deeply  about  the  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ  in  relation  to  the  needs 


200 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


of  the  world.  Even  more  it  needs  ministers  whose  passion  is  informed  by  an 
ever  growing  understanding  of  how  the  gospel  mediates  “the  power  of  God 
unto  salvation”  to  human  life  in  its  personal  and  social  dimensions. 

Your  experience  in  ministry  may  prove  to  be  different  from  mine,  but  I 
will  tell  you  one  thing  I learned  from  twenty-nine  years  of  serving  congre- 
gations as  a pastor.  The  practice  of  ministry  taught  me  not  only  that  I did 
not  have  all  the  answers  on  the  day  of  my  graduation,  but  that  I had  not 
even  heard  most  of  the  questions.  It  was  that  rude  lesson  that  enabled  me  in 
time  to  appreciate  what  a privilege  it  actually  is  to  be  vocationally  centered 
in  a task  that  both  allows  and  requires  us  to  “think  about  everything,  all  the 
time.”  It  also  compelled  me  to  acknowledge  that  this  is  a task  too  big  and 
too  heavy  for  human  ability  and  strength  alone. 

Douglas  John  Hall’s  traveling  companion  on  that  flight  confessed  that  he, 
too,  had  once  desired  to  think  “about  everything,  all  the  time,”  that  at  one 
time  he  had  even  “prayed.”  My  guess  is  that  he  spoke  for  many,  for  his 
name  is  “Legion."  But  before  you  judge  him  too  harshly  for  being  centered 
on  his  responsibilities  to  a multinational  corporation,  be  aware  that  the  same 
temptation  is  awaiting  you  in  the  practice  of  ministry. 

Churches  today  have  incredible  expectations  of  their  ministers  and  you 
will  be  compelled  to  meet  those  expectations  as  best  you  know  how.  Your 
time  and  your  energies  will  be  devoted  out  of  apparent  necessity  to  an  end- 
less round  of  duties  that  range  from  the  sublime  to  the  ridiculous.  You  will 
find  it  difficult  to  think  about  anything  any  of  the  time.  Even  prayer,  unless 
highly  disciplined,  will  be  neglected.  But  without  serious  reflection  upon  the 
sources  of  Christian  theology,  without  constancy  in  prayer  to  the  One  who 
is  the  Source  of  Christian  faith,  you  will  soon  find  yourself  running  “a  mile 
wide  and  an  inch  deep.” 

If  that  happens,  you  will  no  longer  be  either  a faithful  or  an  effective 
minister  of  Jesus  Christ.  Not  that  faithfulness  and  effectiveness  in  ministry 
depends  upon  our  knowing  it  all.  No  one  ever  has  or  will.  Life  as  it  unfolds 
before  you  will  ever  confront  you  with  new  questions  that  merit  serious 
consideration.  Faithfulness  and  effectiveness  depend  upon  a willingness  to 
keep  on  “thinking  about  everything,  all  the  time”  in  the  light  of  the  gospel, 
even  to  keep  on  praying. 

Douglas  John  Hall  claims  that  both  theology  and  prayer  are  forms  of 
struggle.  He  cites  Anselm’s  well-known  dictum  about  “faith  seeking  under- 
standing,” and  argues  that  the  participle  “seeking”  involves  a life-and-death 
struggle  with  God  for  understanding.  That  rings  true  to  my  experience  in 
both  faith  and  ministry.  Thinking  and  praying  “about  everything  all  the 


THINKING  ABOUT  EVERYTHING 


201 


time”  is  not  an  easy  task  or  a light  burden.  But  it  is  a task  worth  undertaking 
and  a burden  worth  bearing  for  the  sake  of  the  gospel  and  the  redemption 
of  the  world. 

Moreover,  it  is  a privilege.  There  was  a time,  at  least  in  the  history  of 
Protestant  Christianity,  when  the  church  understood  that  its  ministers  were 
not  a special  but  a privileged  people.  They  were  privileged  by  being  relieved 
of  the  need  to  center  their  vocational  lives  elsewhere  than  in  the  ministry  to 
the  church.  They  were  expected  to  use  this  vocational  leisure  to  “think  about 
everything,  all  the  time,”  even  to  pray.  That,  I say  to  you  on  this  your  grad- 
uation day,  remains  the  theological  task  of  Christian  ministry. 

To  this  impossible  task,  which  is  possible  by  God’s  grace  alone,  we  who 
are  your  colleagues  in  it  commit  you.  Go  forth  now  into  the  practice  of 
ministry,  remembering  that  it  requires  you  to  “think  about  everything,  all 
the  time” — and  to  pray. 


Mission  as  Kenosis: 
Implications  for  our 
Times 

by  Alan  Neely 


A graduate  of  Baylor  University,  South- 
western Baptist  Theological  Seminary,  and 
The  American  University  in  Washington, 
D.C.,  Dr.  Alan  Neely  is  the  new  Henry 
Winters  Luce  Professor  of  Ecumenics  and 
Mission  at  Princeton  Seminary.  He  has 
served  as  pastor  of  churches  in  Virginia  and 
Colorado  and  has  taught  at  the  Interna- 
tional Baptist  Theological  Seminary  in 
Cali,  Colombia  ( 1964-1975)  and  at  South- 
eastern Baptist  Theological  Seminary  in 
Wake  Forest,  North  Carolina  (1976- 
1988).  He  is  President  of  the  American  So- 
ciety of  Missiology,  editor  of  Faith  and 
Mission,  and  author  and  translator  of  nu- 
merous writings  on  the  history  and  theol- 
ogy of  Christian  missions.  His  inaugural 
lecture  was  given  in  Miller  Chapel  on 
April  4,  1989. 


Inaugural  Address 


One  can  never  be  certain  about  the  authenticity  of  stories  that  originate 
in  Texas,  but  I am  satisfied  that  the  accounts  describing  one  of  the  early 
Christian  missions  there  do  have  a historical  basis.  It  is  said  that  in  the  spring 
of  1757,  five  missionary  priests  and  a large  contingent  of  Spanish  infantry 
left  San  Antonio,  traveling  due  North  toward  the  hill  country,  their  specific 
destination  being  a fertile  and  inviting  spot  along  the  San  Saba  River.  The 
objective  of  the  expedition  was  threefold:  to  extend  and  secure  Spanish  he- 
gemony in  an  area  as  yet  uncolonized,  to  bring  the  light  of  the  Christian 
gospel  to  any  indigenous  peoples  they  encountered,  and  most  importantly, 
to  locate  and  bring  back  the  treasure  that  was  reputed  to  be  hidden  in  the 
hills  of  the  Balcones  Escarpment. 

These  eighteenth-century  conquistador es  were  aware  of  the  fact  that  the 
Indians,  particularly  the  fierce  Apaches  (and  as  it  turned  out,  others  as  well), 
would  likely  regard  with  disfavor  any  foreign  encroachment  into  their  ter- 
ritory. Thus  the  Spanish  plan  was  quite  simple.  They  would  attempt  to 
mollify  and  convert  the  Indians,  baptize  them,  despoil  them  of  whatever 
gold  and  silver  they  possessed,  and  then  kill  them. 

The  expedition  arrived  in  the  area  of  present-day  San  Saba,  Texas,  in  late 
April,  but  without  seeing  any  Indians  or  encountering  any  resistance.  They 
chose  a desirable  location  close  to  the  river,  went  to  work  erecting  a fort  and 
a mission  chapel,  and  then  proceeded  to  wait  somewhat  impatiently  for  the 
Indians  to  come  and  lead  them  to  the  fabled  treasure.  The  anticipated  arri- 


MISSION  AS  KENOSIS 


203 


val  of  Indians,  however,  was  delayed  for  reasons  not  altogether  clear.  Days 
passed  into  weeks,  and  weeks  into  months.  The  waiting  became  intermi- 
nable, or  so  it  seemed  to  the  Spaniards.  Fortunately,  one  of  the  soldiers  and 
at  least  one  of  the  missionaries  utilized  the  time  to  record  their  experiences 
and  impressions  in  journals,  some  of  which  survived  and  today  are  main- 
tained in  the  Texas  University  Library  in  Austin. 

The  leader  of  the  expedition,  Colonel  Diego  Ortiz  de  Parilla,  became 
particularly  impatient  and  confessed  his  frustration  in  his  journal:  “The 
country  is  good,  but  where  are  the  Indians,  and  where  is  the  treasure?”  No 
less  disappointed  was  the  missionary  priest,  Padre  Molina,  who  clearly  was 
enchanted  with  the  beauty  of  the  place  but  nonetheless  perplexed  by  the 
failed  appearance  of  potential  converts.  “The  country  fills  my  spirit  with  its 
simple  beauty,”  Molina  wrote,  “but  where  are  the  Indians?” 

It  seems  the  answer  to  this  repeated  question,  “Where  are  the  Indians,” 
came  rather  abruptly  and  infelicitously  the  following  March,  when  two 
thousand  unannounced,  truculent  Comanches  suddenly  arrived,  painted 
and  girded  for  battle.  As  you  can  imagine,  they  were  in  no  mood  to  hear 
the  gospel  or  to  dialogue  about  supposed  treasure.  Quite  the  contrary,  they 
quickly  surrounded  the  surprised  and  ill-prepared  Spaniards,  made  short 
work  of  the  fort  and  the  mission  chapel,  burning  them  both  to  the  ground, 
and  concluded  their  operation  by  depriving  nearly  all  of  the  Spaniards  of 
life,  liberty,  and  the  pursuit  of  happiness.  Since  that  time,  San  Saba  has  not 
become  what  one  might  call  a thriving  metropolis,  one  reason  being  that  the 
unfriendliness  of  those  Comanches  in  1758  tended  to  retard  urban  devel- 
opment in  that  area.1 

I.  Mission  as  Conquest  and  Cultural  Imposition 

This  all  but  forgotten  incident  in  American  church  history  is  significant 
for  a number  of  reasons,  not  the  least  of  which  is,  it  reveals  a philosophy  of 


1 I am  indebted  to  Robert  Fulghum  for  recounting  this  story  in  his  recently  published  All 
I Really  Need  to  Know  I Learned  in  Kindergarten  (New  York:  Villard  Books,  1986),  pp.  24- 
25.  The  reader  who  is  inclined  to  see  in  this  account  tinges  of  the  “black  legend”  or  who  is 
dubious  about  the  rapacious  behavior  of  the  European  conquerors  may  see  Enrique  Dussel, 
A History  of  the  Church  in  Latin  America  (Grand  Rapids:  Eerdmans,  1981),  pp.  41-55;  John 
A.  Mackay,  The  Other  Spanish  Christ  (New  York:  Macmillan,  1932),  pp.  23-41,  especially  pp. 
31-33;  and  Harold  E.  Davis,  History  of  Latin  America  (Ronald  Press,  1968),  pp.  94-100. 

The  bibliography  compiled  by  Davis  is  extensive  (pp.  731-733).  He  says,  “Basically,  our 
knowledge  of  pre-Conquest  civilizations  has  three  sources:  accounts  left  by  missionaries, 
explorers,  and  conquerors;  written  records  set  down  by  natives  under  the  guidance  of  such 
missionaries  as  the  Franciscan  Bernardino  de  Sahagun;  and  the  reports  of  archaeological 
research”  (p.  732). 


204 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


the  Christian  mission  neither  unique  nor  infrequent.  Those  acquainted  with 
mission  history  are  aware  that  missionaries  often  have  journeyed  to  other 
lands  with  objectives  beyond  those  of  “preaching  the  gospel”  or  “planting 
the  church.”  Moreover,  on  occasions  they  have  been  preceded  or  accompa- 
nied by  western  gun-boats,  soldiers,  marines,  or  legionnaires.  In  certain  in- 
stances missionaries  have  intentionally  prepared  the  way  for  commercial 
enterprise,  assuming  that  economic  development  by  western  entrepreneurs 
would  prove  to  be  beneficial  for  everyone.  It  has  not.  In  a word,  Christian 
missions  have  been  compromised  more  than  once  by  governments  and  busi- 
nesses whose  purposes  were  other  than  spiritual  or  humanitarian.2 

The  story  is  not,  however,  as  unambiguous  as  some  chroniclers  have 
sought  to  portray  it.  William  R.  Hutchison,  for  example,  in  his  recently 
published  study  ol  the  role  of  foreign  missions  in  American  Protestant  his- 
tory, Errand  to  the  World , offers  persuasive  evidence  that  even  in  the  heyday 
of  western  imperialism  there  were  a few  courageous  churchpersons  in  this 
country  (as  well  as  in  Europe)  who  challenged  Euro- American  claims  of 
cultural  and  religious  superiority  and  questioned  imperialistic  philosophies 
and  missionary  approaches  based  on  these  assumptions.3  The  nettlesome 

2 There  is  available  a large  number  of  works  dealing  with  this  theme,  e.g.,  Robert  L. 
Delavignette,  Christianity  and.  Colonialism  (New  York:  Hawthorne,  1964);  J.  Duffy,  Portugal 
in  Africa  (Penguin,  1967);  John  K.  Fairbank,  The  Missionary  Enterprise  in  China  and  America 
(Cambridge,  Mass.:  Harvard  University  Press,  1974);  Stephen  Neill,  Colonialism  and  Christian 
Missions  (New  York:  McGraw-Hill,  1966);  Arend  Th.  van  Leeuwen,  Christianity  in  World 
History  (Edinburgh  House,  1964),  pp.  267-268. 

From  the  beginnings  of  the  sixteenth  century,  the  spread  of  Christianity  was  part  and 
parcel  of  western  imperialistic  expansion  characterized  by  the  subjugation  and  exploitation 
of  vast  numbers  of  peoples  and  countries.  As  beneficiaries  of  western  imperialism,  mission- 
aries carried  not  only  the  good  news  of  the  gospel,  but  their  endeavors  also  included  other 
good  and  less-than-good  things  such  as  many  of  the  trappings  of  western  civilization,  western 
commerce,  and  western  gun-boats.  More  than  a generation  ago,  European  and  North  Amer- 
ican missiologists  cautiously  acknowledged  the  problem.  Christopher  Storrs,  for  example, 
wrote:  “I  am  not  suggesting  that  Government  and  Commerce  have  deliberately  and  wick- 
edly exploited  religion  in  this  matter.  They  have  often  been  seriously  concerned  to  bring  to 
the  “natives”  the  blessings  of  Christianity  hand  in  hand  with  trade  and  imperial  expansion. 
Still  less  am  I suggesting  that  the  Christian  churches  have  ever  consciously  allowed  them- 
selves to  be  exploited,  or  that  they  have  been  unwilling  to  forgo  (as  often  they  have  done)  the 
advantages  of  prestige  and  security,  with  which  a tacit  alliance  with  secular  authority  has 
provided  them.  I think,  however,  that  very  many  would  agree  that  the  spiritual  integrity  and 
power  of  the  Christian  message  has  often  grievously  suffered  by  this  association  with  secular 
interests  and  motives”  (see  his  1943  Moorhouse  Lectures,  Many  Creeds,  One  Cross  [New  York: 
Macmillan,  1945],  p.  6;  and  cf.  Orlando  E.  Costas,  Christ  Outside  the  Gate  [Maryknoll,  N.Y.: 
Orbis,  1982],  pp.  58-70).  One  of  the  more  negative  appraisals  of  the  relation  between  the 
political,  economic  and  spiritual  in  missions  is  that  of  Geoffrey  Moorhouse,  The  Missionaries 
(London:  Eyre  Methuen,  1973).  More  recently  William  R.  Hutchison,  in  his  Errand  to  the 
World  (Chicago:  University  of  Chicago  Press,  1987),  offers  a more  balanced  appraisal  of  the 
North  American  missionary  motives  and  objectives. 

3 Errand  to  the  World  (1987). 


MISSION  AS  KENOSIS 


205 


fact  remains,  however,  that  much  of  the  missionary  enterprise  has  been  fu- 
eled by  a triumphalistic  understanding  of  theology  and  history. 

Moreover,  it  should  be  acknowledged  that  missionaries  at  times  have  at- 
tached little  importance  to  their  calling  to  servanthood  and  have  entered 
other  lands  and  cultures  with  what  Kosuke  Koyama  calls  a “crusading 
mind,”4  assuming  that  their  divinely  designated  role  was  to  be  that  of  master 
or  patron.  In  these  cases,  the  missionary  went  as  a superior,  not  as  a subor- 
dinate; went  to  teach,  not  to  learn;  went  to  evangelize,  not  to  be  evangelized. 

Again,  it  would  be  misleading  to  imply  that  Christian  missionaries  have 
all  been  crusaders,  for  this  certainly  is  not  the  case.  Mission  history  (apart 
from  the  abundance  of  hagiography)  is  replete  with  accounts  of  men  and 
women  who  have  exemplified  the  spirit  of  Jesus  Christ  and  epitomized  a 
commitment  to  servanthood.  In  my  own  experience,  I can  affirm  that  most 
missionaries  I have  known  manifest  a willingness  to  sacrifice,  and  they  be- 
lieve with  good  reason  that  their  chosen  vocation  is  a path  of  renunciation, 
surrender,  and  devotion.  Yet,  the  very  nature  of  the  missionary  calling  and 
the  predominant  theological  rationale  that  has  undergirded  the  missionary 
enterprise  are  such  that  there  is  a ubiquitous  and  subtle  inducement,  a pro- 
pensity for  missionaries  to  assume  their  own  cultural  and  theological  supe- 
riority. 


II.  Pages  from  My  Own  Journal 

My  experience  as  a missionary  has  been  like  that  of  many  others.  I was  a 
child  of  a Christian,  churchgoing  family.  If  the  church  building  was  open, 
we  were  there.  My  spiritual  formation  began  at  birth  and  was  continuous, 
affirming,  and  pietistic.  1 was  taught  to  pray,  reverence  God,  regard  Jesus 
as  my  Lord,  and  practice  stewardship  of  life  and  possessions  as  naturally  as 
I was  taught  how  to  eat,  to  bathe,  to  read,  and  to  play.  My  earliest  recollec- 
tions in  terms  of  my  ultimate  vocation  involved  a sense  of  calling  to  Chris- 
tian mission  and  ministry.  Like  most  people  of  my  generation,  I received 

4 Kosuke  Koyama,  “What  Makes  a Missionary?  Toward  a Crucified  Mind,  Not  a Crusad- 
ing Mind,”  Mission  Trends  No.  1:  Crucial  Issues  in  Missions  Today,  ed.  Gerald  H.  Anderson 
and  Thomas  F.  Stransky  (New  York:  Paulist  Press,  1974),  pp.  1 17-132.  Koyama  later  wrote: 
“Evangelism  has  not  made  any  significant  headway  in  Asia  for  the  last  400  years  because 
Christians  crusaded  against  Asians.  When  did  Christianity  become  a cheap  military  cam- 
paign? Who  made  it  so?  I submit  that  a good  hundred  million  American  dollars,  too  years 
of  crusading  with  too, 000  ‘Billy  Grahams,’  will  not  make  Asia  Christian.  Christian  faith  does 
not  and  cannot  be  spread  by  crusading.  It  will  spread  without  money,  without  bishops,  with- 
out theologians,  without  plannings,  and  without  ‘Billy  Grahams,’  if  people  see  a crucified 
mind  (not  crusading  mind)  in  Christians.”  “Christians  Suffer  from  a ‘Teacher  Complex,’  ” 
(Mission  Trends  No.  2:  Evangelization,  ed.  Gerald  H.  Anderson  and  Thomas  F.  Stransky 
[New  York:  Paulist  Press,  1975],  p.  74). 


206 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


my  elementary  and  secondary  education  in  public  schools,  and  1 was  privi- 
leged to  attend  and  graduate  from  a respected  university  and  seminary. 

My  formal  preparation  for  being  a missionary,  however,  consisted  of 
three  seminary  courses  in  missions — two  of  which  I prepared  and  taught  to 
African-American  diploma  students  in  the  seminary’s  extension  program; 
fourteen  years  as  a pastor  of  churches  in  Texas,  Virginia,  and  Colorado;  and 
a total  of  ten  days  of  what  was  then  called  “intensive  missionary  orientation,” 
which  came  immediately  following  our  appointment  by  the  foreign  mission 
board.  One  of  those  ten  days  was  devoted  to  three  lectures  on  “the  biblical 
basis  for  mission,”  lectures  consisting  of  an  emphasis  on  God’s  purpose  for 
Israel  and  Israel’s  patent  failure,  the  coming  of  Christ,  the  calling  out  of  the 
church,  and  Jesus’  commission  to  his  disciples  to  “go  into  all  the  world  and 
make  disciples  of  all  nations.”  The  remainder  of  the  orientation  time  was 
given  to  recounting  denominational  mission  history,  understanding  the  or- 
ganization and  operation  of  the  mission  board,  its  rules  and  regulations 
which  included  how  many  cubic  feet  of  personal  and  family  effects  could  be 
shipped  overseas,  inoculations  we  would  need,  vacation  and  furlough  sched- 
uling, who  were  the  recommended  packers  and  carriers  of  missionary 
goods,  how  the  mission  organization  on  the  field  functioned,  alternatives  for 
educating  missionary  children,  and  how  best  to  deal  with  emotional  stress 
in  an  alien  environment. 

Our  first  year  as  missionaries  (1963)  was  spent  in  San  Jose,  Costa  Rica,  in 
the  Presbyterian  Spanish  Language  Institute.  The  following  year,  my  wife, 
three  children,  and  I arrived  in  Cali,  Colombia,  where  my  principal  assign- 
ment was  to  teach  in  the  International  Baptist  Theological  Seminary.  Like 
hundreds  of  others  in  the  early  1960’s,  I imagined  myself  as  being  a part  of 
the  great  wave  of  young  people,  Peace  Corps  volunteers,  missionaries,  and 
others,  who  were  making  a personal  sacrifice  to  come  to  Colombia  and  other 
lands  to  teach  and  to  preach  to  the  less  fortunate. 

In  my  own  case,  the  major  impediment  of  which  I was  conscious  when 
we  arrived  in  Cali  was  my  still  halting  use  of  Spanish,  for  I believed,  not 
altogether  incorrectly,  that  my  career  as  a missionary  depended  on  my  abil- 
ity to  communicate  effectively  in  this  second  language. 

We  had  been  in  Cali  less  than  two  weeks  when  the  field  missionary  called 
me  on  a Monday  and  said,  “Alan,  are  you  busy  next  Saturday  night3” 

“No,  I don’t  think  so,”  I replied. 

“I  really  need  someone  to  go  down  to  Puerto  Tejada  to  lead  a service 
there  in  the  mission.  Can  you  do  it?” 

I was  surprised  and  somewhat  hesitant.  “Don,  I have  only  preached  two 


MISSION  AS  KENOSIS 


207 


or  three  times  in  Spanish  . . . surely  there  is  someone  else  who  could  do  a 
better  job.” 

“Nobody  else  is  available  to  go,”  he  said. 

I wanted  to  be  cooperative,  so  after  some  discussion,  I reluctantly  agreed 
to  go.  Don  gave  me  the  directions  to  Puerto  Tejada,  how  long  it  would 
likely  take  us,  and  where  the  mission  was  located.  I asked  him  no  questions 
about  the  people  in  Puerto  Tejada,  nor  did  I inquire  about  the  conditions  in 
which  they  lived  and  worked.  I did  not  bother  to  ask  any  of  my  Colombian 
colleagues  at  the  Seminary  to  tell  me  about  the  history  of  the  town  or  the 
needs  of  its  people.  It  did  not  occur  to  me  that  any  ministry  I might  perform 
there  would  best  be  determined  by  knowing  something  about  the  situation 
and  the  people  in  Puerto  Tejada.  After  all,  I reasoned,  I was  in  charge;  I 
was  the  designated  preacher,  and  the  only  decision  I had  to  make  was  which 
of  the  two  sermons  I had  translated  from  English  into  Spanish  I would  use. 
Would  it  be  the  one  on  Jacob  from  the  28th  chapter  of  Genesis,  or  the  ser- 
mon based  on  the  parable  of  the  prodigal  sons  in  Luke  15? 

My  wife,  Virginia,  agreed  to  go  with  me,  and  after  an  early  dinner  with 
the  children,  she  and  I got  into  the  new  camioneta  (station  wagon)  the  Mis- 
sion provided  us  and  headed  south  toward  Puerto  Tejada.  We  had  not 
driven  five  kilometers  before  the  sun  went  down,  the  pavement  ended,  and 
it  became  very  dark.  We  met  no  other  cars  or  trucks;  there  was  no  one  else 
on  the  road,  and  the  only  thing  I could  see  was  what  was  partially  illumined 
by  the  headlights  of  the  station  wagon.  The  decade  known  in  Colombia  as 
la  violencia  supposedly  had  ended  a few  years  earlier,  but  the  bandits  and 
highwaymen  still  roamed  the  countryside,  and  the  farther  we  went,  the 
more  anxious  I became.  The  distance  was  only  thirty  kilometers,  but  it 
seemed  much  farther  because  of  my  increasing  apprehension,  and  because  I 
had  to  drive  slowly  and  carefully  over  a road  that  served  as  the  highway, 
but  in  those  years  was  nothing  more  than  a dirt  road  with  occasional  patches 
of  gravel  and  innumerable  bumps,  rocks,  and  pot-holes.  But  this  was  hard- 
ship, and  I began  to  feel  like  a missionary. 

The  directions  Don  had  given  were  not  difficult  to  follow,  and  when  we 
arrived  in  the  town  we  located  the  mission  easily.  As  we  were  getting  out  of 
the  stationwagon,  however,  a group  of  five  or  six  children  came  running  up, 
looked  into  the  back  of  the  vehicle,  and  then  one  of  them  said  to  me,  “Pues, 
donde  esta  el  proyector?” 

“Como?”  I replied. 

“Donde  esta  el  proyector?  No  hay  pehcula  esta  noche?” 

I had  no  idea  what  he  was  talking  about  and  turned  to  see  if  Virginia  had 


2o8 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINA R Y BULLETIN 


understood.  She  said,  “I  think  he  is  asking  if  you  have  a projector,  and  are 
you  going  to  show  a film  tonight.” 

“A  film?”  I had  come  to  preach.  “No,”  I responded,  “there  will  be  no 
pelicula."  The  kids  looked  at  each  other  momentarily,  and  without  saying 
another  word  they  disappeared. 

We  went  into  the  little  house  that  was  being  used  as  the  mission  and 
greeted  the  eight  or  ten  people  who  were  there.  A few  more  arrived.  When 
I sensed  that  everyone  who  was  coming  was  there,  I stood  up,  formally 
presented  Virginia  and  myself,  announced  we  were  going  to  sing  some 
hymns  and  choruses,  and  then  I would  give  a brief  homily.  I led  the  opening 
prayer  and  directed  the  singing  while  Virginia  played  the  accompaniment 
on  a small  pump  organ.  One  or  two  people  slipped  out  during  the  singing 
of  the  hymns.  Then  I opened  my  Bible  and  began  to  read  the  text  for  my 
sermon,  and,  to  my  chagrin,  as  I was  reading,  others  began  to  leave,  one, 
two,  three  at  a time.  At  first  I was  mystified  and  then  irritated,  because 
during  the  ten  or  fifteen  minutes  that  I was  speaking,  people  were  leaving. 
By  the  time  I finished,  the  only  people  still  there  besides  my  wife  and  me 
were  three  little  girls  seated  back  in  the  corner  to  my  left,  farthest  from  the 
door,  and  the  sexton  who  was  waiting  to  turn  out  the  lights  and  close  the 
building. 

I had  gone  to  Puerto  Tejada  with  a message;  few  had  bothered  to  listen, 
and  I was  angry  and  aggrieved  that  these  untutored  Colombians  did  not 
appreciate  what  I had  said  to  them.  As  we  drove  back  to  Cali,  I said  to 
Virginia,  “Those  people  did  not  want  to  hear  the  gospel.  They  wanted  to  be 
entertained.”  Her  reply  was  uncharacteristically  frank.  “Well,  if  they  had 
wanted  to  be  entertained,  they  should  have  stayed  to  hear  your  Spanish.” 

For  a w'hile  I consoled  myself  with  the  thought  that  if  my  use  of  the 
language  had  been  better,  if  I only  could  have  spoken  with  less  accent  and 
more  idiomatically,  then  the  people  in  Puerto  Tejada  would  have  remained 
to  hear  my  sermon.  But  eventually  I had  to  abandon  this  ego  defense  be- 
cause as  I came  to  know  the  Colombians,  I had  to  admit  to  myself  that  they 
were  not  uncultured  or  rude.  In  fact,  they  were  quite  the  opposite.  Also,  as 
I observed  other  missionaries,  one  in  particular,  who  did  not  speak  “good 
Spanish,”  I had  to  acknowledge  that  something  else  was  involved. 

I listened,  for  example,  to  Myra  who,  when  we  arrived,  had  been  in  Co- 
lombia with  her  husband  for  nearly  ten  years.  Myra  spoke  the  worst  Spanish 
I ever  heard.  She,  too,  had  spent  a year  in  language  school  in  the  mid-1950s, 
but  her  linguistic  skills,  to  put  it  mildly,  were  negligible.  She  is  the  only 
person  I ever  heard  who  pronounced  all  Spanish  words  with  a West  Texas 
drawl.  She  never  used  the  tenses  correctly,  and  elementary  syntax  and  the 


MISSION  AS  KENOSIS 


209 


subjunctive  mood  were  mysteries  she  never  fathomed.  When  she  wanted  to 
say  something  in  the  future  tense,  she  would  say  it  in  the  present  tense  and 
point  forward.  The  preterit  she  handled  by  pointing  backward.  She  never 
learned  to  speak  Spanish.  But  I could  not  ignore  that  the  Colombians  not 
only  understood  Myra,  they  loved  her,  appreciated  her  efforts,  worked  en- 
thusiastically with  her,  and  in  1974  when  she  had  to  leave  Colombia,  they 
wept.  They  loved  her  because  it  was  unmistakably  clear  that  she  loved  them. 
Her  attitude  was  neither  patronizing  nor  pretentious.  The  primary  gift  she 
had  to  offer  was  herself,  and  she  gave  of  herself  unstintingly. 

I went  to  Puerto  Tejada  with  a message.  It  was  delivered  but  not  heard. 
I left  humiliated  and  bewildered.  Yet,  reflecting  on  that  painful  experience, 
I learned  something  from  the  people  there  about  my  mission.  They  became 
my  teachers,  and  the  lesson  they  taught  me — unintentionally  perhaps — by 
their  ingenuous  response  to  my  insensitivity  was:  “What  you  have  to  say, 
Sefior  missionero,  will  be  important  to  us  when  we  as  human  beings — hun- 
gry, poor,  oppressed,  discouraged — when  we  as  companeros  become  impor- 
tant to  you.” 

III.  Being  on  Mission  Is  More  than  Just  Going  Somewhere 

“Identification”  is  a much-emphasized  theme  in  mission  circles  today. 
The  terminology  is  varied  and  includes  such  catchwords  as  indigenization, 
partnership,  mutuality,  acculturation,  interdependence,  and  contextualiza- 
tion.  Obviously,  these  are  not  synonymous,  but  they  are  interrelated,  and 
any  serious  discussion  of  them  should  reflect,  I believe,  the  three  principal 
areas  in  the  study  of  mission  and  missions,  namely,  theology,  history  (in- 
cluding biography),  and  methodology. 

We  are  living  in  an  era  in  which  probing,  often  troubling  questions  are 
being  raised  about  the  legitimacy  of  any  international  missionary  activity. 
To  some  critics,  it  smacks  of  proselytism,  neo-colonialism,  of  cultural  and 
religious  imperialism.  Concurrently,  the  interest  in  mission  and  the  number 
of  candidates  for  vocational  missions  have  declined  substantially  in  the 
mainline  denominations,  Protestant  and  Catholic.  Meanwhile,  mission  sta- 
tistics, always  considered  crucial  for  promotional  reasons,  are  maintained  or 
inflated  by  some  mission  agencies  by  recruiting  an  ever-increasing  number 
of  short-term  personnel.  Even  the  growth  long  enjoyed  by  many  of  the  older 
evangelical  groups  associated  with  the  Interdenominational  Foreign  Mission 
Association  (1917)  and  the  newer  Evangelical  Foreign  Mission  Association 
(1945)  peaked  in  1968  and  then  began  a slow  decline.5 

5 Robert  T.  Coote,  “Taking  Aim  on  2000  A.D.,”  Mission  Handbook  13th  ed.,  Samuel  Wil- 


210 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Curiously,  meanwhile,  the  ambivalence  toward  and  the  diminishing  in- 
volvement in  international  missions  on  the  part  of  many  Protestants  and 
Roman  Catholics  has  not  been  experienced  by  the  independent  fundamen- 
talists or  conservative  evangelicals.  Their  numbers  of  commissioned  mis- 
sionaries have  burgeoned. 

To  illustrate,  in  1968,  denominations  associated  with  the  National  Coun- 
cil of  Churches  boasted  10,042  overseas  missionaries.  By  1985,  this  number 
has  declined  to  less  than  half,  that  is,  to  4,339.  In  the  same  period,  the  num- 
ber of  missionaries  sent  out  by  the  ninety-two  agencies  associated  with  the 
IFMA  and  EFMA  increased  somewhat  from  12,859  to  r4d8i,  while  in  the 
same  seventeen-year  period  a group  of  thirty-two  independent  evangelical 
and  fundamentalist  agencies  increased  the  number  of  their  missionary  per- 
sonnel from  8,505  to  12,628,  a gain  of  almost  50  percent,  and  more  than 
three  times  as  many  new  missionaries  as  the  ninety-two  ERMA  and  IFMA 
agencies  combined.* * 6  This  increase  of  4,123,  incidentally,  did  not  include  the 
Southern  Baptists,  the  New  Tribes  Missions,  or  the  Wycliffe  Bible  Trans- 
lators who  reported  collectively  a 34.7  percent  increase  in  missionaries  under 
appointment.7 

More  than  one  observer  has  noted  that  “the  vacuum”  supposedly  created 
by  the  decline  in  the  number  of  vocational  missionaries  from  mainline 
churches  has  more  than  been  filled  by  personnel  from  conservative,  largely 
independent  fundamentalist  missionary  agencies.  This  not  only  has  alarmed 
many  mission  proponents  and  bureaucrats,  it  has  likewise  been  difficult  to 
explain  and  justify  in  denominations  where  grassroots  constituents  are  won- 
dering out  loud  why  they  and  their  leadership  cannot  return  to  the  days 
when  foreign  missions  was  a central  feature  of  their  church’s  agenda  and 
their  young  people  were  being  sent  out  by  the  hundreds. 

I am  a product  of  a denomination  with  a foreign  mission  board  not  affil- 
iated either  with  the  National  Council  of  Churches  or  with  the  IFMA  or 
EFMA.  Statistics  are  very  important  criteria  for  most  people  in  my  denom- 
ination because  they  believe  them  to  be  perceptible,  convincing  indicators  of 
spiritual  strength  and  growth,  or  the  lack  of  it,  and  statistical  growth  is  the 
means  whereby  the  rationale  is  validated,  achievement  is  measured,  value  is 
determined,  and  legitimacy  is  established.  Thus  when  the  mission  board 
talks  about  five  thousand  foreign  missionaries  under  appointment  by  the 

son  and  John  Siewert,  eds.  (Monrovia,  Calif.:  Missions  Advanced  Research  and  Communi- 

cation Center,  1986),  pp.  39-40. 

6 Ibid.,  p.  40. 

^ Ibid. 


MISSION  AS  KENOSIS 


21  I 


year  2000,  and  an  annual  budget  of  two  hundred  or  more  million  dollars, 
this  gets  attention. 

Here  I would  raise  a question.  Is  this  true  of  only  one  Christian  denomi- 
nation in  the  United  States?  Or  would  it  be  more  accurate  to  say  that  in  our 
culture  the  value  of  nearly  everything  is  determined  by  quantification?  One 
could  wish  that  people  interested  in  and  committed  to  the  Christian  mission 
believed  and  understood  that  being  a part  of  Christ’s  mission  means  more 
than  just  going  someplace,  even  in  large  numbers,  and  that  slogans  about 
theological  imperatives  for  world  evangelization,  enlarging  the  missionary 
force,  and  continually  increasing  the  mission  budget  would  be  rethought  in 
the  light  of  Christ’s  incarnation. 

IV.  Mission  as  Self-Emptying 

In  the  Philippian  correspondence  traditionally  believed  to  have  been  writ- 
ten by  the  Apostle  Paul  during  his  Roman  imprisonment,  there  is  a passage 
thought  by  some  to  be  a fragment  of  early  Christian  preaching  or  a hymn 
sung  by  the  church  during  the  first  century.  It  is  found  in  Phil.  2:5-11: 

Have  this  mind  among  yourselves, 
which  is  yours  in  Christ  Jesus, 
who  being  in  the  form  of  God, 
did  not  count  equality  with  God 
a thing  to  be  grasped, 
but  emptied  himself, 
taking  the  form  of  a servant, 

being  born  in  the  likeness  of  men  (human  beings). 

And  being  found  in  human  form 

he  humbled  himself  and  became  obedient 
unto  death,  even  death  on  a cross. 

Therefore  God  has  highly  exalted  him  and 
bestowed  on  him  the  name  which  is 
above  every  name, 

that  at  the  name  of  Jesus  every  knee  should  bow, 
in  heaven  and  on  earth  and  under  the  earth, 
and  every  tongue  confess  that  Jesus  Christ  is  Lord, 
to  the  glory  of  God  the  Father. 

It  is  not  possible  in  the  space  of  a single  lecture  to  treat  the  whole  of  this 
dramatic  passage,  nor  would  I pretend  to  exhaust  the  meaning  of  the  single 


212 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


phrase  from  which  I have  drawn  the  theme  of  this  discussion,  namely  the 
two  words  in  verse  7 ,heauton  ekenosen  variously  translated  as  “emptied  him- 
self,” “made  himself  nothing,”  or  “gave  up  all  he  had.”  It  is  a poignant, 
vivid  expression,  appearing  only  this  one  time  in  the  New  Testament.8  And 
though  consonant  with  the  portrayal  of  Jesus  found  in  the  gospels,  kenotic 
Christology  has  incited  intense,  prolonged,  and  sometimes  acrimonious  the- 
ological debate.  At  the  same  time,  the  idea  of  kenosis  has  been  incorporated 
into  the  popular  piety  of  each  of  the  three  major  branches  of  Christianity 
with  little  apparent  difficulty.9  Christian  hymnody,  for  example,  frequently 
reflects  a kenotic  motif.10  One  well-known  example  is  a hymn  by  Emily 
Elliott: 


Thou  didst  leave  thy  throne  and  thy  kingly  crown 
When  thou  earnest  to  earth  for  me;  .... 

But  in  lowly  birth  didst  thou  come  to  earth, 

And  in  great  humility. 

During  the  Lenten  season  this  year  I noted  for  the  first  time  the  words  of 
an  anonymous  American  folk  hymn,  “What  Wondrous  Love  is  This”: 

When  I was  sinking  down,  sinking  down,  sinking  down, 

When  I was  sinking  down  Beneath  God’s  righteous  frown, 

Christ  laid  aside  his  crown  for  my  soul,  for  my  soul; 

Christ  laid  aside  his  crown  for  my  soul 

(From  Wm.  Walker’s  Southern  Harmony,  1843). 

Though  these  lyrics  may  be  unappealing  aesthetically  and  theologically  to 
us,  we  need  to  recognize  that  some  form  of  kenosis  has  found  its  way  time 

8 The  verb  appears  four  times  in  the  New  Testament  (Rom.  4:14;  1 Cor.  1:17;  9:15;  and  2 
Cor.  9:15),  but  only  in  Phil.  2:7  in  the  sense  of  Christ’s  self-emptying.  See  Gerhard  Kittel, 
Theological  Dictionary  of  the  New  Testament  3 (Grand  Rapids:  Eerdmans,  1965),  pp.  661-662. 

9 One  can  observe  the  kenotic  idea  in  the  works  of  Zinzendorf.  Commenting  on  the  hu- 
miliation of  the  Creator  in  the  Incarnation,  the  Moravian  leader  said  that  God  not  only 
became  a human  being,  he  became  “a  child,  and  indeed  one  poor  as  a church  mouse,  so 
naked  that  he  could  move  a stone  to  pity”  (Vier  un  dreyszig  Homiliae  uber  die  Wunden-Litaney 
der  Bruder  [Barby?:  174?],  p.  21;  cited  by  Donald  G.  Dawe,  The  Form  of  a Servant  [Philadel- 
phia: Westminster,  1963],  p.  83,  n.  27).  Consider  likewise  the  kenotic  theme  in  Eastern  Or- 
thodoxy and  Roman  Catholicism,  Dawe,  pp.  146-147,  149-155. 

10  See,  for  example,  Wesley’s  “Hark  the  Herald  Angels  Sing,”  in  which  “the  Sun  of  Righ- 
teousness . . . lays  his  glory  by.”  In  another  of  Wesley’s  hymns,  “And  Can  It  Be,"  there  is  a 
verse  (unfortunately  deleted  in  some  hymnals):  “He  left  his  Father’s  throne  above. . . . Emp- 
tied himself  of  all  but  love. . .”  See  also  T.  B.  Tucker’s  hymn,  “All  Praise  Be  Yours”  which 
begins:  “All  praise  be  yours,  for  you,  O King  divine,  Your  rightful  glory  freely  did  re- 
sign.”Also  in  Cardene  Marie  Noel’s  hymn,  “At  the  Name  of  Jesus” — clearly  reflecting  Phil. 
2:9-11 — one  stanza  includes:  “Humbled  for  a season.  To  receive  a name. . . . 


MISSION  AS  KENOSIS 


2I3 


and  time  again  into  the  consciousness  of  professing  Christian  believers.  Fur- 
thermore, the  retention  of  this  Philippian  text  as  a part  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment canon  is  evidence  that  the  early  church  had  no  serious  theological 
reservations  with  the  idea  of  Christ’s  self-emptying.  It  is  theologians  for 
whom  it  has  been  a vexing  issue  and  “a  stone  of  stumbling.” 

What  I want  to  say  about  these  provocative  words  describing  Christ’s 
self-humiliation  is  a kind  of  paralipsis  in  which,  for  the  sake  of  making  a 
single  point,  one  compresses  into  the  briefest  comment  the  countless  and 
often  conflicting  interpretations  and  understandings  of  what  the  Apostle 
intended  by  the  use  of  kenotic  imagery." 

Christ’s  self-emptying  is  meant  to  be,  I believe,  the  subject  of  contempla- 
tion— faith,  reflection,  prayer,  meditation,  and  worship;  and  it  is  meant  to 
be  a model  for  imitation — replication,  renewal,  and  praxis — and  not  a prop- 
osition designed  to  provoke  theological  or  philosophical  debate.  Philippians 
is,  after  all,  a letter  written  to  a congregation,  not  a society  of  theologians. 

To  seize  upon  the  idea  of  kenosis  as  metaphysical  evidence  for  shoring 
up  tenuous  theological  presuppositions  or  dogmatic  speculations  is,  in  my 
judgment,  to  misuse  it.  For  heauton  ekenosen  is  a figure  of  speech,  a meta- 
phor illustrating  a profound  theological  and  ethical  truth  and  affording  us 
who  profess  to  be  Christ’s  disciples  a sublime  example.  Alexander  Bruce  in 
his  (1874)  classic  study  of  kenotic  theology  said: 

It  is  true  that  the  act  by  which  the  Son  of  God  became  man  is  inimi- 
table; but  the  mind  which  moved  Him  to  perform  that  act  is  not  in- 

" Leonardo  Boff  contends  that  the  synoptic  gospels  depict  Jesus  as  “living  a life  charged 
with  conflict  and  pain,”  and  that  if  “we  take  the  incarnation  absolutely  seriously,”  we  will 
see  it  “as  an  ‘emptying,’  as  the  total  evacuation  of  divinity,”  Passion  of  Christ,  Passion  of  the 
World  (Maryknoll,  N.Y.:  Orbis,  1987),  p.  xii. 

It  appears  to  me  that  Christ’s  kenosis  involved  at  least  the  following:  (1)  his  renunciation 
of  divine  prerogatives;  (2)  the  necessity  for  his  developing  in  knowledge  and  understanding; 
(3)  his  refusal  to  presume  upon  his  relationship  with  God  and  to  employ  the  power  of  the 
world  to  accomplish  his  mission;  (4)  his  willingness  to  risk  failure  by  attracting  disciples  only 
by  self-giving  love,  and  by  limiting  himsell  to  a single  time,  space,  and  people — one  would 
do  well  to  consider  Jesus’  estimated  thirty  years  of  preparation  before  beginning  his  ministry; 
and  (5)  the  necessity  for  him  to  exercise  faith  in  God  and  maintain  a relationship  with  God 
through  prayer,  dependence,  and  devotion. 

We  should  not  lose  sight  of  the  doctrinal  Christological  norms  established  during  the  first 
five  centuries  A.D.,  for  keeping  them  in  proper  perspective  has  preserved  the  church  from 
fanciful  speculations  and  doctrinal  excesses.  At  the  same  time,  if  we  accept  kenosis  as  a 
mythic  insight  into  the  nature  and  working  of  God,  we  have  thereby  a very  important  key 
for  grasping  the  meaning  and  the  means  of  the  incarnation.  Furthermore,  one  can  accept  the 
exinanition  of  Christ  without  becoming  bogged  down  in  the  debate  regarding  the  implica- 
tions of  kenosis  for  Trinitarianism  or  in  needless  questions  such  as  “What  was  happening  to 
the  universe  during  the  period  of  the  Son’s  earthly  life?”  See  William  Temple,  Christus  Ver- 
itas (New  York:  Macmillan,  1949),  p.  192. 


214 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


imitable;  and  it  is  the  mind  or  moral  disposition  of  Christ,  revealed 
both  in  imitable  and  in  inimitable  acts,  which  is  the  subject  of  com- 
mendation. . . . Of  Him  whose  mind  is  commended  as  worthy  of  imi- 
tation, the  apostle  predicates  two  acts  through  which  that  mind  was 
revealed:  First,  an  act  of  self-emptying,  in  virtue  of  which  He  became 
Man;  then  a continuous  act  or  habit  of  self-humiliation  on  the  part  of 
the  incarnate  One,  which  culminated  in  the  endurance  of  death  on  the 
cross.12 

Following  Bruce’s  very  pastoral  interpretation,  I want  to  restate  and  un- 
derscore several  of  his  inferences.13  (i)  Christ  existed  in  a form  capable  of 
self-emptying.  (2)  His  incarnation  involved  a change  of  state  and  status  from 
being  in  “the  form  of  God”  to  one  of  being  in  “the  form  of  a servant.”  (3) 
Despite  this  radical  condescension,  the  person  of  Christ  remained  the  same. 
“Kenosis  did  not  mean  self -extinction."'*  (4)  There  was  continuity  between 
the  mind  of  God  who  purposed  the  incarnation  and  the  mind  of  Jesus  Christ 
whose  life  was  dedicated  to  fulfilling  the  purpose  of  that  divine  mind.'5  (5) 
The  life  of  Jesus  the  Christ  was  consummately  and  consistently  a life  of  self- 
emptying, a life  of  service.  And  (6)  from  the  beginning  of  his  earthly  exis- 
tence until  the  end,  “Christ  was  a free  agent.”16  He  was  not  the  helpless 
victim  of  a prearranged  or  an  unavoidable  tragedy.  “I  lay  down  my  life,” 
the  Johannine  Jesus  said.  “No  one  takes  it  from  me,  but  I lay  it  down  of  my 
own  accord”  (Jn.  10:17-18).  His  birth,  his  life,  and  his  death  were  tangible, 
continual,  and  incontrovertible  evidence  of  self-emptying. 

V.  Kenosis:  A Model  for  Mission? 

Anyone  who  has  investigated  the  extensive  amount  of  literature  on  the 
subject  of  kenosis  is  aware  of  the  profound  hermeneutical  and  theological 
questions  raised  as  to  the  meaning,  the  extent,  the  purpose,  and  the  possible 
repercussions  of  kenotic  Christology.  I am  not  dismissing  these  questions  as 
being  unimportant,  nor  do  I intend  to  imply  that  we  should  ignore  the  anal- 
yses and  insights  of  the  host  of  renowned  and  learned  scholars  who  from 
the  time  of  the  early  church  fathers  until  today  have  labored  and  struggled 
with  this  issue.  We  are  all  benefactors  of  their  efforts.  It  is  my  belief,  how- 

11  The  Humiliation  of  Christ  (Edinburgh:  T.  & T.  Clark,  1876),  pp.  20-21. 

Ibid.,  pp.  28-30. 

M Ibid.,  p.  29.  Bruce  continues,  “He  who  emptied  Himself  was  the  same  with  Him  who 
humbled  Himself;  and  the  kenosis  and  the  tapeinosis  were  two  acts  of  the  same  mind  dwell- 
ing in  the  same  subject.” 

Ibid. 

'6  Ibid. 


MISSION  AS  KENOSIS 


215 


ever,  that  Christian  doctrine  that  ultimately  matters  arises  out  of  the  prac- 
tical, day-to-day  experience  of  human  beings  trying  to  relate  their  struggles, 
doubts,  fears,  sufferings,  and  pain  to  the  God  revealed  in  Jesus  Christ.  If, 
therefore,  a significant  Christological  insight  is  ignored,  or  misunderstood, 
or  disparaged,  for  whatever  reason,  the  consequences  can  be  as  far-reaching 
as  they  can  be  injurious. 

After  working  in  the  field  of  missions  for  many  years,  I have  come  to  the 
conclusion — based  on  experience  and  some  knowledge  of  mission  history 
and  theology— that  the  subject  of  Christ’s  kenosis  and  the  implications  of 
his  self-humiliation  either  have  been  generally  ignored  or  misapplied.  I 
voice  this  as  something  more  than  a hypothesis  and  something  less  than  a 
settled  judgment. 

There  is  no  scarcity  of  published  theologies  of  mission,  some  of  which 
deal  more  systematically  and  directly  with  the  biblical  material  than  others. 
It  is  rare,  however,  to  find  one  that  discusses  Christ’s  kenosis  or  sees  any 
relationship  between  his  “self-emptying”  and  the  Christian  mission.'7  For 
example,  the  extraordinarily  important  and  progressive  decree  of  Vatican  II 
on  the  church’s  missionary  activity,  Ad  Gentes,  begins  by  setting  forth  the 
“doctrinal  principles”  for  mission  and  cites  the  passage  in  2 Corinthians  8:9, 
which  many  exegetes  regard  as  kenotic:  “Though  rich,  he  (Christ)  was 
made  poor  for  our  sake,  that  by  his  poverty  we  might  become  rich.”  Also, 
the  familiar  words  of  Jesus  from  the  Gospel  of  Mark  are  quoted:  “The  Son 

'7  See,  for  example,  Johannes  Blauw,  The  Missionary  Nature  of  the  Church  (London:  Lut- 
terworth, 1962);  W.  Anderson,  Towards  a Theology  of  Mission  (London:  S.C.M.,  1955);  H.  J. 
Margull,  Hope  in  Action  (Philadelphia:  Muhlenberg,  1962);  Max  Warren,  The  Truth  of  Vision 
(London:  Canterbury,  1948);  The  Christian  Mission  (London:  S.C.M.,  1951);  and  The  Christian 
Imperative  (London:  S.C.M.,  1955);  Stephen  C.  Neill,  Creative  Tension  (London:  Edinburgh 
House,  1955);  G.  F.  Vicedom,  Missio  Dei  (Munich:  Kaiser,  1958);  Edward  Schillebeeckx,  The 
Mission  of  the  Church  (New  York:  Seabury  Press,  1973);  Julian  Price  Love,  The  Missionary 
Message  of  the  Bible  (New  York:  Macmillan,  1941);  Robert  H.  Glover,  The  Bible  Basis  of 
Missions  (Bible  House  of  Los  Angeles,  1946);  Edward  Shillito,  The  Way  of  Witnesses  (New 
York:  Friendship  Press,  1936);  Edmund  Davison  Soper,  The  Biblical  Background  of  the  Chris- 
tian World  Mission  (New  York:  Abingdon-Cokesbury,  1951);  Donald  Senior  and  Carroll 
Stuhlmueller,  The  Biblical  Foundations  for  Mission  (Maryknoll,  N.Y.:  Orbis,  1983);  Lesslie 
Newbigin,  The  Open  Secret  (Grand  Rapids:  Eerdmans,  1978). 

After  examining  more  than  fifty  theologies  of  mission,  the  only  exceptions  to  this  neglect 
I have  found  are  in  Josef  Mueller,  Missionarische  Anpassung  als  Theologisches  Prinzip  (Muen- 
ster:  Aschendorffsche,  1972),  pp.  277-279;  La  Formazione  del  Missionario  Oggi  (Brescia:  Pai- 
deia,  1978),  pp.  8,  22-23,  126-127,  15L  181,  227-228,  241-242,  250,  253-256,  314,  322,  333-348; 
Hans  Waldenfels,  “Das  ‘Kenotische’  al  Grundzug  Kommunkation,”  in  Denn  Ich  bin  bei  Euch 
(Zurich:  Benziger,  1978),  pp.  327-328;  a brief  discussion  by  Max  Warren  in  an  essay,  “The 
Meaning  of  Identification,”  The  Theology  of  the  Christian  Mission,  ed.  Gerald  H.  Anderson 
(New  York:  McGraw  Hill,  1961),  pp.  234-235;  and  by  way  of  implication  but  without  ref- 
erence to  the  kenotic  motif,  “Mission  as  Subordination”  in  Douglas  Webster,  Yes  to  Mission 
(London:  S.C.M.,  1966),  pp.  50-56. 


2l6 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


of  man  did  not  come  to  be  served,  but  to  serve  and  to  give  his  life  as  a 
ransom  for  many”  (10:45).  But  nothing  is  said  beyond  the  citing  of  these 
verses.  The  idea  of  kenosis  is  not  developed.'8  Nothing  is  said  about  what 
this  implies  for  the  missioner  or  for  the  Church. 

Not  unusual,  especially  in  conservative  evangelical  theologies  of  mission, 
are  references  to  Phil.  2:5,  for  here  one  finds  the  basis  for  the  oft-employed 
injunction  to  be  submissive  to  higher  authority  by  having  “the  same  mind 
as  Christ  Jesus.”  Likewise,  verses  9-1 1 are  discussed,  for  these  describe  the 
exaltation  of  Christ  that  resulted  from  his  “complete  obedience,”  and  the 
passage  concludes  with  the  assurance  that  sometime  in  the  future  the  whole 
world  “will  confess  that  Jesus  Christ  is  Lord.”  Other  than  this,  however, 
nothing  is  said.'9  It  is  as  if  verse  7 were  not  in  the  text. 

Why  is  this?  Why  have  mission  theologians  for  the  most  part  passed  over 
this  text?  I must  confess  that  I do  not  know,  but  I can  suggest  several  pos- 
sible reasons.  In  the  first  place,  kenotic  Christology  since  the  third  century 
has  been  the  raw  material  of  sometimes  intense  controversy.  It  is  easier,  of 
course,  to  debate  the  image  of  kenosis  than  to  emulate  it.  In  the  second  place, 
when  kenosis  is  overly  accentuated,  it  raises  unnecessary  and  unanswerable 
philosophical  questions.  Furthermore,  the  kenosis  tradition  for  many  is  as- 
sociated with  certain  theological  points  of  view,  now  generally  discredited, 
that  flourished  in  the  late  nineteenth  and  early  twentieth  centuries. 

Why,  then,  pursue  it  as  a missiological  theme?  My  response  is  twofold. 
First,  any  thorough  portrayal  of  the  God  revealed  in  Jesus  of  Nazareth,  the 
Christ  of  the  New  Testament,  will  of  necessity  include  a kenotic  component. 
I believe,  with  Vincent  Taylor,  that  some  semblance  of  kenosis  “is  an  inev- 
itable part  of  any  Christology  that  claims  to  be  rooted  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment.”20 Kenosis  is  not  a gloss,  a Pauline  innovation,  or  a theme  limited  to 
one  or  two  passages  in  the  New  Testament.  It  is  a recurring  picture  of 
Christ’s  servant  life  and  death.  Self-emptying,  moreover,  is  a reflection  of 
the  kind  of  God  for  whom  the  incarnation  was  not  only  consistent,  but  was 
also  possible.21 


18  Austin  P.  Flannery,  ed.,  Documents  of  Vatican  II  (Grand  Rapids:  Eerdmans,  1975),  p. 
8i5- 

19  See,  for  example,  J.  H.  Kane,  Christian  Missions  m Biblical  Perspective  (Grand  Rapids: 
Baker,  1976),  p.  108.  It  is  noteworthy,  however,  that  in  his  treatment  of  the  Person  of  Christ, 
Kane  discusses  Jesus’  virgin  birth,  sinless  character,  atoning  death,  victorious  resurrection, 
ascension  into  heaven,  and  second  coming  to  earth,  but  there  is  no  mention  of  his  self-emp- 
tying (pp.  185-188). 

“ Dawe  (1963),  p.  142. 

21  Ibid.,  pp.  195,  200.  “A  self-limiting  relation  to  man  and  the  whole  world,"  according  to 
Dawe,  “is  not  a unique  event  in  the  life  of  God;  it  is  a basic  quality  of  his  life.  Kenosis  is  not 


MISSION  AS  KENOSIS 


2IJ 


There  is  a second  reason  why  Christ’s  example  of  self-emptying  is  impor- 
tant for  mission,  namely,  the  potential  impact  on  the  way  mission  is  done, 
that  is,  on  praxis.  One  can  only  imagine,  for  example,  how  the  history  of 
western  South  America — especially  Peru — would  have  been  different  had 
those  first  Christian  “missionaries”  who  arrived  with  Francisco  Pizarro  un- 
derstood themselves  to  be  emissaries  of  the  self-emptied  Christ,  whose  im- 
age they  carried  in  the  form  of  a large  crucifix  as  they  marched  into  the 
valley  of  Cajamarca  in  October  1532,  rather  than  the  loyal  subjects  of  the 
court  of  Castile.22  What  would  Cuba  be  like  today  had  most  North  Ameri- 
can Protestant  denominations  and  their  missionary  spokespersons  in  1898 
opposed  rather  than  clamored  for  U.S.  military  intervention  in  Cuba?  Their 
primary  justification  for  advocating  U.S.  involvement  was  that  the  defeat  of 
Spain  would  open  the  way  for  the  immediate  evangelization  of  the  Cuban 
people.23  Would  there  have  been  in  the  early  1970s  the  demand  by  third 
world  Christian  leaders,  beginning  with  John  Gatu  in  East  Africa  and 
Emerito  Nacpil  in  the  Philippines,  for  a moratorium  on  missions  and  mis- 
sionaries had  Christian  churches,  theological  seminaries,  and  mission  agen- 
cies in  this  country  and  in  Europe  been  instilling  in  their  constituents  the 
model  of  the  Christ  who  emptied  himself  and  became  a servant? 

In  terms  of  the  effect  of  the  moratorium  on  the  third  world  churches,  not 
only  was  change  necessary  and  inevitable,  but  it  has  been  for  the  most  part, 

something  that  just  happened  once  in  Christ;  it  is  something  that  has  marked  the  whole 
history  of  God’s  dealing  with  men.  The  kenosis  in  Christ  is  the  ultimate  expression  of  God’s 
kenotic  love  for  man,  but  it  is  not  an  example  isolated  from  the  rest”  (p.  195).  Dawe  contin- 
ues: “Kenosis  is  the  characteristic  of  God’s  being  and  action  in  every  aspect.  . . . Kenosis  is 
the  key  to  the  saving  action  of  God.  His  characteristic  act  in  salvation  is  not  one  of  self- 
assertion  but  rather  of  self-negation.  In  contrast  to  all  human  attempts  at  self-salvation,  God 
saves  in  a gesture  of  radical  self-giving.  God  limits  himself,  taking  upon  himself  the  incom- 
pleteness, brokenness,  and  sin  that  separate  men  from  him.  Free  self-limitation  is  the  char- 
acteristic of  God’s  every  act,  indeed,  of  God’s  own  person”  (p.  200). 

” In  less  than  a month,  Pizarro  had  publicly  offended  and  humiliated  the  Inca,  Ata- 
huallpa,  then  took  him  prisoner,  slaughtered  hundreds  of  his  subjects,  promised  him  freedom 
if  a room  measuring  twelve  by  seventeen  feet  was  filled  with  objects  of  gold  and  a second 
room  with  silver.  The  gold  and  silver  were  brought,  and  the  total  booty  was  some  13,000 
pounds  of  gold  and  more  than  twice  that  amount  of  silver.  Rather  than  releasing  the  Inca, 
however,  the  Spaniards  accused  and  convicted  him  of  treason  and  sentenced  him  to  be 
burned  alive.  As  an  act  of  “Christian  mercy,”  Pizarro  offered  Atahuallpa  death  by  strangling 
if  he  would  accept  Christian  baptism.  The  Inca  agreed,  was  baptized,  and  immediately  exe- 
cuted, Hubert  Herring,  A History  of  Latin  America  (New  York:  Knopf,  1968),  pp.  139-140. 
See  also  Julio  Barreiro,  “Rejection  of  Christianity  by  the  Indigenous  Peoples  of  Latin  Amer- 
ica,” Separation  Without  Hope , ed.  Julio  de  Santa  Ana  (Maryknoll,  N.Y.:  Orbis,  1978),  pp. 
124-136. 

13  There  are  several  important  studies  of  this  era  analyzing  the  widespread  support  of  the 
U.S.  imperialistic  policy  by  Protestants  in  this  country.  More  significant,  however,  is  the 
Cuban  perspective,  e.g.,  Marcos  Antonio  Ramos,  Panorama  del  Protestantismo  en  Cuba  (Edi- 
torial Caribe,  1986),  pp.  159-186. 


2l8 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


I believe,  beneficial.  As  for  the  immediate  and  longer  term  impact  of  the 
moratorium  on  the  churches  here  in  the  United  States,  the  effect  appears  to 
be  equivocal  if  not  adverse.24  Would  this  be  the  case  if  our  mission  theology 
were  less  a reflection  of  what  Niebuhr  called  our  “collective  egoism”  and 
more  of  the  reflection  of  what  the  New  Testament  calls  diakpma,  which 
Hoekendijk  defined  as  “being  subordinate,  inconspicuous,  available.”25 
Does  mission  have  to  be  done  our  way,  according  to  our  agenda,  within  our 
structures,  with  our  people  in  charge,  for  grassroots  church  members,  pas- 
tors, and  the  rest  of  us  here  in  the  United  States  to  feel  involved  and  be 
engaged? 

We  cannot  refashion  history,  but  we  can  learn  from  it.  And  if  we  truly 
learn  from  history,  our  theology  and  ultimately  our  praxis  will  be  reshaped. 

VI.  Kenosis:  Implications  for  Mission 

If  fesus  is  a model  for  mission,  what  features  of  his  life  are  imitable? 
What  are  the  implications  of  his  kenosis  for  mission  today?  I ambitiously 
entitled  this  lecture  “implications  for  mission.”  What  I can  give  are  little 
more  than  “intimations.” 

(i)  Most  mission  theology  is  based  on  a kingdom  model,  not  a kenosis 
model.  I am  not  implying  that  we  should  scrap  the  kingdom  imagery  as  the 
“goal  of  the  Missio  Dei”26  (although  I confess  having  serious  misgivings  as 
to  the  usefulness  of  the  image  today).  I am  suggesting  rather  that  kenosis 
may  be  the  means  whereby  we  become  a part  of  the  Missio  Dei.  In  the  New 
Testament,  especially  in  the  Gospels,  the  reign  of  God  is  a dominant,  over- 
riding theme.  Jesus  said  little,  if  anything,  about  the  church;  his  teaching 
and  preaching  centered  on  the  kingdom.  As  a part  of  the  apprenticeship  of 
the  Twelve,  Jesus  sent  them  out  with  the  commission  “to  preach  the  king- 
dom of  God  and  to  heal”  (Lk.  9:2).  When  Jesus  said  to  Pilate,  “My  kingdom 
is  not  of  this  world”  (Jn.  18:36),  he  was  not  saying,  “You  politicos  need  not 
be  concerned  about  me  because  my  kingdom  is  located  in  some  other 
world.”  What  Jesus  said  and  did  troubled  Pilate  and  Caiaphas  and  the 
whole  religio-political  establishment,  and  rightly  so,  for  Jesus  was  declaring 

24  See  Donald  Black,  Merging  Mission  and  Unity  (Philadelphia:  Geneva  Press,  1986)  and 
John  Coventry  Smith,  From  Colonialism  to  World  Community  (Philadelphia:  Geneva  Press, 
1982)  for  accounts  of  the  transition  period  and  the  struggle  for  a new  focus,  new  structures, 
and  a new  way  of  doing  mission. 

24  Hoekendijk  continues:  “Everything  that  was  done  by  the  Son  of  Man  who  came,  Jesus 
Christ,  including  humiliation,  self-emptying,  cross,  and  death  is  summarized  in  eight  letters: 
diakpnia.  The  same  single  word,”  he  insisted,  “also  indicates  the  pattern  of  life  for  all  who 
follow  Jesus,”  The  Church  Inside  Out  (Philadelphia:  Westminster,  1984),  p.  146. 

26  J.  Verkuyl,  Contemporary  Missiology  (Grand  Rapids:  Eerdmans,  1978),  pp.  197-204. 


MISSION  AS  KENOSIS 


219 


that  his  kingdom  is  a different  kind  of  kingdom,  not  one  established  by 
violence  nor  maintained  by  tyranny.  It  is  a different  kind  of  kingdom  be- 
cause no  one  is  compelled  to  be  a part  of  Jesus’  kingdom  (family).  All  are 
invited,  and  the  most  unpromising — the  poor,  the  handicapped,  the  margin- 
alized, the  nobodies — are  especially  summoned  (Lk.  14:13,  21). 

Furthermore,  Jesus’  kingdom,  as  the  Bible  describes  it,  is  one  that  encom- 
passes all  of  life,  one  that  welcomes  the  most  unlikely  subjects,  one  that 
exposes  every  pocket  of  evil  and  liberates  from  every  injustice  and  oppres- 
sion, one  that  comes  through  the  most  implausible  means,  and  one  whose 
sovereign’s  power  is  revealed  in  weakness,  poverty,  suffering,  and  death  (Is. 
53).  And  Jesus’  kingdom  is  indeed  a threat  to  other  kingdoms. 

(2)  A mission  theology  informed  by  kenosis  will  allow  us  to  see  God  from 
a different  perspective  and  discern  where  God  is  incarnate  and  with  whom 
God  is  working  today.  Such  discernment  could  then  help  us  find  our  place 
in  mission.  In  the  last  book  that  Orlando  Costas  wrote  before  he  died,  he 
sounded  a warning  about  our  assuming  that  we  know  Christ  and  what 
Christ  is  doing. 

The  true  identity  of  Christ  is  not  determined  by  our  cultural  reality. 
The  Christ  we  experience  in  the  world  of  the  disfranchised  is  not  the 
product  of  the  so-called  culture  of  poverty.  Nor  is  he  an  offspring  of 
Marxist  ideology,  a consequence  of  the  so-called  scientific  analysis  of 
the  historico-economic  process  of  society,  which  detects  its  inherent 
contradictions  and  posits  the  means  for  its  solution,  guaranteeing 
thereby  the  ultimate  liberation  of  the  oppressed. 

The  true  identity  is,  rather,  defined  by  the  life,  ministry,  and  death 
of  Jesus  Christ  as  witnessed  to  by  the  New  Testament.  For  the  New 
Testament  constitutes  the  basic  source  of  information  about  his  history. 

It  also  underscores  its  theological  relevance  for  the  church’s  mission 
and  its  historical  significance  for  the  confession  of  faith  in  his  name. 
Any  other  basis  for  the  identity  of  Christ  is  simply  illusory  and  unsus- 
tainable. 

The  criterion  of  the  life,  ministry,  and  death  of  Jesus  Christ  permits 
us  to  identify  him  today.  This  criterion  leads  us  not  only  to  discover 
who  he  is  . . . but  where  he  is  to  be  found  today  (among  the  poor,  the 
powerless,  and  the  oppressed),  and  what  he  is  doing  (healing  their 
wounds,  breaking  their  chains  of  oppression,  demanding  justice  and 
peace,  giving  life,  and  imparting  hope).27 

27  Christ  Outside  the  Gate  (Mary knoll,  N.Y.:  Orbis,  1982),  pp.  15-16. 


220 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


(3)  A mission  praxis  shaped  by  a theology  of  kenosis  could  prepare  us  to 
be  evangelized  by  the  poor  and  enable  us  to  be  converted  for  witness.28  This 
idea  of  being  evangelized  by  the  poor,  the  weak,  and  the  oppressed  is  not 
appealing  to  most  of  us.  To  talk  of  us  Christians  being  evangelized,  espe- 
cially by  the  very  persons  whom  we  have  customarily  regarded  as  objects  of 
our  evangelization,  is  disconcerting  if  not  preposterous.  Is  it? 

Perhaps  my  experience  was  not,  as  I assumed,  similar  to  that  of  other 
North  American  missionaries.  Possibly  it  took  a wrenching  experience,  or  a 
series  of  such  experiences,  before  I was  in  any  sense  prepared  to  be  a mis- 
sionary or  to  preach  the  gospel  in  Colombia.  I confess  that  I required  more 
than  one  conversion,  for  as  well  as  being  converted  to  Christ,  I needed  to  be 
converted  to  the  Colombians,  to  be  confronted  with  my  pride,  my  cultural 
isolation,  my  unconscious  nationalism  and  racism,  my  latent  chauvinism, 
and  my  confidence  in  my  own  knowledge  and  skills.  I need  to  be  converted 
today  and  every  day. 

Do  not  assume  that  I am  limiting  conversion  simply  to  attitudes.  I believe 
Christians  in  the  third  world  can  teach  us  something  substantive  about  do- 
ing theology,  about  praxis,  biblical  exegesis,  history,  and  the  church,  partic- 
ularly ecclesiastical  structures.  They  can  incarnate  in  different  and  fresh 
ways  the  gospel  and  help  us  to  understand  powerlessness  as  well  as  the  se- 
ductiveness of  power.  They  can  teach  us  something  about  Christian  solidar- 
ity, a new  form  of  ecumenism  that  is  emerging.  We  can  learn  from  them 
about  suffering,  faith,  values,  hope,  openness  to  the  future,  Christian  wit- 
ness, and  authentic  evangelism — if  we  can  answer  rightly  the  question.  And 
what  is  the  question?  It  is  Leonardo  Boff s question  to  his  own  community 
of  faith,  and  it  is  a question  applicable  to  all  communities  of  faith.  The 
question  is,  “Can  the  church  be  converted  to  a more  vibrant  witness  of  the 
gospel  in  our  world  today?”29  The  answer  is  yes,  if  the  church  can  renounce 
its  thirst  for  power  and  its  attachment  to  stultified  models  and  “obstinate 
repetition  of  past  statements”  that  prevent  kenosis  and  a genuine  “openness 
to  the  future.”  The  answer  is  yes,  if  the  church  is  able  to  learn  from  the 
weak,  the  poor,  and  the  marginalized,  and  if  the  church  is  willing  to  risk 
failure  by  incarnating  and  depending  on  self-giving  love.  The  answer  is  yes, 
if  the  church  can  recover  its  role  as  pilgrims  and  strangers  who  are  on  the 
way  to  a city  whose  builder  and  maker  is  God,  not  Madison  Avenue  or  Wall 
Street.  The  church,  Boff  declares,  can  and  “will  be  a sign  of  liberation  and 


J 


/ 


i 

l 


\ 


18  Segundo  Galilea,  The  Beatitudes:  To  Evangelize  as  Jesus  Did  (Maryknoll,  N.Y.:  Orbis, 
1984),  pp.  6-8,  16-20. 

2<i  Church : Chartsm  & Power  (New  York:  Crossroad,  1988),  p.  64. 


MISSION  AS  KENOSIS 


221 


will  enter  into  the  struggle  for  liberation  with  all  peoples,”  however,  “only 
insofar  as  it  is  converted  and  becomes  more  and  more  an  incarnation  of  the 
Gospel,”30  gives  up  its  pretension,  its  triumphalism,  and  becomes  a living 
replica  of  him  who  “emptied  himself,  taking  the  form  of  a servant.” 

(4)  Finally,  a mission  praxis  resulting  from  kenosis  could  open  to  us  ave- 
nues of  ecumenism  and  interfaith  relations,  the  dimensions  of  which  we 
cannot  conceptualize. 

In  1806  William  Carey  wrote  to  his  friend  and  titular  head  of  the  British 
Baptist  Mission  Society,  Andrew  Fuller,  proposing  a decennial  missionary 
conference  to  be  held  in  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope  beginning  in  1810.  All 
Christian  denominations  from  “the  four  quarters  of  the  world”  should  be 
invited  to  send  representatives,  Carey  said,  for  such  a conference  could  in- 
crease understanding,  promote  unity,  and  thereby  benefit  the  whole  mis- 
sionary endeavor.  Fuller,  however,  ordinarily  very  supportive  of  Carey,  dis- 
missed the  idea  by  saying  it  was  a fanciful  dream  of  an  “enlarged  mind.” 
Such  a meeting  would  serve  no  real  purpose  nor  produce  any  real  unity.3’ 

Carey’s  proposal  was  not,  as  Fuller  thought,  merely  the  product  of  an 
“enlarged  mind.”  It  was  the  fruit  of  a life  and  mind  emptied  to  a remarkable 
degree  of  self-interest,  pride,  and  sectarianism.  Yet  a whole  century  would 
pass  before  the  dream  was  finally  realized  in  Edinburgh  (1910). 

Why  has  ecumenical  progress  moved  at  a snail’s  pace  since  that  time? 
John  Wesley  answered  it  this  way:  “The  pretences  for  separation  may  be 
innumerable  but  want  of  love  is  always  the  real  cause.”32  In  the  life  of  Jesus 
Christ  and  in  the  witness  of  his  church,  love  and  kenosis  are  two  sides  of 
the  same  coin. 

As  to  the  possible  effect  of  kenosis  on  interfaith  dialogue,  I invite  you  to 
read  with  care  the  final  chapter  of  Paul  Knitter’s  No  Other  Name ?33  Two  of 
his  comments  are  particularly  relevant.  First,  Knitter  contends  that  the  dis- 
covery of  the  truth  of  Christian  revelation  comes  not  only  by  means  of  “the 
sociopolitical  praxis  of  liberation,”  but  also  through  “the  praxis  of  dialogue 

30  Ibid. 

3'  William  Richey  Hogg,  Ecumenical  Foundations  (New  York:  Harper,  1952),  pp.  7-8,  17- 
18. 

32  Sermon  LXXV,  “On  Schism”  (1786).  Cited  by  Geoffrey  Wainwright,  The  Ecumenical 
Moment  (Grand  Rapids:  Eerdmans,  1983),  p.  200.  “If,”  as  is  often  said,  “ ‘the  mission  is  one,’  ” 
Wainwright  adds,  then  “a  divided  Christianity  is  no  more  tolerable  ‘at  home’  than  it  is 
‘overseas’:  the  being  of  the  Church  and  the  credibility  of  its  message  are  everywhere  called 
into  question  by  division.”  Wainwright,  p.  205. 

33  Paul  Knitter,  No  Other  Name?  (Maryknoll,  N.Y.:  Orbis,  1985),  pp.  205-231.  The  chapter 
is  entitled,  “Doing  Before  Knowing — The  Challenge  of  Interreligious  Dialogue.” 


222 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


with  peoples  of  other  faiths.”34  But,  he  continues,  there  can  be  no  genuine 
dialogue  with  those  of  other  faiths  without  entering  into  the  other  persons’ 
experience. 

A true  encounter  with  another  tradition  cannot  take  place  “from  the 

outside”;  I cannot  expect  truly  to  grasp  another  religion  by  standing 

outside  it  and  looking  in.  Somehow,  1 must  enter  and  be  “inside”  the 

other  tradition  by  sharing  its  religious  experience.35 

Entering  into  another’s  religious  experience  does  not  require  a renunciation 
ot  who  I am  or  of  my  faith.  Kenosis,  as  Alexander  Bruce  pointed  out,  does 
not  mean  “self-extinction.”  It  means  (in  this  case)  humbling  oneself  so  as  to 
be  able  to  see  and  feel  things  from  the  other’s  perspective. 

In  the  year  1910,  a baby  girl  was  born  to  an  Albanian  family,  Nikola  and 
Dranafile  Bojaxhui,  living  in  Skopje,  Macedonia,  now  a part  of  Yugoslavia. 
At  her  baptism,  the  infant  was  given  the  name  Agnes  Gonxha,  “Gonxha” 
meaning  “flower  bud.”36  The  Bojaxhui  home  was  very  pious,  and  the  three 
children,  Gonxha  and  an  older  sister  and  brother,  were  reared  in  an  atmos- 
phere wherein  they  were  taught  to  reverence  the  church  and  the  Holy  Fa- 
ther. 

As  a child  and  young  teenager,  Gonxha  was  caught  up  in  the  enthusiasm 
for  missions  characteristic  of  the  Catholic  Church  of  that  time.  Her  father’s 
sudden  death  and  the  economic  hardship  her  mother  experienced  evidently 
contributed  to  a special  concern  for  the  poor  that  subsequently  led  her  into 
a life  committed  to  God,  the  church,  and  to  missions.  Reading  and  hearing 
of  the  work  done  by  the  Jesuits  in  Bengal,  south  of  Calcutta,  Gonxha  even- 
tually sought  admission  into  the  congregation  of  the  Loreto  sisters  who 
maintained  a mission  in  Bengal. 

The  headquarters  of  the  congregation,  however,  was  in  Dublin,  and  she 
was  told  that  it  would  be  necessary  for  her  to  go  there,  become  conversant 
in  English,  and  then  request  assignment  to  the  India  mission.  This  she  did.37 
She  was  eighteen  years  old  at  the  time.  The  following  year,  1929,  she  was 
sent  to  Calcutta,  and  after  her  novitiate  was  assigned  as  a teacher  of  geog- 
raphy and  history  in  the  high  school  located  within  the  walls  of  the  Loreto 
convent.  Her  compassion  for  the  poor  and  suffering,  however,  intensified  as 

34  Ibid.,  p.  206. 

35  Ibid.,  p.  210. 

36  Eileen  Egan,  Such  a Vision  of  the  Street  (New  York:  Doubleday,  1985),  p.  7. 

37  Ibid.,  pp.  1 1,  13. 


MISSION  AS  KENOSIS 


223 


she  came  into  contact  with  the  slums,  the  hunger,  the  filth,  and  the  hope- 
lessness of  the  masses  who  lived  in  and  around  Calcutta. 

En  route  to  a retreat  in  the  Himalayas,  traveling  by  train,  she  said,  “I 
heard  the  call  of  God.”  It  was  a “call  within  a call,”  and  the  message  was 
quite  clear:  I was  to  leave  the  convent  and  help  the  poor  while  living  among 
them.  It  was  an  order.  I knew  where  I belonged,  but  I did  not  know  how 
to  get  there.”38 

This  new  sense  of  calling  was  not  the  sentimental  musings  of  an  adoles- 
cent. For  years  she  had  heard  the  sounds  and  smelled  the  stench  of  poverty 
outside  her  convent  window,  for  just  beyond  the  high  wall  that  enclosed  the 
Loreto  complex  were  the  slums  of  Moti  Jheel.39  Though  in  a sense  she  was 
protected  from  the  dirt,  the  open  sewers,  the  hungry  and  ragged  children, 
the  sick  and  the  dying,  and  the  squalor  of  a part  of  Calcutta  that  was  a 
quagmire  of  suffering,  Gonxja  could  not  ignore  what  was  taking  place 
around  her. 

It  would  be  two  years,  however,  before  she  could  persuade  her  superiors 
that  God  was  calling  her  to  leave  the  convent.  Father  Julien  Henry  who 
knew  Gonxja  as  well  as  anyone  explained  her  determination  as  follows:  She 
was  convinced,  he  said,  that  Jesus  wanted  her  to  serve  him  and  follow  him 
in  actual  poverty,  material  poverty,  to  practice  a style  of  life  that  would 
make  her  similar  to  the  needy  in  whom  he  was  present,  suffered,  and 
loved.40 

In  August  of  1948  she  finally  received  permission  from  the  Archbishop 
to  move  from  Loreto  into  Moti  Jheel.  It  was  not  an  easy  decision  even  then. 
“To  leave  Loreto  was  my  greatest  sacrifice,”  she  later  said,  “the  most  diffi- 
cult thing  I have  ever  done.  It  was  much  more  difficult  than  to  leave  my 
family  and  country  to  enter  religious  life.  (For)  Loreto  meant  everything  to 
me.”4'  She  later  became  a citizen  of  India  and  in  1950  founded  a new  mis- 
sionary order,  the  Missionaries  of  Charity.  You  know  Gonxha,  of  course,  as 
Mother  Teresa. 

Let  this  mind  be  in  you  that  was  in  Christ  Jesus 
who,  being  in  the  form  of  God,  did  not  consider 
equality  with  God  a thing  to  be  grasped, 
but  emptied  himself,  taking  the  form  of  a servant. 

38  Edward  Le  Joly,  Mother  Teresa  of  Calcutta  (San  Francisco:  Harper  & Row,  1983),  p.  9. 

39  Robert  Serrou,  Teresa  of  Calcutta  (New  York:  McGraw-Hill,  1980),  p.  37. 

40  Le  Joly,  pp.  9-10. 

4‘  Ibid.,  p.  13. 


John  H.  Leith,  the  Pemberton  Professor  of 
Theology  at  Union  Theological  Seminary 
in  Richmond,  Virginia,  has  written  exten- 
sively on  the  theology  of  John  Calvin  and 
the  history  and  theology  of  the  Reformed 
churches.  His  most  recent  books  are:  The 
Reformed  Imperative  (1988)  and  John 
Calvin’s  Doctrine  of  the  Christian  Life 
(1989).  The  following  essay  on  preaching 
from  a Reformed  theological  perspective 
was  one  of  the  Waif  eld  lectures  given  at 
Princeton  Seminary  in  March,  1989. 

During  the  centennial  celebration  of  Fifth  Avenue  Presbyterian 
Church,  New  York  (1908),  A.  F.  Schauffler  thanked  the  Session  of  the 
church  for  its  concern  to  provide  excellent  preaching.  His  words  are  worth 
quoting: 

The  management  of  this  church  is  of  such  an  intelligent  nature  that 
they  place  in  this  pulpit  men  of  national  and  international  reputation 
during  June,  July  and  August,  so  that  these  pews  and  galleries  are  full, 
never  mind  what  the  thermometer  says,  that  is  a benediction  to  this 
great  town  of  ours;  that  is  letting  your  light  so  shine  that  men  see  your 
good  works,  and  glorify  your  Father  who  is  in  Heaven,  and  the  gath- 
ering here,  the  securing  here,  not  during  the  summer  season  only,  but 
at  times  during  the  regular  season,  of  men  like  “Gypsy”  Smith,  and 
other  men  we  can  mention — Campbell  Morgan  and  Hugh  Black  and 
the  like — the  gathering  of  these  men  is  something  for  which  the  city 
ought  to  be  thankful,  and  of  which  this  church  has  just  reason  to  be 
sanctifiedly  proud. 

On  behalf  of  many  who  come  here,  who  are  not  members  of  this 
church,  to  whom  you  have  thus  ministered,  I desire  to  bring  a token 
of  gratitude,  and  to  render  in  their  behalf  to  this  church  and  its  pastor 
and  elders,  thanks  for  this  careful  ministry  to  the  wants  of  the  great 
spiritual  public.1 

No  higher  tribute  can  be  paid  a session  than  that  it  provided  preaching 
of  the  highest  excellence  and  integrity. 

It  is  no  longer  clear  that  many  church  people  attend  church  services  with 
the  conviction  that  they  shall  hear  a good  sermon,  that  is,  good  in  its  depth 
and  breadth,  in  its  utilization  of  the  resources  of  the  Christian  community, 

1 History  of  the  Fifth  Avenue  Presbyterian  Church  of  New  York  City,  New  York  from  1808- 
1908,  ed.  Henry  W.  Jessup  (New  York:  Fifth  Avenue  Presbyterian  Church,  1909),  p.  169. 


Reformed  Preaching 
Today 

by  John  H.  Leith 


REFORMED  PREACHING 


225 


in  its  clarity  about  what  the  church  is,  and  in  its  delivery  by  a person  who  is 
passionate  in  conviction  and  trained  in  the  art  of  explicating  and  applying 
the  Word  of  God  in  a sermon.  Yet  there  is  overwhelming  evidence  that 
congregations  want  two  competencies  in  their  pastors.  First,  they  want  per- 
sons who  are  able  to  explicate  and  apply  the  Word  of  God  with  power. 
Second,  they  want  pastors  who  know  how  to  incorporate  persons  into  the 
worshiping,  believing  community  and  bring  to  them  the  treasures  of  the 
gospel  in  the  passages  and  crises  of  life  as  well  as  support  when  life  is  routine 
and  boring.  With  amazing  unanimity,  pulpit  committees  want  a pastor  who 
can  preach. 

Yet  most  pulpit  committees  would  have  a difficult  time  explaining  what 
is  a good  sermon.  Some  have  never  heard  good  preaching  in  the  classical 
definition  of  the  term,  and  have  a difficult  time  distinguishing  the  preaching 
of  the  gospel  from  entertainment,  or  therapy,  or  moral  exhortation,  or  po- 
litical advice.  Indeed,  many  congregations  may  require  a period  of  time  to 
become  acclimated  to  a really  good  preacher.  James  Nichols,  in  a study  of 
Reformed  worship,  noted  that  church  services  in  the  Reformed  tradition 
were  dependent  upon  a theologically  and  biblically  informed  congregation.2 
There  is  a paucity  of  such  congregations.  Yet  congregations  can  be  educated. 
A decisive  test  of  the  effectiveness  of  a minister  is  the  difference  between 
•the  sermon  taste  of  the  congregation  when  the  minister  arrives  and  the  ser- 
mon taste  of  the  congregation  when  the  minister  leaves.  A second  test  is  the 
power  of  preaching  to  gather  a congregation,  to  create  a godly  public  opin- 
ion, and  to  build  up  the  communion  of  saints.  Once  congregations  have 
heard  good  preaching  of  theological  and  biblical  depth  over  a period  of  time, 
they  find  it  very  difficult  to  accept  poor  preaching,  or  to  be  enticed  by  actors 
or  entertainers  or  moral  exhorters  or  therapists  in  the  pulpit. 

There  is  great  need  for  preaching  with  theological  depth  in  our  particular 
day.  More  people  are  going  to  college  in  our  society  than  has  been  true  of 
any  other  society.  The  number  of  lawyers,  doctors,  engineers  has  greatly 
increased  over  a century  ago.  The  loss  of  a theological  picture  of  reality  or 
frame  of  reference  in  a society  dominated  by  the  secularity  of  television, 
education,  and  many  popular  magazines  also  calls  for  theological  preaching 
which  provides  a Christian  alternative.  The  centers  of  information  and  of 
political  and  social  persuasion  are  increasingly  secular.  Hence  theological 
preaching  of  the  highest  competence  is  essential  today  for  persuasion  and 
for  the  building  up  of  the  community  of  the  saints. 

2 James  H.  Nichols,  Corporate  Worship  in  the  Reformed  Tradition  (Philadelphia:  Westmin- 
ster Press,  1968),  p.  51. 


226 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


A further  reason  why  theological  preaching  should  be  emphasized  is  the 
abundant  market  for  its  wares.  The  theological  preacher  does  not  have 
many  competitors.  The  approbation  of  the  people  is  not  always  immediate, 
but  it  is  lasting  when  it  comes.  This  is  the  secular  justification  for  theological 
preaching.  There  are,  as  I hope  to  indicate,  more  theological  reasons  to  jus- 
tify theological  preaching.  All  preaching  is  by  nature  theological.  The  ref- 
erence here  is  to  preaching  that  is  informed  by  the  best  theology  of  the 
tradition. 


I 

Jesus  came  preaching.3  His  followers  have  preached  ever  since.  Some- 
times preaching  occurs  in  great  established  churches,  with  marvelous  music, 
with  an  established  liturgy  and  with  a budget  which  finances  both  preaching 
and  the  operation  of  the  congregation.  Much  preaching,  however,  has  taken 
place  not  in  established  churches,  certainly  not  in  great  churches  or  in  ca- 
thedrals, but  along  the  highways,  in  empty  stores,  on  the  frontiers  of  life. 
Preachers  have  gone  forth  not  because  they  were  offered  a job  or  given 
financial  security,  but  because  they  felt  a compelling  call  by  God  to  preach 
the  gospel  and  to  establish  churches.  The  church  in  which  I grew  up  was 
established  by  lay  people  in  the  1760s,  and  for  many  years  it  was  maintained 
by  pastors  who  had  to  earn  at  least  part  of  their  living  in  non-ecclesiastical 
endeavors.  The  roll  of  the  great  preachers  has  to  include  the  Bonifaces,  the 
Columbas,  the  Farels,  the  Wesleys,  the  Peter  Cartwrights  and  Sheldon  Jack- 
sons.  There  is  finally  only  one  justification  for  preaching,  and  that  is  the  call 
of  God.  The  support  of  an  established  church  may  make  preaching  more 
comfortable,  but  it  cannot  justify  it. 

Preaching  is  the  announcement  of  the  salvation  that  has  come  in  Jesus 
Christ,  calling  people  to  repentance  and  seeking  to  build  up  the  Christian 
community.  Evangelism,  according  to  Kittel’s  Theological  Dictionary  of  the 
New  Testament , is  proclamation  with  authority  and  power.  Signs  and  won- 
ders accompany  the  evangelical  message.  They  belong  together,  for  the 
Word  is  powerful  and  effective.4 

Many  patterns  of  preaching  are  helpful.  Yet  there  are  good  reasons  to 
insist  that  the  recovery  of  theological  preaching,  especially  in  the  Reformed 
pattern,  is  crucial  to  the  renewal  of  the  church.  This  preaching  responds  to 
the  crisis  of  a pluralistic  secular  society  by  providing  a coherent  vision  of 

3 Mark  1:14. 

3 Theological  Dictionary  of  the  New  Testament , ed.  Gerhard  Kind  (Grand  Rapids:  Wm.  B. 
Eerdmans  Publishing  Co.,  1964),  s.v.  “evangelizomai,”  by  Gerhard  Friedrich,  2:720. 


REFORMED  PREACHING 


227 


reality,  rooted  in  the  theological  reflections  of  almost  two  millennia  and  by 
enabling  the  Christian  to  find  a theologically  intelligible  place  in  the  world 
and  in  society. 

This  particular  pattern  of  preaching  has  received  three  clear,  precise  for- 
mulations from  John  Calvin,  from  the  Puritans,  and  from  Karl  Barth. 

Calvin’s  famous  letter  to  the  protector  Somerset  in  1548  concerning  the 
reformation  of  the  church  in  England  contains  a good  introduction  to  Cal- 
vin’s general  understanding  of  the  preacher’s  task. 

I speak  thus,  Monsignor,  because  it  appears  to  me  that  there  is  very 
little  preaching  of  a lively  kind  in  the  kingdom,  but  that  the  greater 
part  deliver  it  by  way  of  reading  from  a written  discourse.  I see  very 
well  the  necessity  which  constrains  you  to  that;  for  in  the  first  place 
you  have  not,  as  I believe,  such  well-approved  and  competent  pastors 
as  you  desire.  Wherefore,  you  need  forthwith  to  supply  this  want.  Sec- 
ondly, there  may  very  likely  be  among  them  many  flightly  persons  who 
would  go  beyond  all  bounds,  sowing  their  own  silly  fancies,  as  often 
happens  on  occasion  of  a change.  But  all  these  considerations  ought  not 
to  hinder  the  ordinance  of  Jesus  Christ  from  having  free  course  in  the 
preaching  of  the  gospel. 

Now,  this  preaching  ought  not  to  be  lifeless  but  lively,  to  teach,  to 
exalt,  to  reprove,  as  Saint  Paul  says  in  speaking  thereof  to  Timothy  (2 
Tim.  3).  So  indeed,  that  if  an  unbeliever  enter,  he  may  be  so  effectively 
arrested  and  convinced  as  to  give  glory  to  God,  as  Paul  says  in  another 
passage  (1  Cor.  14).  You  are  also  aware,  Monsignor,  how  he  speaks  of 
the  lively  power  and  energy  with  which  they  ought  to  speak,  who 
would  approve  themselves  as  good  and  faithful  ministers  of  God,  who 
must  not  make  a parade  of  rhetoric,  only  to  gain  esteem  for  themselves; 
but  that  the  Spirit  of  God  ought  to  sound  forth  by  their  voice,  so  as  to 
work  with  mighty  energy.  Whatever  may  be  the  amount  of  danger  to 
be  feared,  that  ought  not  to  hinder  the  Spirit  of  God  from  having  lib- 
erty and  free  course  in  those  to  whom  he  has  given  grace  for  the  edi- 
fying of  the  church.5 

Calvin  understood  preaching  to  be  the  will  of  God  for  his  church.  The 
justification  for  preaching  is  not  in  its  effectiveness  for  education  or  reform. 
It  is  not  a practice  for  which  other  practices  may  be  substituted  should  they 
prove  to  be  more  popular  or  useful.  Preaching  is  rooted  in  the  will  and  the 

5 John  Calvin,  Letters  of  John  Calvin,  ed.  Jules  Bonnet  (Philadelphia:  Presbyterian  Board  of 
Publication,  1858),  2:190-191. 


228 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


intention  of  God.  The  preacher,  Calvin  dared  to  say,  was  the  mouth  of 
God.6  God  does  not  wish  to  be  heard  but  by  the  voice  of  his  ministers.7 

Calvin  had  no  illusions  about  the  impact  of  sermons.  He  knew,  as  he  said 
in  one  sermon,  that  there  were  as  many  people  in  the  tavern  as  at  the  ser- 
mon.8 He  knew  that  preaching  would  create  problems  and  difficulties.  It 
kills  as  well  as  makes  alive;  it  hardens  as  well  as  renews.9  The  validity  of 
preaching  does  not  depend  upon  the  response  it  elicits.  It  is  a witness  or  a 
testimony  that  God  wills  to  be  made  in  his  world  even  if  all  reject  it. 

This  emphasis  upon  the  foundation  of  preaching  in  the  will  of  God 
should  not  obscure  Calvin’s  practical  concern  for  edification.  He  preached 
to  edify,  to  convince.  Certainly  on  the  human  level  he  had  confidence  in  its 
power.  On  a deeper  level,  however,  he  found  justification  for  preaching  not 
in  its  edification  or  in  its  power  under  the  Holy  Spirit  to  create  the  Christian 
person  and  a Christian  society,  but  in  the  intention  of  God. 

Calvin  understood  preaching  to  be  a sacrament  of  the  saving  presence  of 
God.  Stauffer  suggests  that  preaching  for  Calvin  was  not  only  a moment  of 
worship,  not  only  a task  of  the  church,  but  also  something  of  a divine  epiph- 
any. “When  the  gospel  is  preached  in  the  name  of  God,  it  is  as  if  God 
himself  spoke  in  person.”10  In  the  Institutes  (IV,  14,  26),  he  quotes  Augustine, 
who  spoke  of  words  as  signs.  In  preaching,  the  Holy  Spirit  uses  the  words 
of  the  preacher  as  an  occasion  for  the  presence  of  God  in  grace  and  in  mercy. 
In  this  sense,  the  actual  words  of  the  sermon  are  comparable  to  the  elements 

6 John  Calvin,  Commentary  on  Is.  55:11. 

7 Calvin,  Commentary  on  Is.  50:10. 

8 “If  there  be  one  day  in  the  week  reserved  for  religious  instruction  when  they  have  spent 
six  days  in  their  own  business,  they  are  apt  to  spend  the  day  which  is  set  apart  for  worship, 
in  play  and  pastime;  some  rove  about  the  fields,  others  go  to  taverns  to  quaff;  and  there  are 
undoubtedly  at  this  time  as  many  at  the  last  mentioned  place,  as  we  here  assembled  in  the 
name  of  God.”  Sermon  on  1 Tim.  3:16. 

’Calvin,  Commentary  on  2 Cor.  2:15;  Commentary  on  Is.  6:10. 

lo  The  following  paragraph  from  the  third  sermon  of  Calvin  on  Jacob  and  Esau  states  a 
basic  element  of  his  doctrine  of  preaching:  “When  the  Gospel  is  preached  in  the  name  of 
God,  this  is  as  much  as  if  he  himself  did  speak  in  his  own  person:  and  yet  all  come  not  to 
Jesus  Christ.  There  are  a great  many  that  go  back  the  more  when  they  have  heard  the  Gospel: 
for  then  the  devil  kindles  them  in  such  a rage,  that  they  are  more  outrageous  than  ever  before, 
and  this  comes  to  pass,  because  there  is  a twofold  hearing:  the  one  is  preaching;  for  the  voice 
of  a man  will  not  enter  into  the  hearts  of  his  hearers.  I speak,  but  it  behooves  that  I hear 
myself  being  taught  by  the  Spirit  of  God:  For  otherwise  the  word  which  proceeds  from  my 
mouth  should  profit  me  no  more  than  it  does  all  others,  except  it  be  given  me  from  above, 
and  not  out  of  mine  own  head.  Therefore  the  voice  of  man  is  nothing  but  a sound  that 
vanishes  in  the  air,  and  notwithstanding  it  is  the  power  of  God  to  salvation  to  all  believers 
(saith  Saint  Paul).  When  then  God  speaketh  unto  us,  by  the  mouth  of  men,  then  he  adjoins 
the  inward  grace  of  his  Holy  Spirit,  to  the  end,  that  the  doctrine  be  not  profitable,  but  that  it 
may  bring  forth  fruit.  See  then  how  we  hear  the  heavenly  father:  that  is  to  say  when  he 
speaketh  secretly  unto  us  by  his  Holy  Spirit;  and  then  we  come  unto  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ.” 


REFORMED  PREACHING 


229 


of  the  sacraments.11  The  word  in  preaching  accomplishes  nothing  apart 
from  the  work  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  who  illuminates  the  mind.  (For  Calvin, 
preaching  is  sacramental  in  context  of  the  order  of  salvation  and  as  a means 
of  grace,  and  not  in  the  more  general  sense  by  which  all  creation  may  be 
sacramental.  The  distinction  is  important  for  Calvin,  though  he  never  ex- 
plicated the  meaning.  The  sense  in  which  common  grace  may  be  saving  is  a 
modern  question,  not  an  issue  in  which  Calvin  was  interested.) 

The  power  of  preaching  as  the  Word  of  God  does  not  reside  in  the  sound 
of  the  words  themselves,  or  even  in  their  meaning.  The  power  of  preaching 
is  the  act  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  which  makes  the  words,  the  sound  and  their 
meaning,  the  occasion  of  the  voice  of  God.  “If  the  same  sermon  is  preached, 
say  to  a hundred  people,  twenty  receive  it  with  ready  obedience  of  faith, 
while  the  rest  hold  it  valueless,  or  laugh,  or  hiss,  or  loath  it.”12  Yet  the  ulti- 
mate difference  in  the  response  does  not  reside  in  the  sermon,  the  sound  of 
the  words,  the  rhetoric,  or  the  meaning,  but  in  the  electing  grace  of  God. 

Calvin’s  sacramental  doctrine  of  preaching  enabled  him  on  the  one  hand 
to  understand  preaching  as  a very  human  work  and,  on  the  other  hand,  as 
the  work  of  God.  The  characteristic  perspective  that  pervades  all  Calvin’s 
theology,  which  on  the  one  hand  emphasizes  the  transcendence  of  God  and 
refuses  to  identify  the  transcendent  God  with  any  finite  or  determinate  ob- 
ject, and  which  on  the  other  hand  asserts  the  immanence  of  God  in  creation, 
and  more  particularly  in  the  means  of  grace,  has  particular  application  to 
preaching.  From  one  perspective,  the  human  work  of  the  sermon  is  critically 
important.  The  sermon’s  fidelity  to  Scripture,  the  skill  of  the  syntax  and 
rhetoric,  and  the  liveliness  of  the  delivery  are  of  fundamental  importance 
and  ought  not  to  be  minimized.  From  another  perspective,  a sermon  is  the 
work  of  the  Spirit  of  God,  which  may  make  a poor  sermon  the  occasion  of 
God’s  presence  and  a brilliant  sermon  barren  of  power.  Calvin  unites  the 
work  of  God  and  the  work  of  man  in  the  sacrament  and  in  preaching  with- 

11  The  Holy  Spirit  seems  to  have  the  same  relation  to  the  Word,  both  in  Scripture  and  in 
preaching,  as  it  does  to  elements  in  the  Sacraments,  cf.  John  Calvin,  Institutes  of  the  Christian 
Religion,  ed.  John  T.  McNeill  and  trans.  Ford  Lewis  Battles  (Philadelphia:  Westminster 
Press,  i960),  4.1.6  and  4. 14. 9-19.  See  also  Hendrikus  Berkhof,  Christian  Fatth:  An  Introduction 
to  the  Study  of  the  Faith , rev.  ed.  (Grand  Rapids:  Wm.  B.  Eerdmans  Publishing  Co.,  1986), 
360-362;  Karl  Barth,  Church  Dogmatics  (Edinburgh:  T.  & T.  Clark,  1956),  1.1:56. 

The  Heidelberg  Catechism,  Question  65  defines  preaching  in  a similar  manner:  “Q.  65. 
Since,  then,  faith  alone  makes  us  share  in  Christ  and  all  his  benefits,  where  does  such  faith 
originate?  A.  The  Holy  Spirit  creates  it  in  our  hearts  by  the  preaching  of  the  holy  gospel, 
and  confirms  it  by  the  use  of  the  holy  Sacraments.”  Cf.  The  Westminster  Shorter  Catechism, 
Question  89. 

12  Calvin,  Institutes,  3.24.12.  In  a sermon  on  Jacob  and  Esau  the  percentage  is  lowered  to 
ten  percent. 


230 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


out  separation,  without  change,  and  without  confusion.  In  practice  he  may 
have  claimed  too  much  for  the  minister  and  the  words  of  the  sermon.  Yet 
in  doctrine  he  knew  that  the  words  of  the  sermon  are  at  best  frail,  human 
words,  but  words  which  can  by  the  power  of  the  Holy  Spirit  become  the 
occasion  of  the  presence  of  God.'3  For  Calvin  as  for  Luther,  “the  ears  alone 
are  the  organ  of  the  Christian  man.”'1  Hearing  the  Word  of  God  makes  one 
worthy  of  the  name  Christian. 

John  Calvin’s  preaching  presupposes  a biblical  and  theological  frame- 
work. Sermons  were  part  of  a structured  and  clear  vision  of  reality.  Calvin’s 
hearers  knew  that  human  life  had  its  origin  in  the  purposes  of  God  and  that 
God  would  determine  its  destiny.  Human  life  was  lived  under  the  Lordship 
of  God  whose  purposes  would  be  accomplished  in  human  history.  The  clar- 
ity of  the  biblical  and  theological  framework  made  each  sermon  part  of  one 
clear  vision  of  reality.  Calvin  had  written  the  Institutes  for  this  purpose — 
that  is,  to  provide  a coherent  framework  for  his  preaching  and  teaching.'5 

Calvin’s  theology  may  lack  homogeneity,  but  not  unity.  For  example,  his 
understanding  of  the  transcendence  and  immanence  of  God,  the  distinction 
between  Creator  and  creature,  gives  a unity  to  his  doctrines  of  the  person  of 
Christ,  of  the  presence  of  Jesus  Christ  in  the  sacraments,  of  the  church  as  a 
human  work  and  a divine  work.  Or  again,  there  is  a unifying  perspective 
relating  and  holding  together  Calvin's  understanding  of  revelation  in  Jesus 
Christ  and  general  revelation,  of  grace  and  nature,  and  gospel  and  law,  of 
church  and  society.  There  is  a unifying  theme,  preeminently  expressed  in 
the  doctrine  of  predestination,  and  permeating  everything  Calvin  said,  em- 
phasizing the  immediacy  of  the  divine  activity  and  the  initiative  of  divine 
grace.  On  a still  deeper  level,  there  is  the  unity  created  by  Calvin’s  conviction 
that  knowledge  of  God  involves  knowledge  of  man  and  knowledge  of  man 
involves  knowledge  of  God,  and  that  the  w hole  of  theology  inheres  in  the 
explication  of  this  relationship  between  God  and  man.  In  sum,  Calvin  had 
a vision  of  theological  reality  expressed  in  the  Institutes  of  the  Christian  Re- 
ligion very  similar  to  Augustine’s  in  the  last  twelve  books  of  the  City  of  God. 
It  is  this  theological  framework  which  informed  all  of  Calvin’s  preaching 
and  made  of  his  preaching  a unity  and  gave  it  a direction  which  otherwise 
would  have  been  lacking. 

13  Calvin,  Commentary  on  Jn.  14:26,  Ezek.  2:2,  Is.  29:11. 

14  Martin  Luther,  “Lectures  on  the  Epistle  to  the  Hebrews  1517-18’’  in  Luther:  Early  The- 
ological Worlds,  ed.  and  trans.  James  Atkinson  (Philadelphia:  Westminster  Press,  1962),  pp. 
I94~5- 

15  Cf.  Prefaces  to  the  Institutes ; “John  Calvin  to  the  Reader”  (1559)  and  “Subject  Matter  of 
the  Present  Work”  (1560). 


REFORMED  PREACHING 


2 31 


Closely  related  to  Calvin’s  theological  vision  of  reality  is  the  ground  plan 
of  Scripture  that  was  clearly  in  his  mind.  This  ground  plan,  too,  is  explicated 
in  the  Institutes  of  the  Christian  Religion.  The  Bible  as  a whole,  and  Calvin’s 
theology  as  a whole,  impinged  upon  every  sermon  which  he  preached,  and 
all  of  his  sermons  fit  into  one  biblical  and  theological  whole. 

The  importance  of  this  unifying  theological  and  biblical  context  cannot 
be  overestimated.  It  means  that  the  homiletician  must  be  a person  knowl- 
edgeable in  theology  and  in  the  Bible  if  the  preacher  is  to  stand  in  the  Re- 
formed tradition. 

Calvin  also  had  a vision  of  the  holy  community.  This  does  not  mean  that 
Calvin  had  a blueprint  which  he  was  seeking  to  impose  upon  society.  In  the 
section  on  the  Christian  life  in  the  Institutes , Calvin  does  not  provide  rules 
or  regulations.'6  In  fact,  Calvin  was  something  of  a pragmatist,  attempting 
to  relate  the  Christian  gospel  to  the  complicated  decisions  and  issues  of  hu- 
man life.  Yet  Calvin  could  have  answered  the  question,  Who  is  a Christian 
person  and  what  is  a Christian  society?  with  a clarity  that  gave  direction  to 
his  preaching.  He  refers  to  the  example  of  Jesus  and  he  emphasizes  the 
disposition  of  the  self  and  the  relationship  of  the  sell  to  God,  to  persons,  and 
to  things.  He  clearly  regarded  human  life  as  a vocation  from  God,  a calling 
which  rendered  the  humblest  task  precious  in  the  sight  of  God. 

In  sum,  Calvin’s  preaching  was  a clear,  unadorned  proclamation  of  God’s 
works  in  creation  and  redemption  as  set  forth  in  Scripture  and  in  a frame- 
work established  by  the  Christian  community’s  reflection  on  Scripture.  It 
called  people  to  decision,  created  them  a community,  and  gave  them  an 
over-arching  vision  of  reality  in  which  they  could  understand  their  own 
lives  and  their  place  in  society. 

This  Calvinist  preaching  was  powerful.  Donald  R.  Kelley  has  com- 
mented: 

In  all  this  ideological  uproar  arising  from  religious  sentiment  the  most 
effective  agent  of  transmission  remained  popular  preaching.  To  this 
other  forms  of  expression — psalm-singing  and  iconoclasm,  public  dia- 
logue and  disputation — were  subordinate.  The  sermon  elaborated  and 
dramatized  other  forms  of  religious  expression,  including  the  cate- 
chism (which  in  Calvinist  practice  furnished  material  for  a year  of  Sun- 
day preaching)  and  confession;  it  gave  emotional  focus  to  the  congre- 
gation and  public  trust  to  its  enthusiasm;  it  gave  impetus  to  other  kinds 
of  demonstration,  both  musical  and  militant;  and  in  general  it  repre- 


16  Calvin,  Institutes,  3.6-10. 


23  2 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


sented  a prime  mover  of  public  opinion.  In  the  context  of  oral  culture, 
certainly,  no  other  kind  of  discourse  better  illustrates  the  transition 
from  private  conviction  to  public  cause,  from  a profession  of  faith  to 
concerted  propaganda  and  even  a platform  of  action.  In  the  Reforma- 
tion as  in  earliest  Christian  times  the  ideological  priority  was  clear — 
“And  the  gospel  must  first  be  published  among  all  nations”  (Mark 
13:10) — and  so  the  sermon  now  becomes  the  center  of  our  attention.'7 

The  second  example  of  Reformed  preaching  is  found  in  the  Westminster 
Assembly’s  Directory  for  Worship.'8  The  Puritans,  like  Calvin,  believed  that 
the  only  opportunity  they  needed  was  the  freedom  to  preach  the  Word  of 
God.  They  were  convinced  that  by  preaching  the  grace  of  God  is  mediated 
to  human  beings  and  that  thereby  society  is  changed.  The  history  of  Puri- 
tanism demonstrates  the  power  of  preaching  to  build  up  communities  and 
to  influence  the  shape  of  society. 

Puritan  preaching,  like  Calvin’s  preaching,  took  place  within  a unified 
theological  vision  of  reality.  This  vision  found  classic  expression  in  the 
Westminster  Confession  and  catechisms.  Furthermore,  the  Puritans  had  an 
even  clearer  vision  than  Calvin  of  who  is  a Christian  person  and  what  is  a 
Christian  society.  This,  too,  had  been  delineated  in  the  Westminster  expo- 
sition of  the  Ten  Commandments.  Puritan  preaching  was  in  intention  and 
in  fact  theological  and  biblical. 

The  Puritans,  like  Calvin,  also  gave  attention  to  the  style  of  preaching. 
They  too  emphasized  that  preaching  must  be  plain  style,  free  from  rhetori- 
cal flourishes.  From  the  beginning,  the  Reformed  had  emphasized  simplic- 
ity and  authenticity.'9  These  virtues  were  closely  related  to  their  theology 
and  their  understanding  of  the  reformation  of  the  church.  Their  intention 
was  the  evangelization  of  the  church,  that  is,  the  removing  of  all  human 
trifles  and  flourishes  which  impede  the  grace  of  God.  God’s  grace  is  neither 
the  extension  of  nor  contrary  to  the  wisdom  of  human  psychology  or  public 
relations  or  drama.  The  church  is  free  to  use  such  wisdom  so  long  as  it  does 
not  intrude  into  the  gospel  or  become  a substitute  for  it.  In  worship  and 
preaching  human  wisdom  too  easily  becomes  human  trifles  which  obscure 
the  gospel.  Simplicity  for  Calvin  was  very  close  to  sincerity.  The  simple 

17  Donald  R.  Kelley,  The  Beginning  of  Ideology:  Consciousness  and  Society  in  the  French 
Reformation  (Cambridge:  Cambridge  University  Press,  1981),  p.  103. 

18  The  Westminster  Directory , ed.  Thomas  Leishman  (Edinburgh:  W.  Blackwood,  1901), 
pp.  29-37. 

19  Calvin,  Institutes , 4. 10.14,  r9'>  4.15.19;  4.17.43.  See  also  The  Westminster  Directory , pp.  31- 
32.  35-37- 


REFORMED  PREACHING 


233 


uncovers  reality  and  opens  the  way  for  the  grace  of  God.  The  pretentious, 
the  pompous,  the  contrived,  the  artificial,  the  too  carefully  polished  cover 
up  reality  and  obscure  God’s  grace. 

Plain  style  preaching  was  also  related  to  the  Christian  doctrine  of  what  it 
is  to  be  a human  being.20  The  Augustinians  had  always  insisted  upon  the 
human  being  as  a self,  with  the  capacities  of  the  human  spirit  to  transcend 
the  self,  of  the  human  mind  to  read  off  the  facts  of  life,  and  of  the  human 
will  to  organize  the  energies  of  human  existence.  This  psychology  for  Calvin 
was  very  simple,  but  in  its  simplicity  he  emphasized  the  spirit,  the  under- 
standing, and  the  will.  Hence  the  Christian  faith  has  to  be  spoken  to  a re- 
sponsible self,  and  from  that  human  self  there  must  be  elicited  a deliberate 
and  conscious  response. 

The  Puritans,  as  with  Calvin,  rejected  magic,  or  to  put  it  positively,  they 
emphasized  conscious  choice  and  deliberate  decision.  Puritan  preaching 
does  not  attempt  to  overpower  human  beings,  or  to  deceive  them.  It  at- 
tempts to  engage  them  and  to  elicit  from  them  a yes  or  a no. 

The  Puritan  concern  for  language  appropriate  to  the  Word  of  God  had 
very  great  theological  and  social  significance.  For  a century  and  a half  the 
Puritans  struggled  with  the  task  of  putting  the  Word  of  God  in  English,  in 
the  vernacular.  William  Haller  has  written: 

The  authorized  version  of  1611  was  the  culmination  of  the  effort  of 
a long  succession  of  English  churchmen  to  put  the  word  of  God  into 
the  vernacular.  Versed  though  they  were  in  the  learned  tongues  and 
reared  in  the  tradition  of  letters,  the  translators  did  not  do  their  work 
upon  the  level  of  academic  Latinized  English.  Neither,  on  the  other 
hand,  did  they  English  the  Bible  upon  the  everyday  or  vulgar  plane. 
They  turned  their  learning  and  skill  to  the  task  of  developing  out  of 
the  familiar  common  speech  an  English  appropriate  to  the  lofty  matter 
they  had  in  hand  and  yet  moving  and  intelligible  to  the  plain,  un- 
learned reader.  The  result  was  the  marvellous  idiom  of  the  English 
Bible.21 

This  language  of  the  English  Bible  shaped  American  culture  decisively 
until  the  Second  World  War.  In  its  simplicity  it  opened  reality  and  in  its 
sensitivity  to  the  majesty  of  its  message  it  did  and  does  deeply  move  people. 
Hence  it  was  a manner  of  speaking  very  appropriate  to  the  theological  re- 

20  William  Haller,  The  Rise  of  Puritanism  (New  York:  Columbia  University  Press,  1938), 
ch.  4,  especially  p.  135. 

2'  Ibid.,  p.  128. 


234 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


ality.  Those  who  heard  the  Puritans  had  a sense  of  reality.  The  hearers  felt 
the  force  and  reality  about  which  the  preacher  was  speaking.  As  Perkins 
put  it,  preaching  must  “observe  an  admirable  plainness  and  an  admirable 
powerfulness  so  that  the  ordinary  person  may  understand  and  be  powerfully 
moved.”22 

Puritan  preaching  in  which  the  clarity  and  precision  of  the  message  is  the 
medium  and  means  of  persuasion  requires  great  personal  gifts,  concentra- 
tion, and  persistence.  The  temptation  is  always  present  to  use  gimmicks  and 
tricks  to  persuade.  Robert  Baillie,  the  Scottish  Commissioner  to  the  West- 
minster Assembly,  protested  in  1654  “the  new  guise  of  preaching”  which 
“in  a high,  romancing,  unscriptural  style,  tickling  the  ear  for  the  present, 
and  moving  the  affections  in  some,  but  leaving  . . . little  or  nought  to  the 
memory  or  understanding.  This  we  must  misken,  for  we  cannot  help  it.”23 

The  Puritans  had  not  only  worked  on  language.  They  were  also  clear 
about  the  form  of  the  sermon.  Their  homiletics  received  classical  statements 
in  William  Perkins’  The  Art  of  Prophesying 24  and  in  the  homiletical  section 
of  the  Westminster  Directory  of  Worship.  The  sermon  contains  the  explica- 
tion of  the  text,  the  doctrine,  and  finally  the  application.  The  Puritan 
preachers  gave  great  attention  to  the  doctrine,  the  general  principles  con- 
tained in  the  text,  but  they  concentrated  on  the  applications,  on  the  ways 
this  text  transformed  human  life.  The  events  of  the  soul  were  of  cosmic 
significance,  and  the  preachers  charted  in  detail  how  the  self  moves  from  sin 
to  victory. 

A third  explicit  doctrine  of  preaching  is  to  be  found  in  the  theology  of 
Karl  Barth.  As  is  well  known,  Karl  Barth  intended  his  theology  to  be  a 
preacher’s  theology.  He  was  convinced  that  the  problem  in  the  life  of  the 
church  is  the  corruption  of  the  message,  and  that  if  we  can  get  the  message 
right  and  proclaim  it  with  clarity,  under  the  power  of  the  Holy  Spirit  it  will 
elicit  a proper  response. 

22  William  Perkins,  “Treatise  of  the  Duties  and  Dignities  of  the  Ministrie”  in  The  Worses 
of  That  Famous  Minister  of  Christ  in  the  Universitie  of  Cambridge,  Mr.  William  Perkins  (1609), 
3:430. 

23  Robert  Baillie,  “Letter  to  Mr.  William  Spang  (Postscript),  21st  July”  in  The  Letters  and 
Journals  of  Robert  Baillie,  A.M.:  Principal  of  the  University  of  Glasgow , ed.  David  Laing  (Ed- 
inburgh: Robert  Ogle,  1842),  3:258-9. 

24  “The  order  and  sum  of  the  sacred  and  only  method  of  preaching:  1.  To  read  the  text 
distinctly  out  of  the  canonical  scriptures;  2.  To  give  the  sense  and  understanding  of  it  being 
read,  by  the  scripture  itself;  3.  To  collect  a few  and  profitable  points  of  doctrine  out  of  the 
natural  sense;  4.  To  apply,  if  he  have  the  gift,  the  doctrines  rightly  collected  to  the  life  and 
manners  of  men  in  a simple  and  plain  speech.  The  sum  of  the  sum:  Preach  one  Christ  by 
Christ  to  the  praise  of  Christ”  (William  Perkins,  "The  Art  of  Prophesying”  in  The  Woif  of 
William  Perkins,  ed.  Ian  Brevard  [Appleford,  England:  Sutton  Courtenay  Press,  1970],  pp. 
325-349)- 


REFORMED  PREACHING 


235 


Karl  Barth’s  doctrine  of  preaching  is  summarized  in  his  conviction  that 
there  has  been  committed  to  the  church  “the  gospel,  i.e.,  the  good  glad  tid- 
ings of  Jesus  Christ,  of  the  real  act  and  true  revelation  of  the  goodness  in 
which  God  has  willed  to  make,  and  has  in  fact  made  himself  the  God  of 
man  and  man  his  man.  This  great  yes  is  its  cause.  It  has  no  other  task  beside 
this.”25 

The  church  has  the  task  of  the  “explicit  proclamation  of  the  gospel  in  the 
assembly  of  the  community,  in  the  midst  of  divine  service,  where  it  is  also 
heard  directly  or  indirectly  by  the  world,  that  is,  in  what  is  denoted  by  the 
overburdened  but  unavoidable  term  ‘preaching.’  ”26  Preaching  differs  both 
from  the  exposition  of  Scripture  and  from  theological  study  or  lecturing. 
“Preaching  does  not  reflect,  reason,  dispute,  or  academically  instruct.  It  pro- 
claims, summons,  invites  and  commands.”27  Preaching  is  a work  of  human 
speech,  but  it  is  of  decisive  significance  for  the  life  of  the  church.  Indeed,  the 
church  lives  by  hearing  the  Word  of  God  in  preaching.  The  chief  task  of 
theology  is  to  examine  the  church’s  proclamation,  primarily  in  preaching,  in 
the  light  of  the  word  of  God  in  Jesus  Christ  as  attested  in  Scripture.  Preach- 
ing is  the  point  where  the  whole  theological  task  comes  to  focus.  Barth  him- 
self argued  that  one  reason  for  calling  Schleiermacher  a Christian  theologian 
was  his  interest  in  preaching.28  One  cannot  be  a theologian  in  the  Calvinist 
and  Barthian  sense  without  being  a preacher.  One  real  test  of  all  theology 
for  John  Calvin  was  its  preachableness.29  A theology  which  cannot  be 
preached  and  which  does  not  have  preaching  as  its  goal  is  not  from  the 
Reformed  perspective  a legitimate  theology  in  the  church. 

These  three  doctrines  of  the  sermon  from  Calvin,  the  Puritans,  and  Karl 
Barth  have  common  emphases,  (i)  Preaching  is  proclamation  of  the  gos- 
pel— what  God  has  done  for  human  beings  in  creation,  judgment,  and  re- 
demption. (2)  Human  life,  especially  in  decisions  of  the  will,  has  cosmic 
significance  and  the  gospel  must  be  applied  to  it.  (3)  All  of  this  is  done  in 
the  light  of  a biblical  and  theological  vision  of  reality.  The  preacher  pro- 
claims the  faith  of  the  church.  (4)  Preaching  is  the  means  by  which  God’s 
grace  is  mediated  and  the  church  as  a community  is  established. 

25  Barth,  Church  Dogmatics,  4.3.2:800. 

26  Ibid.,  p.  867. 

27  Ibid.,  p.  869. 

28  Karl  Barth,  Protestant  Theology  in  the  Nineteenth  Century:  Its  Background  and  History 
(Valley  Forge,  PA:  Judson  Press,  1973),  pp.  429-30. 

29  See  Calvin’s  prefaces  to  the  Institutes  and  his  insistence  that  true  theology  edifies.  See 
also  Corpus  Reformatorum:  Joannis  Calvini  Opera  Quae  Supersunt  Omnia,  ed.  Guilielmus 
Baum,  Eduardus  Cunitz,  and  Eduardus  Reuss  (Brunswick:  C.  A.  Schwetschke  et  Filium, 
1863-1897),  33:709. 


236 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


This  preaching  presupposes  the  highest  levels  of  biblical  and  theological 
knowledge  as  well  as  the  capacity  to  express  it  in  clear,  coherent  English 
sentences,  and  to  deliver  it  in  a lively  and  effective  way. 

II 

Preaching,  especially  as  it  has  been  practiced  in  the  Reformed  tradition, 
is  at  grave  risk  today.  Several  characteristics  of  our  society  which  put 
preaching  at  risk  need  special  mention. 

The  first  is  the  development  of  the  entertainment  industry.  This  devel- 
opment has  two  consequences.  First,  it  induces  people  to  find  the  meaning 
of  life  in  being  entertained.  Entertainment  (soap  operas,  athletic  events,  even 
anchor  news  which  turns  great  events  into  spectacles)  relieve  us  of  uniquely 
human  responsibilities  to  think  for  ourselves,  to  set  goals  and  to  accomplish 
them.  In  addition,  entertainment  distracts  our  attention  from  the  critical 
issues  of  life,  and  finally  our  heroes  become  not  persons  of  substance  and 
achievement  so  much  as  celebrities  who  attract  our  attention.  Form  takes 
priority  over  substance.  In  sum,  entertainment,  whether  it  is  soap  operas  or 
political  spectacles  or  athletic  events,  is  not  simply  entertainment  but  also  an 
escape  from  the  hard  realities  of  life  and  from  the  questions  for  which 
Christian  faith  is  the  answer.30 

The  emergence  of  the  entertainment  and  communication  industry  pre- 
sents another  peril  to  preaching.  The  communications  industry  has  devel- 
oped skills  and  techniques  which  enable  human  beings  of  very  limited 
greatness,  education,  and  culture  to  have  enormous  power  over  other  hu- 
man beings.  This  was  dramatically  illustrated  in  the  movie  of  a few  years 
ago  entitled  Marjoe.  Marjoe  was  a child  evangelist,  named  after  Mary  and 
Joseph.  As  a child  he  grew  up  knowing  the  techniques  and  skills  of  the 
trade.  The  movie  depicts  him  as  an  adult  who  has  repudiated  the  faith  and 
the  tradition.  He  illustrates,  however,  the  way  in  which  the  techniques,  the 
procedures,  the  skills  of  the  revivalist  who  himself  no  longer  believes  can 
elicit  predicted  responses,  whether  these  responses  are  the  giving  of  money 
or  physical  manifestations  such  as  uncontrolled  body  motions.  Speaking  in 
tongues  can  be  elicited  by  atheists  who  know  the  techniques,  if  they  have  a 
willing  audience. 

The  movie  Marjoe  is  offensive  to  Christian  sensibilities.  It  is  illustrative 

Neil  Postman,  Amusing  Ourselves  to  Death  (New  York:  Penguin  Books,  1988).  An  excel- 
lent, readable  analysis.  “Indeed,  in  America  God  favors  all  those  who  possess  both  a talent 
and  a format  to  amuse,  whether  they  be  preachers,  athletes,  entrepreneurs,  politicians,  teach- 
ers or  journalists.  In  America,  the  least  amusing  people  are  its  professional  entertainers”  (5). 
When  preaching  becomes  amusing  it  approaches  blasphemy. 


REFORMED  PREACHING 


237 


of  human  fraud  at  the  worst.  However,  those  in  the  ministry  who  have  the 
strength  to  see  it  ought  to  see  the  movie.  Religion  is  always  a narrow  razor’s 
edge  away  from  magic.31  Magic  in  relationship  to  God  is  the  attempt  to  get 
control  of  God  and  to  fasten  the  infinite  and  indeterminate  God  to  that 
which  is  finite  and  determinate,  whether  it  be  the  bread  and  wine  of  the 
sacrament  or  the  techniques  of  the  revivalist.  Magic  in  relationship  to  hu- 
man beings  is  the  effort  to  bypass  conscious  choice  and  decision.  One  of  the 
greatest  temptations  for  the  minister  is  the  practice  of  magic.  On  this  point 
we  should  all  be  critically  self-critical. 

The  modern  communications  industry  reverses  the  traditional  order  of 
homiletical  achievement.  Classically,  preaching  has  arisen  out  of  the  sub- 
stance of  what  is  proclaimed.  The  Christian  message  determined  the  pattern 
and  form  of  preaching.  The  powerfulness  of  the  message  in  determining  the 
form  was  dramatically  illustrated  in  the  Puritan  style  and  use  of  language. 
Today  increasingly  form  and  style  take  precedence  over  substance.  Reinhold 
Niebuhr  in  his  diary  records  his  commitment  that  he  would  forsake  the 
attempt  to  be  a pretty  preacher.  The  “pretty”  preacher  at  least  works  at  the 
task,  and  for  this  reason  one  hesitates  to  criticize  in  a day  when  much 
preaching  is  slovenly  and  careless.  Nevertheless,  Niebuhr  was  right.  There 
is  an  incongruity  between  the  gospel  and  a pretty  sermon.  This  is  especially 
true  in  the  Reformed  tradition.  There  must  be  something  rough-hewn 
about  the  sermon.  For  Reformed  preaching,  the  message  is  in  a real  sense 
the  medium,  and  the  worst  heresy  in  preaching  is  for  the  medium  to  become 
the  message. 

The  development  of  the  communications  industry,  as  well  as  the  enter- 
tainment industry,  jeopardizes  good  preaching  by  tempting  persons  to  sub- 
ordinate content  to  form  and  to  practices  which  may  be  humanly  effective 
but  which  are  theologically  destructive. 

Great  preaching  depends  upon  the  integrity  of  the  human  heart  and 
mind,  on  the  part  of  both  the  preacher  and  the  congregation.  It  is  not 
through  the  practice  of  magic  or  the  communication  arts,  but  through  the 
integrity  of  the  proclamation  itself  which  under  God  creates  the  Christian 
community. 

Second,  preaching  is  threatened  today  by  the  breakdown  of  a coherent 
understanding  of  human  reality,  of  life  in  the  world,  in  society,  and  in  the 
church. 

31  Paul  Tillich,  The  Protestant  Era , abridged  ed.  (Chicago:  University  of  Chicago  Press, 
1 957)»  PP-  99FF- ; Paul  T \Y\cYi,  Systematic  Theology  (Chicago:  University  of  Chicago  Press,  1963), 
3:122. 


23» 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Until  quite  recently,  a basically  Christian  construction  of  reality  was  im- 
plicit in  the  life  of  society.  While  the  society  itself  may  have  given  only 
tentative  commitment,  it  at  least  declared  its  allegiance  to  a Christian  vision 
of  what  it  is  to  be  a human  being  in  the  world.  This  Christian  vision  lived 
for  many  years  in  very  attenuated  forms,  but  nevertheless  it  lived.52 

The  constructive  coherent  vision  of  reality  that  was  implicit  in  our  society 
greatly  strengthened  the  church  in  its  proclamation.  There  was  a time  in 
American  life  when  evangelism  was  little  more  than  bringing  persons  who 
were  basically  Christian  in  their  interpretation  of  reality  into  the  organized 
life  of  the  church.  Today  our  society  less  and  less  has  any  legitimating  un- 
derstanding of  what  it  is  to  be  a human  being  and  of  the  place  of  human 
beings  in  the  world.  There  is  no  general  agreement  about  the  origin  of  hu- 
man life  or  the  destiny  of  human  life  or  the  meaning  of  human  life  between 
birth  and  death.  This  means  that  increasingly  the  preacher  can  no  longer 
depend  upon  a knowledge  of  the  history  of  Israel  or  a general  theistic  con- 
sensus. The  situation  is  more  radical  than  that  which  faced  Peter,  or  that 
which  faced  Paul  at  Mars  Hill.  For  the  first  time,  we  live  in  an  increasingly 
secular  culture  with  no  pervasive  natural  theology  as  well  as  little  biblical 
knowledge.  In  Calvin’s  day  an  atheist  was  one  who  denied  that  God  was 
active  in  the  world.  Today  atheism  is  denial  of  any  cosmic  purpose. 

This  breakdown  of  the  over-arching  coherent  view  of  the  human  reality 
in  the  world  is  true  not  only  of  society  but  also  of  the  church.  Most  signifi- 
cantly, it  is  increasingly  true  in  theological  education.  The  ordination  of 
ministers  and  the  creation  of  theological  seminaries  to  prepare  pastors  for 
the  church  is  predicated  upon  the  assumption  that  the  minister  is  not  free 
to  express  his  or  her  idiosyncratic  ideas  about  the  meaning  of  human  life. 
Ordination,  however,  means  that  the  minister  bears  witness  to  the  Christian 
faith  as  it  has  been  understood  and  mediated  through  the  centuries  by  the 
Christian  community.  This  fact  has  both  practical  and  theological  signifi- 
cance. It  has  practical  significance  because  the  pastor  is  not  always  at  an 
intense  level  of  theological  conviction  when  he  or  she  is  asked  to  perform  a 
specifically  Christian  service.  One  may  be  asked  to  conduct  a funeral  service 
at  the  very  moment  when  one’s  faith  in  eternal  life  is  wavering.  The  min- 
ister must  have  the  will  to  believe  what  the  churches  believe.  The  responsi- 
bility of  the  minister  on  that  occasion  is  not  to  testify  to  the  vagaries  of  his 
or  her  own  soul  but  to  bear  witness  in  this  crisis  for  the  church  community 

32  Robert  Wuthnow,  The  Restructuring  of  American  Religion  (Princeton:  Princeton  Univer- 
sity Press,  1988),  Ch.  10. 


REFORMED  PREACHING 


239 

to  the  church’s  faith,  a faith  that  has  received  the  approbation  of  the  people 
of  God  through  the  centuries. 

This  point  also  has  theological  significance.  It  means  that  ministers  and 
theologians  must  first  of  all  understand  their  role  in  the  church  as  interpret- 
ers of  the  tradition,  not  as  the  creative  inventors  of  new  theologies.  The 
theological  community  may,  as  all  human  communities,  be  dominated  by 
the  hubris  to  create  the  great  new  theology.  The  history  of  the  past  thirty 
years  is  strewn  with  the  wreckage  of  such  attempts.  There  have  been  great 
creative  theological  developments  in  the  Christian  community,  but  these 
have  usually  been  wrought  by  persons  who  were  very  modest,  who  had  not 
set  out  to  be  the  great  creative  theologian,  but  who  in  being  faithful  inter- 
preters of  the  tradition  had  restated  the  tradition  in  a persuasive  way  in  the 
idiom  of  a new  time. 

The  first  task  of  a pastor  of  a church  or  a theological  seminary  is  faithfully 
and  convincingly  to  tradition  the  Christian  faith  as  it  has  been  handed  on  to 
us  in  trust  from  those  who  built  our  churches  and  our  seminaries. 

The  problem  of  the  breakdown  of  a coherent  worldview  is  complicated 
by  the  loss  of  Christian  knowledge.  In  a former  day,  preachers  could  assume 
that  the  members  of  their  congregations  had  certain  biblical  knowledge,  that 
they  understood  theological  terms,  even  if  they  were  in  other  ways  unedu- 
cated. Those  who  have  been  pastors  of  many  old  churches  have  stood  in  awe 
in  the  presence  of  the  theological  wisdom  of  persons  with  very  little  formal 
education.  We  now  have  churches  in  which  there  is  no  network  of  infor- 
mation which  makes  theological  conversation  possible. 

The  problem  is  even  deeper,  and  involves  theological  competence,  a prob- 
lem that  can  be  illustrated  in  changes  in  the  theological  curriculum  since 
World  War  II.  In  1940,  in  almost  every  Presbyterian  seminary,  theology  was 
taught  from  a basic  text.  Whether  this  text  was  Hodge  or  Strong  or  Berkhof 
did  not  really  matter;33  they  were  all  essentially  the  same  working  out  of  the 
theology  of  seventeenth-century  Protestantism  as  modified  in  particular  by 
the  American  evangelical  experience.  These  theological  textbooks  were 
written  in  a pattern  that  is  easy  to  learn.  The  Puritans  sought  to  write  the- 
ology so  that  its  basic  structure  could  be  quickly  memorized.34  Each  theo- 

33  Louis  Berkhof,  Systematic  Theology , 2d  ed.,  rev.  and  enl.  (Grand  Rapids,  MI:  Wm.  B. 
Eerdmans  Publishing  Co.,  1941);  Charles  Hodge,  Systematic  Theology , 3 vols.  (New  York: 
C.  Scribner,  1911);  Augustus  Hopkins  Strong,  Systematic  Theology:  A Compendium  and  Com- 
monplace Boop  Designed  for  the  Use  of  Theological  Students,  7th  ed.,  rev.  and  enl.  (New  York: 
A.  C.  Armstrong  and  Son,  1902). 

34  See  the  writings  of  William  Perkins  in  The  Worp  of  William  Per  pins.  Also  see  J.  Wolle- 


240 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


logical  course  covered  the  gamut  of  theology  from  a perspective  that  had 
been  worked  out  in  the  Christian  community.  The  student  with  average 
ability  but  with  diligence  could  grasp  a coherent  statement  of  the  faith.  This 
enabled  the  pastor  to  become  an  effective  theologian  who  could  give  an 
answer  that  had  been  formulated  in  the  church’s  history  to  all  the  questions 
that  members  of  congregations  were  likely  to  ask.  This  was  a realizable  goal, 
and  as  a result,  persons  of  very  limited  ability  went  out  and  still  proclaimed 
a coherent  view  of  reality  that  enabled  people  to  find  their  place  in  the 
world. 

When  one  contrasts  the  situation  of  forty  years  ago  with  the  teaching  of 
theology  today,  certain  points  become  immediately  clear.  In  few  if  any  sem- 
inaries is  one  dogmatic  text  the  basic  form  of  instruction  for  young  theolo- 
gians, with  the  exception  perhaps  of  the  Lutheran  and  the  Baptist  churches. 
In  most  Presbyterian  seminaries,  graduates  frequently  leave  the  seminary 
having  read  a few  pages  of  Niebuhr,  a few  pages  of  Barth,  a few  pages  of 
Tillich,  a few  pages  of  the  experimental  theologies  of  the  last  thirty  years, 
without  having  a clear  grasp  of  any  coherent  pattern  of  theology  which  has 
received  the  approbation  of  the  people  of  God  through  use  in  the  church 
over  a period  of  time.  The  result  is  all  too  frequently  that  a person  is  called 
to  preach  without  having  any  coherent  view  of  reality  and  without  being 
able  to  say  in  simple  outline  to  an  inquirer  what  it  is  to  be  a member  of  the 
Christian  community,  that  is,  in  a way  which  distinguishes  the  church  from 
a civic  club,  from  a political  party,  from  a therapy  group,  or  from  many 
other  good  and  useful  human  communities. 

There  cannot  be  a recovery  of  great  preaching  until  there  is  the  recovery 
of  a theological  framework  for  preaching,  both  on  the  part  of  the  preacher 
and  on  the  part  of  the  congregation. 

Thirdly,  preaching  today  has  a new  audience,  especially  outside  the 
church,  but  also  within  the  church.  Willem  A.  Visser 't  Hooft,  in  one  of  his 
last  essays,  pointed  out  that  three  faiths  were  battling  for  the  soul  of  Europe: 
paganism,  secular  humanism,  and  Christian  faith.35 

Paganism  finds  the  meaning  of  life  in  its  vitalities  and  energies,  particu- 
larly in  the  intensification  of  those  vitalities  and  energies.  It  defines  life  pri- 
marily in  terms  of  the  physical  realities  of  nature.  Modern  paganism  does 

bius,  “Compendium  Theologiae  Christianae”  in  Reformed  Dogmatics,  ed.  and  trans.  John  W. 
Beardslee  (New  York:  Oxford  University  Press,  1965). 

W.  A.  Visser ’t  Hooft,  “Evangelism  among  Europe’s  Neo-Pagans,”  International  Review 
of  Mission  66,  no.  264  (October  1977):  349-60.  Cf.  Marc  H.  Spindler,  “Europe’s  Neo-Pagan- 
lsm:  A Perverse  Inculturation,”  International  Bulletin  11,  no.  1 (January  1987):  8-1 1. 


REFORMED  PREACHING 


241 


not  necessarily  endow  these  vitalities  and  energies  with  any  divine  power, 
but  simply  affirms  that  in  the  ecstasy  and  in  the  intoxication  that  comes  from 
the  intensification  of  these  energies,  the  meaning  of  life  is  found. 

The  second  faith  which  battles  for  the  soul  of  human  beings  in  Europe 
and,  in  particular,  in  American  society,  is  secular  humanism.36  In  many 
ways,  secular  humanism  is  a product  of  Christian  faith.  There  has  been  no 
finer  statement  of  secular  humanism  than  that  which  was  produced  by  John 
Dewey,  a former  theological  student,  entitled  A Common  Faith. 37  Dewey 
wanted  to  have  religious  values  without  religion,  and  without  theology. 
Christians  may  argue  that  secular  humanism  is  possible  only  in  a society 
that  is  still  living  off  of  the  theological  capital  of  the  Christian  faith,  which 
invests  human  life  with  the  significance  and  dignity  of  the  Creator,  and 
which,  on  the  basis  of  God’s  work  in  creation  and  redemption,  affirms  that 
human  life  has  abiding  significance  over  against  the  overwhelming  evidence 
in  the  world  that  it  does  not.  Secular  humanism  is  an  especially  enticing 
faith  as  long  as  it  can  assume  the  presence  of  those  qualities  of  life  that  have 
historically  been  rooted  not  in  secular  humanism  but  in  the  living  faith  of 
the  church. 

Fourth,  preaching  can  no  longer  presuppose  a Christian  society  and  more 
particularly  a universal  natural  theology.  A natural  theology  existed  prior  to 
the  church  and  provided  a point  of  contact  for  preachers  of  the  ancient 
church,  however  kerygmatic  their  sermons  may  have  been.  A scientific, 
technological,  secular  society  is  bereft  of  this  kind  of  reflection.  Human  na- 
ture, the  structure  of  human  existence,  however,  remains  the  same.  There- 
fore, the  absence  of  reflection  on  the  questions  of  human  existence  and  on 
the  world  itself  may  create  a yearning  for  that  which  Christian  faith  declares 
to  be  the  real  nature  of  human  existence  and  the  world.  This  will  mean  that 
the  language  as  well  as  the  content  of  preaching  must  have  the  note  of  reality 
and  must  clearly,  precisely,  authentically  declare  the  faith  and  relate  it  to 
concrete  human  experience. 

Preaching  that  will  be  effective  in  the  last  years  of  this  century  will  have 
to  have  three  dimensions:  (1)  it  will  have  to  provide  a biblical  and  theological 
framework  for  understanding  human  existence;  (2)  it  will  have  to  give  a 
specific  Christian  response  both  to  resurgent  paganism  and  to  secular  hu- 
manism; (3)  it  will  finally  have  to  do  what  Puritan  preaching  did — give  to 

36  James  Davison  Hunter,  “ ‘America’s  Fourth  Faith’:  A Sociological  Perspective  on  Sec- 
ular Humanism,”  This  World  19  (Fall  1987):  101-110. 

37  John  Dewey,  A Common  Faith  (New  Haven,  Conn.:  Yale  University  Press,  1934). 


242 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


human  beings  guidance  how  they  may  understand  the  meaning  of  life  and 
how  to  live  the  Christian  life  in  a pluralistic,  secular,  mobile  society. 

Ill 

The  greatest  threat  to  preaching  in  the  great  tradition  is  theological.  The 
problem  is  twofold:  the  hiatus  between  academic  theology  in  a secular  set- 
ting and  the  church  as  a community  of  faith  and  worship  and  the  issues 
which  arise  out  of  the  pluralism  of  a secular  culture. 

The  achievement  of  competence  in  explicating  and  proclaiming  the  faith 
requires  the  discipline  of  the  rational  analysis  of  the  faith  as  well  as  the 
mastery  of  texts,  of  ideas  and  their  relationship,  of  processes,  and  of  the 
coherence  and  consistency  of  the  ideas  when  put  together.38  It  also  includes 
the  testing  of  the  integrity  of  the  faith  as  Barth  insisted  and  the  intelligibility 
of  the  faith  for  human  experience  as  apologetic  theologians  demanded.39 
The  movement  from  the  academic  study  of  theology  to  the  confessional 
theology  of  the  church  and  of  preaching  is  not  simple.  A radical  difference 
exists  between  assenting  to  a proposition  and  committing  one’s  life  in  trust 
to  Jesus  Christ  as  Lord  and  Savior,  between  risking  one’s  academic  reputa- 
tion and  risking  one’s  personal  destiny  or  the  destiny  of  a congregation  of 
people.40 

There  is  no  convincing  evidence  that  theologians  today  are  more  rational 
or  intellectually  brighter  than  theologians  of  earlier  generations.  There  is 
evidence  that  the  secular  culture  has  an  eroding  effect  on  Christian  faith.  A 
recent  study  of  biblical  interpretation  concludes  that  a secular  culture  has 
now  achieved  a “thoroughgoing  nontheological  study  of  Scripture.”4'  Chris- 
tian theology  is  also  studied  as  one  among  many  theologies  or  philosophies. 
The  study  of  Scripture  and  theology  in  a secular  context  has  value  for  the 
Christian  community.  Tillich  once  insisted  that  external  criticism  is  neces- 
sary for  the  health  of  Protestantism.42  The  study  of  the  faith  by  those  who 

38  Schubert  M.  Ogden,  On  Theology  (San  Francisco:  Harper  & Row,  1986);  Hendrikus 
Berkhof,  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Dogmatics,  trans.  John  Vriend  (Grand  Rapids,  MI:  Wm. 
B.  Eerdmans  Publishing  Co.,  1985). 

39  Barth,  Church  Dogmatics,  i.i:248ff.  and  Paul  Tillich,  Systematic  Theology,  vol.  1 (Chi- 
cago: University  of  Chicago  Press,  1951). 

40  No  contemporary  theologian  understands  this  problem  better  than  Albert  C.  Outler, 
who  in  a remarkable  way  combined  the  academic  and  the  kerygmatic.  See  Albert  Outler, 
The  Rule  of  Grace  (Melbourne:  Uniting  Church  Press,  1982). 

4'  Robert  Morgan  and  John  Barton,  Biblical  Interpretation  (New  York:  Oxford  University 
Press,  1988),  p.  169;  cf.  p.  1 7 1 . “In  a secular  culture,  to  ignore  the  religious  dimensions  when 
handling  religious  texts  implies  acceptance  ot  an  alternative  view  of  reality”  (p.  277). 

42  “In  every  Protestant  form  the  religious  element  must  be  related  to,  and  questioned  by,  a 
secular  element”  (Paul  Tillich,  The  Protestant  Era,  p.  214). 


REFORMED  PREACHING 


243 

do  not  affirm  the  faith  is  an  option  for  a secular  university.  Yet  the  church 
must  assess  the  significance  of  such  study  for  its  own  life.  There  is  no  evi- 
dence that  I know  that  indicates  that  the  non-theological  study  of  Scripture 
or  the  secular  study  of  theology  can  prepare  persons  to  gather  congregations 
and  to  build  them  up  as  the  communion  of  saints.  Even  in  the  seminaries  of 
the  church  the  movement  from  academic  theology  to  kerygmatic  theology 
is  not  automatic  or  easy. 

Theology  for  the  past  two  centuries  has  also  been  preoccupied  with  a 
skepticism  about  the  reality  of  what  Christians  perceive  to  be  the  revelation 
of  God  and  about  the  adequacy  of  language  to  express  such  a revelation,  or 
to  put  it  another  way,  with  the  question  of  whether  theology  is  possible.43 
This  is  a question  which  a secular  culture  forces  Christian  theologians  to 
ponder.  For  some  the  question  may  never  be  answered.  But  the  quandary 
and  anguish  is  not  the  gospel  or  the  Christian  message.  The  acceptance  of 
the  calling  to  preach  and  to  teach  the  faith  means  that  the  question  of  the 
possibility  of  Christian  faith  has  been  resolved  as  far  as  human  beings  can 
answer  such  questions.  All  of  us  have  to  pray,  “Lord  I believe,  help  thou  my 
unbelief.”44  None  can  boast.  Yet  the  acceptance  of  the  calling  to  preach  and 
teach  in  the  church  presupposes  that  the  pastor  or  teacher  has  with  “fear 
and  trembling”  made  this  commitment  as  a responsible  human  act.  Until 
this  commitment  is  made,  preaching  as  the  New  Testament  and  the  church 
have  conceived  it  is  not  possible.  No  other  quality  is  as  basic  for  Christian 
preaching  as  this  commitment. 

The  contemporary  discussion  about  the  possibility  of  theology  or  the 
foundation  of  theology  or  the  public  character  of  theology  is  new  only  in 
idiom.  New  Testament  Christians  were  aware  that  one  comes  to  confess 
that  Jesus  is  the  Christ  only  by  the  power  of  the  Holy  Spirit.  There  is  no 
evidence  that  their  faith  had  any  other  foundation  than  Jesus  Christ.  They 
went  forth  to  preach  this  good  news  publicly  to  all  people.  John  Calvin  was 
surely  aware  of  doubt.  Yet  in  the  opening  chapters  of  the  Institutes  he  delib- 
erately adopts  the  theological  wisdom  of  Augustine  as  his  own.  We  believe 
in  order  to  understand.  For  him  the  “proof’  of  Christian  faith  on  the  human 

« Cf.  A History  of  Christian  Doctrine,  ed.  Hubert  Cunliffe-Jones  (Edinburgh:  T.  & 
T.  Clark,  1978),  1 1 - 1 3 ; Claude  Welch,  Protestant  Thought  in  the  Nineteenth  Century , vol.  1 
(New  Haven,  Conn.:  Yale  University  Press,  1972).  For  an  excellent  current  review  see  Wil- 
liam Placher,  Unapologetic  Theology  (Philadelphia:  Westminster  Press,  1989).  Jeffrey  Stout’s 
comment  concerning  the  preoccupation  of  theologians  with  methodology  is  to  the  point. 
Theologians  who  spend  too  much  time  on  method  “become  increasingly  isolated  from 
churches  as  well  as  cultural  forums”  (Jeffrey  Sioux.,  Ethics  After  Babel  [Boston:  Beacon  Press, 
1988],  p.  163). 

44  Mk.  9:24. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


244 

level  was  rhetorical,  the  persuasive  exposition  of  the  faith  in  the  language  of 
the  people. 

In  the  present  theological  context  the  essential  condition  for  preaching  is 
the  answer  to  the  question,  “But  who  do  you  say  that  1 am?”4S  The  Christian 
community  did  not  have  its  origin  in  the  understanding  that  Jesus  was  a 
stoic  wiseman,  or  a revolutionary  or  a prophet  of  Sophia,  but  in  the  passion- 
ate conviction  that  he  was  the  Christ,  the  Word  made  flesh,  and  that  in  his 
life,  death,  and  resurrection  God  wrought  salvation  for  all  people.  It  is  pos- 
sible to  be  a responsible  human  being  without  this  commitment,  but  one 
cannot  be  a Christian  without  it,  certainly  not  a Christian  preacher. 

Another  threat  to  preaching  with  great  practical  significance  is  the  plu- 
ralism of  our  society,  the  implicit  assumption  that  there  are  many  roads  to 
God. 

The  unified  communities  of  the  past  are  now  gone.  John  Calvin  could 
not  have  imagined  denominationalism,  much  less  a secular  society  in  which 
not  only  Christian  groups  but  non-Christian  groups  have  equal  access  and 
freedom. 

Pluralism,  however,  is  not  a totally  new  phenomenon.  The  church  in  the 
second  century,  for  example,  lived  in  the  midst  of  a highly  pluralistic  society, 
and  on  the  human  level  it  ran  the  risk  of  disappearing  in  the  social  mix  of 
that  society. 

Today  pluralism  confronts  us  in  at  least  three  ways:  practically,  socially, 
theologically.46 

There  is  the  simple  historical,  practical  fact  of  pluralism.  Many  of  our 
neighbors  share  neither  our  faith  nor  our  style  of  life  nor  our  understanding 
of  human  responsibility.  Secondly,  the  media  continually  bombard  us  with 
varied  styles  of  life  and  remind  us  of  the  living  religions  of  the  world.  Fi- 
nally, the  history  of  the  world  in  our  time  brings  us  into  collision  with  living 
religions  in  new  and  dramatic  ways,  though  no  doubt  it  is  possible  to  exag- 
gerate the  newness.  This  is  not  the  first  time,  for  example,  that  the  Christian 
community  has  confronted  Islam. 

45  Mk.  8:29,  Mt.  16:15,  Lk.  9:20.  Many  of  Jesus’  contemporaries  thought  of  him  as  the 
carpenter’s  son,  as  a blasphemer,  as  a teacher. 

46  Pluralism  is  used  loosely  in  contemporary  discussion  with  no  clear  definition  of  its  mean- 
ing or  its  limits.  See  Will  Herberg,  Protestant,  Catholic,  and  jew:  An  Essay  m American  Reli- 
gious Sociology,  new  rev.  ed.  (Garden  City,  NJ:  Anchor  Books,  i960);  John  Murray  Cuddihy, 
No  Offense:  Civil  Religion  and  Protestant  Taste  (New  York:  Seabury  Press,  1978);  Uncivil 
Religion:  Interreligious  Hostility  in  America,  ed.  Robert  N.  Bellah  and  Frederick  E.  Green- 
spahn  (New  York:  Crossroads  Publishing  Co.,  1987);  Pushing  the  Faith:  Proselytism  and  Ci- 
vility in  a Pluralistic  World,  ed.  Martin  E.  Marty  and  Frederick  E.  Greenspahn  (New  York: 
Crossroads  Publishing  Co.,  1988). 


REFORMED  PREACHING 


245 

Pluralism  confronts  us,  secondly,  in  our  customs  of  niceness  and  polite- 
ness. Religion  and  politics  are  topics  that  are  not  appropriate  in  polite  con- 
versation. It  is  no  longer  proper  to  ask  a person  about  his  or  her  religion, 
nor  is  it  proper  culturally  or  esthetically  to  question  interfaith  marriages. 
The  acceptance  of  the  existence  of  other  faiths,  even  on  the  most  basic  level 
of  a pluralistic  society,  constitutes  a psychological  problem.  How  can  we,  on 
the  one  hand,  affirm,  practically  speaking,  that  all  religions  have  their  valid- 
ity, and  yet  be  serious  about  our  own.  This  is  the  practical  and  psychological 
problem.  It  erodes  preaching  without  our  knowing  it.47 

Pluralism  also  confronts  us  in  theology.  Historians  of  religion  are  increas- 
ingly insisting  that  the  theology  of  the  future  must  be  a theology  of  world 
religions.48  The  new  theology  of  pluralism  is  being  expressed  with  as  much 
dogmatism,  with  as  much  intolerance,  and  with  as  many  pejorative  repre- 
sentations of  opposing  views  as  any  Christian  orthodoxy  has  ever  been  ex- 
pressed, which  as  with  Christian  orthodoxy  may  indicate  a basic  uncer- 
tainty.49 It  is  an  issue  with  which  the  church  has  to  deal,  in  particular 

47  No  one  has  expressed  this  better  than  Walter  Lippmann:  “As  a consequence  of  the 
modern  theory  of  religious  freedom  the  churches  find  themselves  in  an  anomalous  position. 
Inwardly,  to  their  communicants,  they  continue  to  assert  that  they  possess  the  only  complete 
version  of  the  truth.  But  outwardly,  in  their  civic  relation  with  other  churches  and  with  the 
civil  power,  they  preach  and  practice  toleration.  The  separation  of  church  and  state  involves 
more  than  a mere  logical  difficulty  for  the  churchmen.  It  involves  a deep  psychological  dif- 
ficulty for  the  members  of  the  congregation.  As  communicants  they  are  expected  to  believe 
without  reservation  that  their  church  is  the  only  true  means  of  salvation;  otherwise  the  mul- 
titude of  separate  sects  would  be  meaningless.  But  as  citizens  they  are  expected  to  maintain 
a neutral  indifference  to  the  claims  of  all  sects,  and  to  resist  encroachments  by  any  one  sect 
upon  the  religious  practices  ot  the  others.  This  is  the  best  compromise  which  human  wisdom 
has  yet  devised,  but  it  has  one  inevitable  consequence  which  the  superficial  advocates  of 
toleration  often  overlook.  It  is  difficult  to  remain  warmly  convinced  that  the  authority  of  any 
one  sect  is  divine,  when  as  a matter  of  daily  experience  all  sects  have  to  be  treated  alike. 

“The  human  soul  is  not  so  divided  in  compartments  that  a man  can  be  indifferent  in  one 
part  of  his  soul  and  firmly  believing  in  another.  The  existence  of  rival  sects,  the  visible  dem- 
onstration that  none  has  a monopoly,  the  habit  of  neutrality,  cannot  but  dispose  men  against 
an  unquestioning  acceptance  of  the  authority  of  one  sect.  So  many  fruits,  so  many  loyalties, 
are  offered  to  the  modern  man  that  at  last  none  seems  to  him  wholly  inevitable  and  fixed  in 
the  order  of  the  universe.  The  existence  of  many  churches  in  one  community  weakens  the 
foundations  of  all  of  them.  And  that  is  why  every  church  in  the  heyday  of  its  power  proclaims 
itself  to  be  catholic  and  intolerant. 

“But  when  there  are  many  churches  in  the  same  community,  none  can  make  wholly  good 
on  the  claim  that  it  is  catholic.  None  has  that  power  to  discipline  the  individual  which  a 
universal  church  exercises”  (Walter  Lippmann,  A Preface  to  Morals  [New  York:  The  Mac- 
millan Co.,  1929],  pp.  75-76). 

48  Wilfred  Cantwell  Smith,  “Theology  and  the  World’s  Religious  History”  in  Toward  a 
Universal  Theology  of  Religion,  ed.  Leonard  Swidler  (Maryknoll,  NY:  Orbis  Books,  1987),  pp. 
51-72;  Wilfred  Cantwell  Smith,  Towards  a World  Theology  (Philadelphia:  Westminster  Press, 
1981);  The  Myth  of  Christian  Uniqueness:  Toward  a Pluralistic  Theology  of  Religions,  ed.  John 
Hick  and  Paul  F.  Knitter  (Maryknoll,  NY:  Orbis  Books,  1987). 

49  Wilfred  Cantwell  Smith,  “Idolatry:  In  Comparative  Perspective,”  in  The  Myth  of  Chris- 
tian Uniqueness,  pp.  53-68. 


246 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


because  the  theologians  who  write  about  the  myth  of  Christian  uniqueness 
still  Rnd  their  audience  and  readers  in  the  Christian  community.  The  theo- 
logical justification  of  a radical  pluralism  is  finally  a more  serious  challenge 
to  traditional  Christianity  than  the  existence  of  pluralism  itself. 

One  of  the  clearest  statements  of  the  radical  modification  of  Christian 
faith  which  some  theologians  think  pluralism  demands  has  been  given  with 
clarity  and  with  vigor  by  Gordon  Kaufman.  “From  our  modern  historical 
vantage  point,  however,  looking  back  at  the  many  great  and  diverse  cultural 
and  religious  traditions  that  have  appeared  in  human  history,  all  of  these 
diverse  conceptions  and  pictures  seem  best  understood  as  the  product  of 
human  imaginative  creativity  in  the  face  of  the  great  mystery  that  life  is  to 
all  of  us.  Out  of,  and  on  the  basis  of  such  traditions  of  meaning,  value,  and 
truth,  all  men  and  women  live.”50  “Christian  theology  would  understand 
itself  in  essentially  the  same  terms  that  it  understands  other  religious  activity 
and  reflection — namely,  as  human  imaginative  response  to  the  necessity  to 
find  orientation  for  life  in  a particular  historical  situation.  It  would  thus 
keep  itself  open  to  insights,  criticism,  and  correction  from  other  points  of 
view,  including  other  religious  and  secular  perspectives  and  worldviews.”5' 
“To  acknowledge  forthrightly  and  regularly  that  our  theological  statements 
and  claims  are  simply  ours — that  they  are  the  products  of  our  own  human 
study  and  reflection,  and  of  the  spontaneity  and  creativity  of  our  human 
powers,  imaginatively  to  envision  a world  and  our  human  place  within  that 
world  is  to  set  us  free  from  these  all  too  easy  but  false  moves  toward  au- 
thoritarianism, which  has  characterized  Christian  theology  in  the  past.”52 

Kaufman’s  view  would  seem  to  undercut  any  basis  for  preaching.  In  the 
place  of  preaching  there  may  be  a theological  lecture  or  conversation  which 
has  equal  validity  with  other  theological  lectures  and  conversations.  If  the- 
ology is  just  conversation,  just  the  imaginative  construct  of  human  creativity 
as  Kaufman  suggests  or  as  Richard  Rorty  concludes  about  philosophy,  one 
voice  in  the  great  conversation,  then  there  is  very  little  to  preach.53 

Congregations  which  gather  to  hear  a preacher  are  called  out  by  their 
conviction  that  the  Bible  is  the  Word  of  God  and  that  Jesus  Christ  is  God 
incarnate.  This  has  been  true  from  the  first  century  to  the  twentieth  century. 
These  two  views  about  the  authority  of  Scripture  and  about  the  significance 

50  Gordon  D.  Kaufman,  “Religious  Diversity,  Historical  Consciousness,  and  Christian 
Theology,”  in  The  Myth  of  Christian  Uniqueness , p.  8. 

5'  Ibid.,  p.  12. 

52  Ibid.,  pp.  12-13. 

53  Richard  Rorty,  Philosophy  and  the  Mirror  of  Nature  (Princeton,  NJ:  Princeton  University 
Press,  1980),  pp.  389-94. 


REFORMED  PREACHING 


247 

of  Jesus  Christ  are  now  openly  challenged,  sometimes  with  more  rhetoric, 
but  sometimes,  as  in  the  case  of  Gordon  Kaufman,  with  great  clarity  by 
many  theologians  in  the  life  of  the  church.  The  public  persuasive  power  of 
the  new  theologies  in  calling  forth  worshiping  communities  is  thus  far  min- 
imal. 

The  advocates  of  a theology  of  world  religions  speak  very  vigorously 
against  the  triumphalism  of  the  church,  against  the  arrogance  of  the  Chris- 
tian claim  of  uniqueness,  and  even  call  the  traditional  views  of  the  church 
idolatry.54  This  criticism  has  to  be  taken  seriously. 

How  can  we,  on  the  one  hand,  affirm  the  authority  of  the  Bible  as  the 
Word  of  God  and  Jesus  Christ  as  God  incarnate  and  avoid  the  obvious  perils 
of  triumphalism,  arrogance,  and  idolatry?  It  is  no  doubt  true  that  Christian 
theologians  and  Christians  have  been  guilty  of  all  of  these,  though  I know 
of  no  reason  to  believe  they  have  been  any  more  guilty  than  are  the  advo- 
cates of  a theology  of  world  religions  in  their  own  proposals.  Arrogance, 
triumphalism,  idolatry  are  universal  human  problems.  Modern  secular  uni- 
versities, Harvard  and  Yale,  for  example,  illustrate  the  human  problem  of 
arrogance  and  ruthless,  even  violent,  intolerance  of  dissenting  opinion  quite 
as  much  as  the  church  ever  has.55 

The  solutions  which  pluralism  offers  are  all  at  the  expense  of  the  integrity 
of  Christian  faith.  From  the  pluralist  perspective,  the  claim  that  the  Word 
became  flesh  is  always  foolishness  or  a scandal.  Only  within  the  community 
is  Jesus  Christ  the  power  and  wisdom  of  God  for  salvation.  The  theological 
language  from  the  tradition  and  from  the  Bible  still  has  great  power.  One 
evidence  of  this  is  use  of  the  language  as  well  as  the  resources  of  the  com- 
munity by  scholars  whose  own  theology  is  very  different  from  that  of  the 
church. 

The  constructive  facing  of  the  problem  of  pluralism  begins  with  the  ques- 
tion of  stance  or  method.  John  Knox,  long-time  professor  of  New  Testa- 
ment at  Union  Theological  Seminary  in  New  York,  writing  in  1968,  de- 
clared: 

It  [Christian  inquiry]  embraces  every  aspect  of  man’s  life,  and  indeed 

of  the  cosmos;  but  the  base  from  which  the  inquiry  proceeds  is  the 

54  Cf.  The  Myth  of  Christian  Uniqueness : see  the  essay  by  John  Hick,  “The  Non- Absolute- 
ness of  Christianity,”  16-36;  also  Wilfred  Cantwell  Smith,  “Idolatry:  In  Comparative  Per- 
spective,” pp.  53-68. 

55  Allen  Bloom,  The  Closing  of  the  American  Mind  (New  York:  Simon  and  Schuster,  1987), 
3 1 3-335;  Thomas  E.  Spahn,  “Halls  of  Ivy,  Walls  of  Glass,”  Richmond  Times  Dispatch,  March 
12,  1989. 


248 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Church’s  existence  in  its  concrete  reality  and  the  recognition  that  cer- 
tain truths  about  God  and  man  are  expressed  in  that  existence.  The 
Church  will  vigorously  encourage  this  inquiry  in  order  not  only  to 
identify  these  truths  clearly  and  surely  and  thus  inform,  confirm,  and 
enrich  the  Christian  experience  of  its  members,  but  also  to  be  in  posi- 
tion to  interpret  them  as  far  as  possible  in  terms  which  those  outside 
the  Church  can  understand. 

On  the  other  hand,  I do  not  see  that  the  Church  has  any  obligation, 
or  that  it  belongs  to  its  nature,  to  encourage  theological  inquiry  which 
does  not  begin  with  what  I have  called  this  existential  a priori.  I do  not 
mean  that  it  will  forbid  (if  it  has  the  power)  or  impede  inquiry  con- 
ducted on  the  basis  of  other  presuppositions,  nor  do  I mean  that  the 
Church’s  own  thinking  may  not  often  be  corrected,  enlarged,  and 
quickened  by  the  challenge  of  such  thinking  by  others;  but  I cannot 
see  that  the  Church  itself  could  appropriately  carry  on  such  inquiry 
without  denying  itself.  In  a word,  the  Church’s  theological  inquiry  will 
be  its  own , just  as  any  individual’s  theological  inquiry  will  be  his  own, 
proceeding  from  premises  established  within  its  own  life  (and  thus  in 
a sense  “revealed”),  however  strongly  supported  by,  because  illumina- 
tive of,  the  world  and  human  experience  as  a whole  these  premises  may 
prove  to  be.56 

Etienne  Gilson,  the  Thomist  scholar,  in  his  autobiography  confesses  that 
for  forty  years  he  misread  Thomas,  refusing  to  see  that  he  was  a theologian, 
not  a philosopher.57  As  a theologian  he  began  with  revelation  and  as  a man 
of  faith  was  free  to  welcome  all  truth  from  whichever  side  it  came.  Augus- 
tine said,  Love  God  and  do  what  you  will.  A disciple  of  Thomas  can  say, 
“Believe  and  think  what  you  will.  Like  charity,  faith  is  a liberator.  ”58  The 
starting  point  is  faith.  “The  church  knows  that  refusing  the  temptations  of 
vain  philosophy  she  may  suffer  temporary  losses  but,  by  giving  in,  she  would 
cease  to  exist.”59  The  God  whose  existence  we  demonstrate  is  but  part  of  the 
God  whose  existence  we  hold  to  be  true  on  the  strength  of  our  faith  in  His 
words.  . . . The  God  of  rational  knowledge  is  included  with  the  God  of 
faith.60 

56  John  Knox,  “The  Identifiability  of  the  Church,”  in  Theological  Freedom  and  Social  Re- 
sponsibility (New  York:  Seabury  Press,  1967),  p.  69. 

57  Etienne  Gilson,  The  Philosopher  and  Theology , trans.  Cecile  Gilson  (New  York:  Random 
House,  1962),  p.  107. 

5®  Ibid.,  p.  204. 

59  Ibid.,  p.  209. 

60  Etienne  Gilson,  Elements  of  Christian  Philosophy  (Garden  City,  NJ:  Doubleday  & Com- 
pany, i960),  p.  54. 


REFORMED  PREACH  IN  G 


249 

The  public  and  persuasive  power  of  theology  and  preaching  has  not  his- 
torically been  based  on  theological  argument  that  begins  on  some  neutral 
ground,  if  there  is  such,  certainly  not  on  a secular  ground.  The  great  per- 
suaders or  preachers  such  as  Athanasius,  Augustine,  Thomas,  Luther,  Cal- 
vin, Wesley  always  began  with  revelation  and  spoke  from  the  perspective  of 
faith.  All  theology  is  public,  that  is,  spoken  to  human  beings  as  human  be- 
ings calling  them  to  decision.  Preaching  which  explicates  the  faith  with  clar- 
ity and  which  seeks  to  understand  the  social,  political,  cultural,  economic, 
and  personal  dimensions  of  life  in  the  light  of  that  faith  has  always  per- 
suaded people.  Augustine  and  Calvin  alike  understood  that  rhetoric,  which 
is  theologically  responsible,  is  a “proof’  of  Christian  faith.6'  On  the  human 
level  the  church  has  lived  by  the  persuasiveness  of  preaching.  There  is  abun- 
dant evidence  in  the  statistics  of  American  church  life  today  that  this  is  still 
true,  even  when  the  preaching  is  theologically  inept.62 

If  we  begin  with  pluralism,  there  is  no  possibility  of  maintaining  the  his- 
torical Christian  faith.  If  we  begin  with  our  deepest  Christian  commitments 
about  Jesus  Christ,  there  are  at  least  five  affirmations  we  can  make  that  help 
us  to  deal  constructively  with  the  truth  wherever  it  may  be  found  as  well  as 
the  fact  of  pluralism. 

1.  The  first  is  pragmatic  and  prudential.  A variety  of  religious  groups 
exist  in  our  society.  The  pragmatic  and  prudential  question  is  how  these 
religious  communities  who  do  in  fact  exist  can  operate  in  the  same  society. 
This  is  no  simple  question,  and  it  may  be  revealed,  as  time  goes  on,  that 
communities  are  not  possible  unless  there  is  a greater  consensus  than  seems 
to  be  true  today.63  In  any  case,  one  response  is  pragmatic  and  prudential,  to 
work  out  ways  that  diverse  groups  can  live  together  with  decency  and  with 
dignity. 

2.  The  second  response  is  humility.  Humility  is  implicit  in  the  Christian 
doctrine  of  creation  which  affirms  that  we  are  creatures  of  a particular  time 
and  space  and  of  limited  intellectual  powers.  The  very  fact  that  we  are  crea- 
tures means  that  our  perspective,  even  the  perspective  of  university  profes- 


61  William  Bouwsma,  “Calvinism  as  a Renaissance  Artifact”  in  Papers  presented  at  a col- 
loquium on  Calvin  Studies  at  Davidson  College  Presbyterian  Church  and  Davidson  College, 
1985.  Also  Bouwsma,  “Calvin  and  the  Renaissance  Crisis  of  Knowing”  in  Calvin  Theological 
journal  17,  no.  2 (November  1982):  190-21 1. 

62  The  strong  rhetorical  tradition  of  preaching  in  Baptist  and  even  Assembly  of  God 
churches  persuades  obviously  highly  educated  modern  persons,  as  is  indicated  by  the  statistics 
of  these  churches  as  well  as  their  presence  in  affluent  suburbs  and  in  the  vicinity  of  univer- 
sities. 

63  Reinhold  Niebuhr,  “Without  Consensus  There  is  no  Consent,”  The  Center  Magazine  4, 
no.  4 (July/August  1971):  2-9.  The  presence  of  Islamic  communities  in  Britain  and  America 
raises  questions  for  a pluralistic  society  for  which  no  adequate  answer  has  been  given. 


250 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


sors,  is  parochial.  Furthermore,  Christian  theology  affirms  that  all  human 
beings  are  sinners.  As  Reinhold  Niebuhr  liked  to  insist,  it  seems  impossible 
for  us  not  to  affirm  that  our  truth  is  the  truth,  to  realize  that  we  both  have 
and  do  not  have  the  truth.64  Yet  as  Richard  Niebuhr  wrote,  the  relativity  of 
our  perception  of  the  truth  does  not  mean  that  that  which  we  perceive  is 
relative.65 

Christian  doctrine  requires  a humility  which  recognizes  the  human  lim- 
itations of  finite  intelligence,  of  a particular  human  experience,  of  a location 
in  a specific  space,  time,  and  social  group,  and  the  sinful  limitation  of  self- 
interest.  This  humility  applies  to  the  advocates  of  the  relativity  of  all  human 
awareness,  of  the  sociology  of  knowledge,  as  well  as  to  others.  This  relativ- 
ism and  limitation  of  our  knowing  also  applies  to  all  the  major  decisions  of 
life,  to  the  experience  of  falling  in  love  or  choosing  a career.  Yet  the  fact  that 
we  cannot  know  absolutely  that  another  person  loves  us  does  not  prevent  us 
from  risking  our  lives  that  our  conviction  is  true.  The  Christian  must  be 
aware  of  the  limited,  broken,  and  fragmentary  character  of  his  or  her  per- 
ceptions; but  for  centuries  Christians  who  have  known  their  own  perception 
of  God’s  presence  in  Jesus  Christ  is  broken  and  flawed  have  affirmed  in 
faith  that  it  is  also  true. 

The  Enlightenment  and  contemporary  pluralism  encourage  the  belief 
that  the  final  truth  about  the  world  is  hidden  to  us.66  Revelation  as  the  be- 
ginning of  Christian  experience  as  well  as  of  understanding  contradicts  the 
basic  assumptions  of  an  Enlightenment  culture.  Theologians  may  engage  in 
theological  conversation  but  there  may  be  no  one  “out  there.”  Hence  there 
is  the  great  temptation  to  soften  the  question  of  truth.  Theology  is  construed 
as  a cultural  linguistic  activity,  which  it  is;67  or  as  the  narrative  of  Jesus  taken 
seriously  because  it  is  followable,  which  it  surely  is.68  Yet  if  the  doctrine  of 
the  Trinity  does  not  attempt  to  say  in  a faltering  way  who  God  is,  and  if  the 
life  and  teaching  of  Jesus  is  not  only  the  way  but  also  the  truth,  why  should 
anyone  bother  either  with  the  Trinity  or  with  Jesus  Christ  or  Christian  dis- 

Reinhold  Niebuhr,  The  Nature  and  Destiny  of  Man  (New  York:  Charles  Scribner’s  Sons, 
1941,  1943),  vol.  2,  ch.  8. 

65  H.  Richard  Niebuhr,  The  Meaning  of  Revelation  (New  York:  Macmillan  Company, 
1946),  p.  18. 

66  James  C.  Livingston,  Modern  Christian  Thought:  From  the  Enlightenment  to  Vatican  II 
(New  York:  Macmillan  Company,  1971),  especially  chapters  1 and  2.  Also  Peter  Gay,  The 
Enlightenment,  2 vols.  (New  York:  Knopf,  1966-69). 

67  George  Lindbeck,  The  Nature  of  Doctrine : Religion  and  Theology  in  a Postliberal  Age 
(Philadelphia:  Westminster  Press,  1984). 

68  Ronald  F.  Thiemann,  Revelation  and  Theology:  The  Gospel  as  Narrated  Promise  (Notre 
Dame,  Ind.:  University  of  Notre  Dame  Press,  1985),  pp.  82-91. 


REFORMED  PREACH ING 


251 


cipleship?  Christian  faith  and  theology  have  their  origin  in  the  initiative  of 
God  or  not  at  all.69 

Every  human  being  must  speak  with  the  humility  of  a creature  and  a 
sinner.  This  is  no  more  a problem  for  orthodox  Christianity  than  it  is  for 
the  secular  exponent  of  the  sociology  of  knowledge.  Human  life  in  every 
dimension  of  personal  existence  must  be  lived  on  the  basis  of  reasonable 
certainty  and  tacit  understanding.70  On  this  basis  believers  with  humility 
may  say  “the  Word  became  flesh”  as  the  truth. 

3.  Third,  we  can  respond  with  respect  for  human  dignity.  It  is  our  Chris- 
tian conviction  that  God  created  every  human  person  as  a self  who  must  be 
responsible  in  the  presence  of  God.  There  are  depths  of  the  human  self 
which  have  to  be  respected,  and  no  state  and  no  society  has  the  right  to 
invade  the  privacy  of  the  self.7'  Christians  above  all  ought  to  insist  upon  not 
only  the  right  but  the  responsibility  of  every  human  being  to  assume  the 
dignity  of  a child  of  God  and  to  answer  for  himself  or  herself  in  the  presence 
of  God.  Christians,  on  the  basis  of  their  own  theological  convictions,  respect 
and  protect  the  privacy  of  a person.  This  is  what  it  means  in  part  to  confess 
that  a human  being  is  the  child  of  God. 

4.  We  can  respond  to  the  coming  of  Jesus  Christ  in  a manner  congruent 
with  the  coming  itself.  The  birth  of  Jesus  is  told  with  stark  simplicity.  Mary 
was  a humble  chambermaid  to  her  Lord,  and  Joseph  a carpenter.  The  birth- 
place was  a stable.  Jesus  was  born  not  among  the  powerful  or  the  rich,  but 
among  plain,  genuine  human  beings  who  waited  for  the  Lord.  This  distinc- 
tive character  has  survived  the  temptation  of  artists  and  writers  to  portray 
it  otherwise.72  The  Word  of  God  came  into  our  midst  without  the  trappings 
of  power.  He  did  not  seek  to  overwhelm.  The  reality  itself  was  sufficient. 
Furthermore,  Jesus  came  not  for  the  righteous  or  for  the  powerful,  but  to 
the  poor,  in  the  biblical  sense  of  those  who  want  help  and  who  know  that 
God  is  their  only  salvation.  Cuddihy  speaks  of  the  homely  Protestant  and 

69  Ibid.,  especially  chapters  4 and  5.  Thiemann’s  exposition  of  Matthew  is  very  persuasive, 
but  in  my  judgment  he  exaggerates  the  novelty  of  his  argument.  Few  theologians  have  ever 
conceived  of  revelation  in  terms  of  knowing  subject  and  object,  certainly  not  Augustine  or 
Calvin.  I do  not  understand  why  anyone  would  be  concerned  with  theological  speech  or  with 
discipleship  apart  from  the  conviction  that  the  faith  is  true,  that  it  reliably  affirms  what  is. 

70  The  decision  of  faith  is  not  formally  different  from  the  decision  to  marry  or  to  choose  a 
vocation. 

71  Dietrich  Bonhoeffer,  Letters  and  Papers  from  Prison,  ed.  Eberhard  Bethge  (New  York: 
The  Macmillan  Company,  1972,  enl.  ed.),  p.  158;  Milner  S.  Ball,  The  Promise  of  American 
Law:  A Theological,  Humanistic  View  of  Legal  Process  (Athens,  Ga.:  University  of  Georgia 
Press,  1981). 

72  Erich  Auerbach,  Mimesis:  The  Representation  of  Reality  in  Western  Literature,  trans.  Wil- 
lard R.  Trask  (Garden  City,  N.J.:  Doubleday  and  Company,  1957),  pp.  tiff. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


252 

the  decorum  of  imperfection.73  There  is  the  decorum  of  sinners  saved  by 
grace.  Yet  we  must  remember  the  unostentatious,  meek  sinners  of  the  New 
Testament  dared  to  die  for  their  faith  and  to  witness  for  it  before  the  rulers 
and  the  powerful  people  of  the  world. 

5.  The  fifth  response  must  be  theological.  From  the  beginning  Christians 
have  been  shaped  by  the  conviction  that  God  had  acted  for  the  salvation  of 
all  people  in  Jesus  Christ.  Every  page  of  the  New  Testament  is  written  with 
this  conviction.  Jesus  Christ  is  the  one  who  brings  to  fulfillment  the  longings 
and  yearnings  of  all  human  beings.  “All  things  have  been  delivered  to  me 
by  my  Father;  and  no  one  knows  the  Son  except  the  Father,  and  no  one 
knows  the  Father  except  the  Son  and  anyone  to  whom  the  Son  chooses  to 
reveal  him"  (Mt.  1 1:27).  What  God  had  foretold  by  the  mouth  of  the  proph- 
ets he  has  now  fulfilled  (Acts  3:18).  Or  the  God  who  made  the  world  and 
everything  in  it  and  who  commands  all  people  to  repent  has  now  judged 
the  world  by  the  man  whom  he  appointed  and  raised  from  the  dead  (Acts 
17).  The  Word,  God  in  his  self-expression,  by  whom  all  things  were  made, 
became  flesh  and  dwelt  among  us  (Jn.  1).  “In  many  and  various  ways  God 
spoke  of  old  to  our  fathers  by  the  prophets;  but  in  these  last  days  he  has 
spoken  to  us  by  a Son,  whom  he  appointed  the  heir  of  all  things,  through 
whom  also  he  created  the  world.  He  reflects  the  glory  of  God  and  bears  the 
very  stamp  of  his  nature,  upholding  the  universe  by  his  word  of  power” 
(Heb.  1:1-3).  The  Christian  community  in  every  time  and  place  has  lived  by 
this  faith,  which  has  received  its  classic  theological  statements  at  Nicaea  and 
Chalcedon. 

This  faith  is  a confession,  not  a demonstration.  No  historian  or  theologian 
can  show  that  Jesus  is  the  Christ.  Yet  Christians  have  always  confessed  it  as 
the  truth  as  well  as  faith.  The  confession  is  not  a manner  of  speaking  or 
feeling,  but  the  conviction  that  Jesus  is  in  reality  the  incarnation  of  God,  and 
that  what  is  true  for  the  Christian  is  true  for  all  people.  In  the  light  of  this 
conviction,  they  have  sought  to  understand  the  world.  The  conviction  about 
the  uniqueness  and  significance  of  Jesus  Christ  arises  out  of  faith  percep- 
tions, out  of  repentance  and  commitment,  not  out  of  a study  of  religions. 
Yet  this  faith  illuminates  and  makes  sense  out  of  all  human  experience. 

Augustine  summarized  the  consequences  of  his  rubric,  “We  believe  in 
order  to  understand,”  for  a pluralistic  society,  in  this  way: 

This  heavenly  city,  then,  while  it  sojourns  on  earth,  calls  citizens  out 

of  all  nations,  and  gathers  together  a society  of  pilgrims  of  all  lan- 

73  Cuddihy,  No  Offense:  Civil  Religion  and  Protestant  Taste,  pp.  191-207. 


REFORMED  PREACHING 


253 


guages,  not  scrupling  about  diversities  in  the  manners,  laws,  and  insti- 
tutions whereby  earthly  peace  is  secured  and  maintained,  but  recognis- 
ing that,  however  various  these  are,  they  all  tend  to  one  and  the  same 
end  of  earthly  peace.  It  therefore  is  so  far  from  rescinding  and  abol- 
ishing these  diversities,  that  it  even  preserves  and  adapts  them,  so  long 
only  as  no  hindrance  to  the  worship  of  the  one  supreme  and  true  God 
is  thus  introduced.74 

Calvin  refused  to  speculate  whether  God  would  have  become  incarnate 
if  human  beings  had  not  sinned  and  needed  redemption.75  Yet  there  was 
never  any  doubt  that  the  God  who  redeems  is  also  the  God  who  creates. 
Hence  all  truth  is  consonant  with  what  has  happened  in  Jesus  Christ,  and 
can  be  included  within  the  Christian  faith.76  The  theological  basis  for  the 
persuasive  interpretation  of  all  creation  in  the  light  of  the  revelation  of  God 
in  Jesus  Christ  has  always  been  affirmed  by  Reformed  theology.  Today  this 
persuasive  proclaiming  of  the  faith  is  crucial. 

The  Augustinian  way  of  dealing  with  this  problem  can  be  abused.  As 
Gilson  warns,  “Second  rate  thinkers  will  use  Revelation  as  a substitute  for 
rational  knowledge  . . . Thus  confronted  with  a wisdom  of  Christians  elab- 
orated by  Christians  and  for  the  exclusive  benefit  of  Christians,  unbelievers 
find  themselves  in  a rather  awkward  position.”77  The  danger  is  very  clear, 
but  in  fact  the  theology  of  Reinhold  Niebuhr  in  our  time  demonstrates  the 
powerfulness  of  this  approach  in  getting  the  attention  of  secular  intellec- 
tuals.78 

Contemporary  theologians  of  the  Reformed  way  have  dealt  with  this 
problem  in  various  ways.  Karl  Barth’s  attention  was  fixed  on  Jesus  Christ  to 
the  exclusion  of  world  religions.79  Jesus  Christ  was  the  abolition  of  religion. 
How  much  this  was  a concentration  of  attention  and  how  much  a theolog- 
ical judgment  is  difficult  to  say. 

74  St.  Augustine,  The  City  of  God , trans.  Marcus  Dods  (New  York:  Modern  Library,  1950), 
bk.  19,  ch.  17,  p.  696. 

75  Calvin,  Institutes,  2.12.4. 

76  This  position  is  supported  by  Calvin’s  exposition  of  Jn.  1 and  his  doctrine  of  the  “extra 
Calvinisticum.”  Cf.  Heiko  A.  Oberman,  “The  ‘Extra’  Dimension  in  the  Theology  of  Calvin” 
in  Heiko  A.  Oberman,  The  Dawn  of  the  Reformation  (Edinburgh:  T.  & T.  Clark,  1986),  pp. 
234-58.  See  also  E.  David  Willis,  Calvin's  Catholic  Christology:  The  Function  of  the  So-called 
Extra  Calvinisticum  in  Calvin's  Theology  (Leiden:  E.  J.  Brill,  1966). 

77  Etienne  Gilson,  Revelation  and  Reason  in  the  Middle  Ages  (New  York:  Charles  Scribner’s 
Sons,  1938),  pp.  32-33. 

78  Reinhold  Niebuhr,  The  Nature  and  Destiny  of  Man  (New  York:  Charles  Scribner’s  Sons, 
1943),  2:6. 

79  Barth,  Church  Dogmatics,  1.2,  par.  17. 


254 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Emil  Brunner  was  more  aware  of  world  religions.  For  him,  all  religion  is 
rooted  in  revelation,  and  complicated  by  sinful  human  responses  to  that 
revelation.80  The  critical  point  is  not  religion,  but  Jesus  Christ,  who  stands 
in  judgment  on  all  religions,  including  the  Christian  religion. 

Jesus  Christ  is  both  the  Fulfillment  of  all  religion  and  the  judgment  of 
all  religion.  As  the  fulfiller,  he  is  the  truth,  which  these  religions  seek 
in  vain.  There  is  no  phenomenon  in  the  history  of  religion  that  does 
not  point  to  him.  . . . 

He  is  also  the  judgment  on  all  religion.  Viewed  in  this  light,  all 
religious  systems  appear  untrue,  unbelieving,  and  indeed  godless.8' 

Hendrik  Kraemer  came  to  the  problem  with  a great  knowledge  of  world 
religions.  On  the  one  hand,  this  knowledge  gave  him  an  appreciation  of 
world  religions  which  he  understood  as  a human  response  to  God’s  univer- 
sal revelation  of  himself.  At  the  same  time,  it  made  him  more  aware  of  the 
differences  between  religions  and  of  religions  as  closed  systems.  Christianity 
can  never  be  the  simple  fulfillment  of  other  religions. 

The  Christian  revelation,  as  the  record  of  God’s  self-disclosing  revela- 
tion in  Jesus  Christ,  is  absolutely  sui  generis.  It  is  the  story  of  God’s 
sovereign  acts  having  become  decisively  and  finally  manifest  in  Jesus 
Christ,  the  Son  of  the  Living  God,  in  whom  God  became  flesh  and 
revealed  his  grace  and  truth.  . . . Religious  experiences  or  ideas  are,  of 
course,  not  absent  from  the  Bible,  and  they  are  by  no  means  unimpor- 
tant, but  in  no  sense  are  they  central.  What  is  central  and  fundamental 
in  the  Bible  is  the  registering,  describing  and  witnessing  to  God’s  cre- 
ative and  redemptive  dealing  with  man  and  the  world.82 

In  so  far  as  Jesus  fulfills  persistent  yearnings  and  apprehensions,  he  also 
recasts  them.  Furthermore,  God  as  he  is  revealed  in  Jesus  Christ  is  “con- 
trary” to  the  sublimest  pictures  we  made  of  him  before  we  knew  him  in 
Jesus  Christ.83  In  his  final  writing,  he  concludes,  “If  we  are  ever  to  know 
what  true  and  divinely  willed  religion  is,  we  can  do  this  only  through  God’s 
revelation  in  Jesus  Christ  and  through  nothing  else.”84 

80  Emil  Brunner,  Revelation  and  Reason:  The  Christian  Doctrine  of  Faith  and  Knowledge 
(Philadelphia:  Westminster  Press,  1946),  pp.  262-64. 

8'  Ibid.,  pp.  270-71. 

81  Hendrik  Kraemer,  “Continuity  or  Discontinuity,”  The  Authority  of  the  Faith , The  Ma- 
dras Series,  vol.  1 (New  York:  International  Missionary  Council,  1939),  p.  1. 

83  Ibid.,  p.  3. 

84  Hendrik  Kraemer,  Why  Christianity  of  all  Religions? , trans.  Hubert  Hoskins  (Philadel- 


REFORMED  PREACH ING 


255 


The  positions  of  Barth,  Brunner,  and  Kraemer  may  not  be  persuasive  to 
many  who  are  impressed  by  the  fact  of  world  religions.  But  their  theological 
reasoning  can  be  convincing  for  those  who  begin  with  the  revelation  of  God 
in  Jesus  Christ  and  with  the  New  Testament.  A critic  may  say  that  it  is  not 
true  that  Jesus  is  God  incarnate,  but  the  integrity  of  the  theological  argu- 
ments of  Augustine,  Calvin,  Barth,  Brunner,  Kraemer  cannot  be  denied, 
given  the  fact  of  “the  Word  made  flesh.”  In  a variety  of  ways  in  their  the- 
ology, this  faith  seeks  understanding,  that  is  the  intelligibility  of  world  reli- 
gions and  of  pluralism. 

The  critical  decisiveness  of  what  happened  in  Jesus  Christ  is  the  founda- 
tion for  Christian  preaching.  Without  the  intensity  of  this  conviction, 
preaching  will  languish,  however  much  it  may  be  maintained  by  the  struc- 
tures of  the  church,  and  however  much  it  may  serve  as  entertainment,  moral 
exhortation,  political  advice,  or  therapy.  In  recent  years  we  have  heard  a 
great  deal  about  burnout,  even  in  the  ministry.  Fortune  magazine  once  de- 
clared that  burnout  meant  one  had  a job  for  which  he  or  she  was  not  qual- 
ified.85 It  may  also  be  that  we  are  engaged  in  a work  for  which  we  have  lost 
our  enthusiasm.  For  example,  there  is  the  English  professor  who  has  to 
teach  English  but  who  no  longer  loves  English  literature,  or  the  historian 
who  has  to  teach  history  but  who  is  no  longer  excited  by  the  drama  and 
meaningfulness  of  human  life  on  this  planet.  Without  the  passionate  convic- 
tion of  faith,  there  cannot  be  Christian  preaching,  any  more  than  there  can 
be  great  teaching  of  literature  and  history  without  an  enthusiasm  for  liter- 
ature and  history.  Hence  the  recovery  of  preaching  first  of  all  is  rooted  in 
the  living  faith  and  the  conviction  of  the  preacher. 

Pluralism  undercuts  not  only  the  necessity  for  preaching  but  enthusiasm 
for  preaching.  It  certainly  undercuts  any  justification  for  the  enormous  ex- 
pense that  preaching  entails  on  the  part  of  the  gifts  of  the  worshiping,  be- 
lieving community.  It  constitutes  a challenge  for  the  preacher  to  proclaim 
Jesus  Christ  through  whom  all  things  were  created,  in  whom  all  things  are 
held  together  (Col.  1:17-19). 

IV 

The  need  for  the  recovery  of  preaching  in  our  time  is  plain  enough.  The 
health  of  the  Christian  community  has  always  been  reflected  in  great 
preaching.  It  is  difficult  to  find  a period  of  vital  Christian  growth  in  the 

phia:  Westminster  Press,  1962),  p.  79.  Also  see  Hendrik  Kraemer,  Religion  and  the  Christian 
Faith  (Philadelphia:  Westminster  Press,  1956),  chapters  22  and  23. 

85  D.  Dumaine,  “Cool  Cures  for  Burnout,”  Fortune  1 17  (June  20,  1988):  78-81. 


256 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


entire  two  millennia  of  Christian  history  without  great  preaching.  The  need 
for  great  preaching  today  in  an  increasingly  pluralistic  and  pagan  society  is 
clear  enough. 

The  recovery  of  great  preaching  is  more  complex.  In  any  case,  it  is  not 
simply  a matter  of  courses  in  homiletics.  Preaching  requires  personal  com- 
mitments, scholarly  competences,  and  technical  skills. 

(1)  The  recovery  of  great  preaching  involves  the  renewal  of  faith.  The 
origin  of  preaching  is  in  the  heart,  not  in  the  head,  not  in  reasoned  argument 
but  in  the  passionate  conviction  of  the  human  heart.  Hence  preaching  is  a 
gift  of  the  Holy  Spirit  for  which  we  must  hope  and  pray. 

(2)  The  recovery  of  great  preaching  calls  for  the  revival  of  the  Christian 
community  as  a disciplined,  knowledgeable,  worshiping  community  of  peo- 
ple. The  recovery  of  preaching  and  the  recovery  of  the  community  will  have 
to  take  place  together,  because  there  can  be  no  recovery  of  a vital  Christian 
community,  well  informed,  apart  from  the  recovery  of  great  preaching.  And 
on  the  other  hand,  a great  congregation  makes  a great  preacher. 

(3)  The  recovery  of  great  preaching  involves  the  recovery  of  the  Bible, 
which  has  been  assimilated  into  one’s  thinking,  and  the  recovery  of  theolog- 
ical competence  that  likewise  has  become  part  of  the  structure  of  one’s  per- 
sonal existence. 

(4)  The  recovery  of  great  preaching  depends  upon  a recovery  of  a frame- 
work of  theological  reality  that  holds  life  together  in  a coherent  way  and  in 
which  we  can  see  our  place  in  the  church  and  in  the  world.  Preaching  has 
to  do  with  the  ultimate  issues  of  human  origin  and  destiny  and  not  with  the 
occasional  facts  of  politics  or  organization.  Ideally,  the  preacher  should  re- 
capitulate in  his  or  her  own  life  the  history  of  doctrine,  what  the  church 
through  the  centuries  has  believed,  confessed,  preached,  and  taught. 

(5)  The  recovery  of  great  preaching  requires  the  acquisition  of  a language 
that  is  precise  and  clear,  that  has  the  quality  of  reality,  and  that  is  appropri- 
ate to  communicate  the  Christian  gospel.  As  long  as  English  is  spoken,  this 
must  build  upon  the  remarkable  literary  and  theological  achievement  of  the 
Puritans.  Language  appropriate  to  the  faith  cannot  be  finally  learned  in  ac- 
ademic communities  but  only  as  those  learned  in  the  tradition  engage  a 
broad  range  of  people,  learned  and  unlearned,  in  theological  conversation. 
The  scientific,  technological,  secular  character  of  our  culture  makes  the 
problem  of  language  all  the  more  important.  As  Calvin  put  the  traditional 
theology  of  the  church  in  the  language  of  ordinary  discourse,  so  that  is  our 
task  today. 

Preaching  has  always  been  powerful  to  move  people,  to  shape  personali- 


REFORMED  PREACHING 


257 


ties  and  communities  in  many  times  and  places.  It  is  not  likely  that  its  power 
is  diminished  today.  All  people  who  seek  to  shape  human  history,  politi- 
cians, ideologues,  advocates,  would  give  anything  to  have  what  is  available 
to  the  church  in  the  gathering  of  people.  The  great  crowds  on  Saturdays  at 
college  football  games  are  impressive,  but  within  a few  miles’  radius  of  foot- 
ball stadiums,  more  people  gather  to  worship  God  and  hear  a sermon  on 
Sunday.86  This  gathering  of  the  people  is  a phenomenon  that  cannot  be 
duplicated  in  our  society,  and  it  is  a challenge  and  opportunity  for  those 
called  to  preach. 

86  Cf.  Jeffrey  Stout,  Ethics  After  Babel,  p.  163.  Stout  with  seeming  satisfaction  declares  that 
theology  is  marginal  in  commanding  attention  “as  a distinctive  contributor  to  public  dis- 
course in  our  culture.”  He  doubts  that  theology  can  speak  persuasively  “to  an  educated  public 
without  sacrificing  its  own  integrity  as  a recognizable  mode  of  utterance.”  Stout  appears  to 
identify  “an  educated  public”  with  a university  philosophy  and  religion  department.  Without 
denying  much  of  Stout’s  criticism  of  “academic  theology,”  his  contention  that  theology  is 
marginal  to  an  “educated  public”  is  refuted  each  Sunday  in  churches  where  Christian  faith 
is  explicated  to  highly  educated  “modern  people,”  including  the  church  adjacent  to  the 
Princeton  University  campus,  indeed,  the  church  out  of  which  Princeton  University  came  to 
be. 


The  African-American 
Christian  Heritage:  Its 
Witness  and  Promise 

by  Clarice  J.  Martin 


An  ordained  Presbyterian  minister,  Dr. 
Clarice  J.  Martin  is  Assistant  Professor  of 
New  Testament  at  Princeton  Seminary. 
She  is  a graduate  of  the  University  of  Cal- 
ifornia (B.A.),  San  Francisco  Theological 
Seminary  (M.Div.),  and  Du^e  University 
Graduate  School  (Ph.D).  Author  of  nu- 
merous articles,  her  research  and  teaching 
areas  include  the  Synoptic  Gospels,  Acts, 
and  the  social  origins  of  early  Christianity. 
She  is  a member  of  the  committee  that  has 
prepared  a new  Brief  Statement  of  Faith 
for  the  Presbyterian  Church  (U.S.A.).  This 
sermon  was  delivered  in  the  Princeton 
University  Chapel  on  February  21,  1988, 
in  a service  celebrating  the  Black,  Heritage. 


Text:  But  an  angel  of  the  Lord  said  to  Philip,  “Rise  and  go  toward  the  south  to 
the  road  that  goes  down  from  Jerusalem  to  Gaza.’’  This  is  a desert  road. 
And  he  rose  and  went.  And  behold,  an  Ethiopian,  a eunuch,  a minister  of 
Candace,  queen  of  the  Ethiopians,  in  charge  of  all  her  treasure,  had  come 
to  Jerusalem  to  worship  and  was  returning;  seated  in  his  chariot,  he  was 
reading  the  prophet  Isaiah.  And  the  Spirit  said  to  Philip,  “Go  up  and  join 
this  chariot.”  So  Philip  ran  to  him,  and  heard  him  reading  Isaiah  the 
prophet,  and  asked,  “Do  you  understand  what  you  are  reading?”  And  he 
said,  “How  can  I,  unless  some  one  guides  me?”  And  he  invited  Philip  to 
come  up  and  sit  with  him.  (Acts  8:26-31) 

The  richness  of  the  African-American  religious  heritage  is  too  vast  to 
address  adequately  in  a chapel  address,  and  yet,  it  is  both  fitting  and 
appropriate  that  we  do  pause  together  on  this  Black  Heritage  Sunday  and 
reflect  upon  some  of  the  distinctive  ways  in  which  the  African-American 
religious  heritage  beckons  all  of  us  to  live  up  to  our  highest  calling  as  both 
servants  of  and  co-laborers  with  the  God  who  has  created  us  to  live  in  com- 
munity as  one  human  family. 

One  of  the  most  characteristic — if  not  pervasive — emphases  of  the  Afri- 
can-American religious  heritage  is  its  focus  on  the  centrality  and  necessity 
of  human  liberation  as  a fundamental  component  of  authentic  human  per- 
sonhood  and  existence  under  God.  Theologian  Olin  P.  Moyd  correctly  ob- 
serves that  human  liberation  means  deliverance  from  sin  and  guilt,  but  it 
also  means  deliverance  from  “human-caused  states  and  circumstances  of 
oppression.”1  Not  surprisingly,  the  Exodus  story  has  been  central  in  Black 

' Olin  P.  Moyd,  Redemption  in  Black  Theology  (Valley  Forge,  Pa.:  fudson  Press,  1979),  p. 


7- 


AFRICAN-AMERICAN  HERITAGE 


259 

liberation  theology,  both  because  it  demonstrates  that  God  is  a God  who  is 
concerned  to  liberate  persons  from  human  bondage  and  oppression,  and  be- 
cause it  is  clear  that  God  intended  that  the  covenant  community  was  freed 
for  community  with  one  another  and  with  their  redeemer.2  African-Amer- 
icans have  insisted  that  salvation  and  redemption  include  liberation  from  all 
forms  of  human  domination — whether  based  on  race,  national  origin,  class, 
or  sex.  Domination  designates  the  right  of  some  groups  to  control,  subor- 
dinate, and  exclude  certain  persons  or  groups  in  society  because  they  are 
members  of  certain  groups. 3 Elizabeth  Carroll  reminds  us  that  domination 
not  only  circumscribes  human  freedom,  but  it  distorts  truth  itself: 

Domination  . . . imposes  an  ideology  which  divides  people  and  their 
activities  into  the  important  and  the  negligible,  the  recorded  and  the 
absentees  of  history.  It  judges  persons  not  in  terms  of  their  contribu- 
tions to  the  well-being  of  society  but  in  terms  of  that  set  mind  which 
has  already  categorized  them  as  “in”  or  “outside  of’  the  pale  of  the 
dominant.  In  these  ways,  domination  distorts  truth.4 

The  conviction  that  human  liberation  comprises  an  integral  component  of 
God’s  purposes  for  humankind  remains  a fundamental  tenet  of  African- 
American  theological  and  ethical  discourse. 

Within  the  matrix  of  African-American  history  and  culture  experiences 
of  unmerited  suffering  and  marginality  as  a whole  people  at  the  hands  of 
fellow  human  beings — many  of  whom  confess  faith  in  the  Christian 
God,5 — has  through  the  centuries  precipitated  a prophetic  appeal  for  a so- 
cietal and  ecclesial  agenda  which  refuses  to  accept  as  normative  any  form  of 
oppression.  The  African-American  religious  heritage  proffers  a powerful 
witness  about  the  complex  realities  of  social  sin  and  the  contradictions  in 
human  existence. 

Let  us  consider,  then,  in  closer  detail,  three  aspects  of  the  richness  of  the 
African-American  religious  heritage.  We  will,  first,  take  a “retrospective” 
glance  at  the  force  of  its  witness  with  respect  to  the  past;  second,  survey  the 
ways  in  which  the  continuing  legacy  of  this  heritage  speaks  to  us  with  ur- 
gency in  the  present;  and  third,  examine  those  dimensions  of  the  heritage 
which  inspire  hope  and  herald  promise  for  our  corporate  future. 

2 Ibid. 

3 Elizabeth  Carroll,  “Can  Male  Domination  be  Overcome?”  Women  in  a Men's  Church. 
Concilium.  Ed.  Virgil  Elizondo  and  Norbert  Greinacher  (New  York:  Seabury  Press,  1980), 
p.  43. 

4 Ibid.,  p.  46. 

5 James  Deotis  Roberts,  Blacky  Theology  Today:  Liberation  and  Contextualization . Toronto 
Studies  in  Theology,  vol.  12  (New  York  and  Toronto:  Edwin  Mellen  Press,  1983),  p.  115. 


260 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


A Retrospective  Glance:  “The  Good  Old  Days” 

A major  contribution  of  the  African-American  Christian  heritage — in  all 
of  its  diverse  denominational  and  institutional  forms  and  expressions — is 
that  it  has  compelled  us  to  “unmask”  the  veils  of  “pseudoinnocence”6  in  our 
national  and  ecclesiastical  life.  The  Black  South  African  theologian  Allan 
Aubrey  Boesak,  President  of  the  World  Alliance  of  Reformed  Churches, 
has  described  “pseudoinnocence”  as  the  result  of  capitalizing  on  an  idealized 
fixation  on  the  past  or  the  present.  When  human  beings  face  issues  too  hor- 
rible to  contemplate,  they  often  close  their  eyes  to  reality  and  make  a virtue 
of  describing  human  existence  in  primarily  idealistic  terms.  The  realities  of 
human  pain,  injustice,  and  marginality  are  often  minimalized  or  ignored. 
“Pseudoinnocence"  thus  fosters  a “blindness”  or  “paralysis,”  and  dulls  one’s 
awareness  of  a sense  of  responsibility  necessary  to  encounter  the  “other”  as 
a true  human  being.7  Consequently,  “pseudoinnocence”  makes  authentic 
reconciliation  impossible  in  human  social  relationships. 

The  decade  of  the  1980s  in  particular  have  been  a time  of  unremitting 
nostalgia — perhaps  best  summed  up  in  the  oft-heard  phrase:  “Ah,  remem- 
ber the  good  old  days!”  And  yet,  we  must  ask, for  whom  were  “the  good  old 
days”  good? 

Dr.  Otto  L.  Bettmann,  founder  of  the  famed  Bettmann  Archive  in  New 
York  City  (one  of  the  world’s  greatest  picture  libraries),  has  written  a book 
entitled:  The  Good  Old  Days — They  Were  Terrible /8  Bettmann  observes  that 
the  “good  old  days,”  especially  the  period  from  the  end  of  the  Civil  War 
through  the  early  1900s,  are  often  characterized  as  a “benevolent”  period, 
replete  with  images  of  a carefree  America,  full  of  gaiety  and  charm.  But  in 
reality,  the  “good  old  days”  were  “good”  for  a privileged  few  only.  For  the 
farmer,  the  laborer,  most  women  and  children,  and  for  the  “average  bread- 
winner,” life  was  an  unremitting  hardship.  This  segment  of  the  population 
often  experienced  widespread  turmoil,  suffering,  and  neglect.9 

What  is  so  often  forgotten  and  neglected  in  portrayals  of  the  “good  old 
days”  is  the  hunger  of  the  unemployed,  crime,  corruption,  the  despair  of  the 
aged,  the  inadequate  facilities  for  housing  and  assisting  the  mentally  ill. 
What  is  so  often  forgotten  is  the  reality  of  over-crowded  tenements  in  many 

6 Allan  Aubrey  Boesak,  Farewell  to  Innocence : A Socio-Ethical  Study  on  Blacky  Theology  and 
Power  (Maryknoll,  N.Y.:  Orbis  Press,  1977),  p.  3. 

7 Ibid.,  p.  4 

8 Otto  L.  Bettmann,  The  Good  Old  Days — They  Were  Tetnble!  (New  York:  Random 
House,  1974). 

9 Ibid.,  p.  xi. 


AFRICAN-AMERICAN  HERITAGE 


261 

of  the  cities,  the  meager  wages  earned  by  the  masses,  the  lack  of  health  and 
social  benefits,  and  the  often  wretched  working  conditions  for  the  old  and 
young  alike. 

Contemporary  television  sponsors  selling  cereal  or  other  agrarian  prod- 
ucts like  to  portray  images  of  the  family  farm  and  country  life  in  the  post- 
Civil  War  era  in  somewhat  idealistic  terms.  There  is,  for  example,  the  image 
of  family  farm  life,  with  the  sprawling  farm  surrounded  by  a neat  stone 
wall.  In  the  interior  of  the  home  one  sees  neat  wooden  buckets,  fairly  nu- 
merous and  ornate  household  furnishings,  and  the  buxom  Betty-Crocker- 
like  women,  complete  with  red  and  white  checkered  aprons  and  plump, 
cherubic  faces  in  sun-filled  kitchens.  But  with  the  possible  exception  of  the 
gentry,  history  generally  offers  a different  picture. 

The  wife  kept  the  household  without  benefit  of  Westinghouse  washing 
machine  or  dishwasher.  Nothing  less  than  real  stamina  and  fortitude  were 
required  to  perform  such  “routine”  household  tasks  as  making  soap  to 
handwash  the  mountains  of  clothing.  The  country  wife  had  to  be  more  than 
a “genteel”  soul  to  cope  with  the  tasks  of  cutting  and  carrying  firewood  for 
cooking,  and  for  lugging  hot  kettles  of  hot  water  from  one  room  to  another 
as  needed.10 

Likewise,  the  idea  of  the  horse  and  buggy  days  produces  strong  nostalgia. 
But  Bettmann  notes  that  in  1900  the  15,000  horses  of  Rochester,  New  York, 
produced  enough  manure  to  cover  an  acre  of  ground  with  a layer  175  feet 
high,  leading  more  pessimistic  observers  to  fear  that  “American  cities  would 
disappear  like  Pompeii — but  not  under  ashes.”11  The  timely  appearance  of 
the  horseless  carriage  was  doubtless  a welcome  relief  for  hundreds  of  “san- 
itation workers”  who  walked  about  regularly  with  large  street  sweepers  in 
an  effort  to  keep  the  streets  cleared. 

In  short,  Bettmann  has  “demythologized”  or  “unmasked”  the  idealized 
pictures  of  our  early  American  past,  challenging  the  tendencies  toward  a 
“pseudoinnocent”  approach  to  the  “good  old  days.” 

The  African-American  church,  born  in  the  crucible  of  racial  oppression 
and  segregation,  has  over  the  centuries  sought  to  “unmask”  the  misrepre- 
sentations of  African-American  peoples  in  the  annals  of  history.  Its  mem- 
bers have  been  at  the  forefront  of  scholarly  efforts  to  remove  African-Amer- 
ican female  and  male  pioneers,  inventors,  scientists,  historians,  and 
numerous  other  unheralded  leaders  whose  names  may  never  be  known, 
from  the  “silences”  and  margins  of  American  history.  The  African- Ameri- 

IO  Ibid.,  pp.  48-49. 

" Ibid.,  p.  3. 


262 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


can  church  has  always  questioned  Presidential  pronouncements  which  de- 
clare that  the  nation  is  in  “the  throes  of  a strong  economic  recovery”  such 
that  the  masses  of  Americans  are  “better  off  today  than  they  were  some 
years  ago.”  African-American  religious  communities,  with  many  other  re- 
ligious communities  remind  us — in  the  face  of  such  idealizations  about  the 
socio-economic  status  of  so  many  Americans — that  the  growing  ranks  of 
the  millions  who  remain  “invisible”  below  the  large,  gaping  holes  of  the 
“safety  net”  represent  a morally  unacceptable  state  of  affairs  in  our  great 
nation.  “Witnesses”  in  the  African-American  religious  tradition  have  re- 
fused to  allow  this  nation — precious  to  them  also — to  be  “lulled”  into  a 
“pseudoinnocence”  which  assumes  that  an  inequitable  status  quo  is  morally 
acceptable.  They  have  insisted  on  becoming  co-laborers  with  the  God  who 
frees  all  persons  in  Jesus  Christ,  and  who  seeks  to  uproot  all  systems  of 
suffering  and  bondage.  Ours  is  a legacy  which  values  an  America  which  can 
truly  live  up  to  the  best  and  noblest  of  its  ideals. 

A Call  to  Responsible  Stewardship  of  Human  Resources  in  the  Present 

If  the  African-American  religious  heritage  is  one  which  eschews  a ren- 
dering of  the  past  shrouded  in  “pseudoinnocence,”  it  also  challenges  us  in 
the  present  to  render  a more  effective  and  just  stewardship  of  our  human 
resources  to  God. 

In  his  book,  One  Generation  After , the  noted  Nobel  Peace  Prize  winner 
Elie  Wiesel  tells  a story  which  speaks  forcefully  of  the  importance  of  the 
character  of  the  human  person  as  a resource  available  to  God  to  achieve 
God’s  purposes  in  the  world.  Describing  what  he  calls  “Just  Men”  who  trav- 
eled about  proclaiming  the  need  for  spiritual  and  moral  repentance,  Wiesel 
observes: 

One  of  the  Just  Men  came  to  Sodom,  determined  to  save  its  inhabi- 
tants from  sin  and  punishment.  Night  and  day  he  walked  the  streets 
and  markets  protesting  against  greed  and  theft,  falsehood  and  indiffer- 
ence. In  the  beginning,  people  listened  and  smiled  ironically.  Then 
they  stopped  listening:  he  no  longer  even  amused  them.  The  killers 
went  on  killing,  the  wise  kept  silent,  as  if  there  were  no  Just  Man  in 
their  midst. 

One  day  a child,  moved  by  compassion  for  the  unfortunate  preacher, 
approached  him  with  these  words:  “Poor  stranger,  you  shout,  you  ex- 
pend yourself  body  and  soul;  don’t  you  see  that  it  is  hopeless?  " 

“Yes,  I see,”  answered  the  Just  Man. 


AFRICAN-AMERICAN  HERITAGE 


263 


“Then  why  do  you  go  on?” 

“I’ll  tell  you  why.  In  the  beginning,  I thought  I could  change  man. 
Today,  I know  I cannot.  If  I still  shout  today,  if  I still  scream,  it  is  to 
prevent  man  from  ultimately  changing  me.”12 

The  Just  Man  was  as  concerned  about  the  quality  of  his  own  life  as  a 
moral  resource  to  God  as  he  was  to  herald  the  call  for  personal  and  social 
transformation  in  a world  which  cried  out  for  such  transformation.  The  Just 
Man  refused  to  join  the  great  “fellowship  of  conformists”  who  in  every  age 
have  abandoned  the  quest  to  make  justice  in  the  personal  and  social  spheres 
more  than  a time-worn  cliche.  Concerned  for  the  character  of  human  per- 
sons as  stewards  of  God’s  purposes  in  creation,  he  accepted  the  loneliness 
and  the  ignominy  which  such  a prophetic  witness  often  invites. 

African-Americans  are  acutely  aware  of  the  high  costs  of  the  poor  stew- 
ardship of  human  resources  in  our  national  life.  Dr.  C.  Eric  Lincoln,  Pro- 
fessor of  Religion  and  Culture  at  Duke  University,  reminds  us  that  our 
racial  madness  has  exacted  an  enormous  toll  of  the  American  potential  in 
the  form  of:  “poverty,  ignorance,  race  hatred,  self-hatred,  high  mortality, 
low  morality,  insecurity,  ethical  compromise,  and  selective  exclusion  of  the 
ordinary  common  values  we  all  helped  to  create.”  Lincoln’s  description  of 
the  loss  is  jarring: 

We  shall  never  know  what  potential  genius,  black  and  white,  has 
been  sacrificed  to  the  racial  Moloch  which  designated  some  of  us  as 
keepers  and  others  to  be  kept.  But  the  possibilities  stagger  the  imagi- 
nation. What  great  music  was  never  written;  what  miracles  of  medi- 
cine remain  undiscovered;  what  strategies  for  peace  and  understanding 
among  the  nations  of  the  world  have  never  been  developed  because  we 
have  been  preoccupied  with  building  fences  and  closing  the  doors 
which  eliminate  the  kept  and  enervate  the  keepers,  to  the  inconve- 
nience of  everybody,  and  to  the  impairment  of  our  common  capacity 
to  get  on  with  the  Dream  we  once  dared  to  believe  in?'3 

Lincoln  correctly  concludes  that  the  toll  of  rrcial  exclusion — and  the  dan- 
ger of  trying  to  suppress  a whole  race  of  people  for  so  long — is  extraordinary 
in  cost  of  dollars.  But  there  is  a loss  that  surpasses  even  the  waste  of  human 
potential  and  the  tremendous  economic  expenditures:  “. . . the  greater  tragedy 

12  Elie  Wiesel,  One  Generation  After  (New  York:  Random  House,  1970),  p.  72. 

13  C.  Eric  Lincoln,  Race,  Religion,  and  the  Continuing  American  Dilemma  (New  York:  Hill 
and  Wang,  1984),  p.  20. 


264 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


is  the  wasted  witness  we  might  have  paid  to  the  majesty  of  God  and  to  the  possi- 
bilities we  hold  for  a more  perfect  rendering  of  his  image.”'* 

African-American  religious  communities  continue  to  speak  to  us  with 
great  urgency  today  about  the  need  to  render  a more  just  and  faithful  ac- 
counting ot  all  of  our  human  resources,  including  females  and  males,  black 
and  white,  and  all  persons  represented  among  us  as  a nation.  And  so  those 
familiar  words  of  the  eighth-century  prophet  Micah,  so  often  cited  by  Afri- 
can-American foremothers  and  forefathers  in  the  past,  remains  a potent  re- 
minder of  our  corporate  mandate: 

He  has  showed  you,  O man,  what  is  good; 

and  what  does  the  Lord  require  of  you 

but  to  do  justice,  and  to  love  kindness, 

and  to  walk  humbly  with  your  God?  (Micah  6:8) 

A Future  of  Partnership  and  Hope 

Finally,  if  the  witness  and  promise  of  the  African-American  religious 
tradition  lies  in  its  retrospective  uncovering  of  veils  of  “pseudoinnocence” 
in  portrayals  of  our  national  life  and  history  in  the  past,  and  if  it  continually 
challenges  us  with  urgency  in  the  present  to  render  a more  faithful  steward- 
ship of  our  human  resources  before  God,  it  ever  beckons  us  forward  into  a 
future  of  partnership  where  the  vision  of  God’s  kingdom  is  made  real. 

Our  brother,  the  Reverend  Dr.  Martin  Luther  King,  Jr.,  reminded  us  that 
among  the  more  important  moral  imperatives  of  the  twentieth  century  is 
the  need  to  recognize  and  reaffirm  the  constructive  possibilities  of  our  na- 
tional and  global  interdependence.  In  one  of  his  books  he  describes  the  in- 
dissoluble and  synergistic  character  of  our  interdependence  in  strikingly 
pragmatic  terms: 

All  men  [sic]  are  interdependent.  Every  nation  is  an  heir  of  a vast 
treasury  of  ideas  and  labor  to  which  both  the  living  and  the  dead  of  all 
nations  have  contributed.  Whether  we  realize  it  or  not,  each  of  us  lives 
eternally  “in  the  red.”  We  are  everlasting  debtors  to  known  and  un- 
known men  and  women.  When  we  arise  in  the  morning,  we  go  into 
the  bathroom  where  we  reach  for  a sponge  which  is  provided  for  us  by 
a Pacific  islander.  We  reach  for  soap  that  is  created  for  us  by  a Euro- 
pean. Then  at  the  table  we  drink  coffee  which  is  provided  for  us  by  a 
South  American,  or  tea  by  a Chinese  or  cocoa  by  a west  African.  Before 

14  Ibid.,  pp.  20-21. 


AFRICAN-AMERICAN  HERITAGE 


265 


we  leave  for  our  jobs  we  are  already  beholden  to  more  than  half  of  the 
world. 

In  a real  sense,  all  of  life  is  interrelated.  The  agony  of  the  poor  im- 
poverishes the  rich;  the  betterment  of  the  poor  enriches  the  rich.  We 
are  inevitably  our  brother’s  keeper  because  we  are  our  brother’s 
brother.  Whatever  affects  one  directly  affects  all  indirectly.15 

The  penultimate  note  of  African-American  faith  and  religious  dis- 
course— and  a characteristic  feature  of  its  legacy — is  the  note  of  hope.  Con- 
tinually drawing  upon  its  own  resources  to  survive,  and  struggling  ever  to 
excel,  African-American  Christians,  inspired  by  a conviction  that  a sover- 
eign God  will  continue  to  act  within  the  course  of  human  events  and  human 
history  to  achieve  God’s  divine  purposes  for  all  humankind,  stand  in  part- 
nership with  those  who  seek  to  live  as  members  of  God’s  new  creation.  The 
African-American  religious  heritage  in  all  of  its  complexity  and  richness 
reminds  us  that  we  are  all  charged  with  the  task  of  bridging  the  chasm 
between  what  we  claim  to  be  and  what  we  are.  We  are  all  called  to  bridge 
the  chasm  between  parochial,  monocultural  visions  of  community,  and 
more  inclusive  and  pluralistic  communities.  We  are  called  to  transform  the 
selective,  restrictive  use  of  power  to  benefit  the  few  to  a use  of  power  which 
will  serve  the  purposes  of  love  and  fulfill  justice,  and  so  lead  to  a fuller 
realization  of  the  highest  human  values  and  ideals — personal,  social,  and 
institutional. 

The  conversion  of  the  black  African  high  official  in  Acts  8:26-40,  whom 
Luke  calls  “the  Ethiopian  eunuch,”  underscores  a vision  of  racial  inclusivity 
and  pluralism  in  God’s  new  community.  In  Lukan  theology,  with  its  per- 
vasive emphasis  on  universalism  (the  availability  of  God’s  salvation  in  Jesus 
Christ  to  all  who  repent  and  confess  Jesus  as  Lord,  Lk.  4:16-30;  24:46-47; 
Acts  2:37-42;  10:34-43),  the  Ethiopian  official  becomes  a fitting  and  appro- 
priate symbol  for  demonstrating  that  from  the  very  beginning,  the  good 
news  of  God  was  meant  to  be  inclusive  of  all  persons  as  it  spread  throughout 
the  world.  St.  Augustine  so  interpreted  the  Ethiopian’s  significance  when 
he  said  of  him  that  under  the  name  of  “Ethiopians”  he  has  signified  the 
nations  of  the  whole  world.'6 

In  conclusion,  the  richness  of  the  African-American  religious  heritage 

15  Martin  Luther  King,  Jr.,  Where  Do  We  Go  From  Here:  Chaos  or  Community?  (Boston: 
Beacon  Press,  1967),  p.  181. 

,6  Cf.  Frank  M.  Snowden,  Blac\s  in  Antiquity:  Ethiopians  in  the  Greco-Roman  Experience 
(Cambridge:  The  Belknap  Press  of  Harvard  University  Press,  1970),  pp.  204,  334  n.  57;  Au- 
gustine, Enarationes  in  Psalmos  71.12  (Corpus  Christianorum,  Series  Latina  39.980). 


266 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


beckons  all  of  us  forward  with  a call  for  a renewed  commitment  to  authentic 
solidarity  with  one  another.  It  beckons  us  forward  to  a future  where  we 
cannot  speak  about  God’s  love  without  also  speaking  about  God’s  righ- 
teousness and  God’s  justice  made  concrete  in  the  relations  of  women  and 
men  with  one  another.  It  beckons  us  forward  into  a future  with  people  of 
faith  who  declare  by  their  praxis  (deeds,  actions)  that  love  always  creates 
room  for  justice  and  integrity  in  relation  to  others. 

I close  with  a prayer  by  the  noted  African-American  scholar  W.E.B. 
DuBois: 

O Lord,  teach  us  who  love  Liberty  and  long  for  it,  to  realize  its  cost 
and  purpose.  There  can  be  no  freedom  in  a just  and  good  world,  if 
freedom  means  to  do  as  we  please,  when  we  please,  and  where  all 
about  us  in  this  life  ...  lie  bars  and  bonds  and  limits.  The  free  are  those 
who  know  the  rules  which  God  Himself  has  set  and  go  their  way 
within  these  metes  and  bounds  full  freely.  Truth  is  the  knowledge  of 
these  strait  and  narrow  ways.  It  is  the  Truth  that  makes  us  free  and 
this  it  is  we  linger  here  to  learn,  O Lord.  Amen.17 

17  W.E.B.  DuBois,  Prayers  for  Darl^  Peoples , ed.  Herbert  Aptheker  (Amherst:  The  Univer- 
sity of  Massachusetts  Press,  1980),  p.  52. 


Christine  M.  Smith  is  Assistant  Professor  of 
Homiletics  at  Princeton  Seminary.  An  or- 
dained United  Methodist  minister  who  re- 
ceived her  Ph.D.  from  the  Graduate  The- 
ological Union  in  Berkeley,  California,  she 
has  served  as  pastor  of  churches  in  Wor- 
thington and  Columbus,  Ohio.  Her  first 
boo!{,  Weaving  the  Sermon:  Preaching 
in  a Feminist  Perspective,  was  published 
by  Westminster  Press  earlier  this  year. 

Texts:  Heb.  11:7-13 
Ps.  137 
Mt.  20:1-16 

There  are  voices  in  our  world  that  tell  us  the  church  is  dying.  Yet  today, 
we  gather  to  ask  ourselves  a bold  and  ancient  question:  “How  shall  we 
sing  God’s  song  in  a foreign  land?”  (Ps.  137:4). 

There  are  voices  in  our  world  that  tell  us  the  church  has  no  passion.  Yet 
today,  we  gather  to  remember  a strange  and  quieting  truth:  “These  all  died 
in  faith,  not  receiving  any  of  the  things  that  had  been  promised,  but  they 
saw  them  in  the  far  distance  and  welcomed  them,  recognizing  that  they 
were  only  strangers  and  nomads  on  earth”  (Heb.  11:13). 

There  are  voices  in  our  world  that  tell  us  the  church  lacks  vision.  Yet  on 
this  day,  we  gather  to  speak  a difficult  and  wondrous  claim:  “These  last 
worked  only  one  hour,  and  you  have  made  them  equal  to  us  who  have  borne 
the  burden  of  the  day  and  the  scorching  heat”  (Mt.  20:12). 

The  Christian  church  is  not  just  some  institution  to  be  analyzed  from 
afar,  or  a community  to  be  scrutinized  for  its  life  expectancy.  The  Christian 
church  is  you.  The  Christian  church  is  me.  The  Christian  church  is  us.  And 
our  presence  here  today,  with  all  the  vision,  all  the  passion,  all  the  life  we 
represent,  proclaims  to  all  the  world  that  the  church  as  the  expression  of  the 
faithful  people  of  God  will  never  ever  die. 

As  the  people  of  God,  the  tasks  before  us  in  this  life  are  joyfilled  and 
difficult;  they  are  terrifying  and  exhilarating.  The  commitments  you  em- 
body as  graduates  from  this  religious  institution  call  all  our  lives  into  ques- 
tion once  again. 

Not  only  are  the  tasks  difficult,  but  the  promises  are  questionable.  There 
will  be  waters  of  Babylon  where  we  will  sit  down  and  weep.  There  will  be 
floods  that  leave  us  working  to  save  a remnant  of  creation.  There  will  be 
experiences  of  birth  when  we  are  eighty.  And  there  will  be  days  when  we 
receive  one  denarius  no  matter  what  we  do. 


A Claim  Beyond 
Imagining 

by  Christine  M.  Smith 


268 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


This  community  gathers  today  to  remember  and  proclaim  that  these  are 
strange  and  wonderful  promises,  and  we  throw  our  arms  and  our  lives 
around  them  because  deep  within  our  souls,  deep  within  our  spirits,  we  have 
been  claimed  by  a God,  and  we  claim  a God,  whose  promises  we  cannot 
fathom,  whose  love  we  cannot  comprehend,  whose  grace  is  beyond  all  our 
imagining. 

Amazing  grace  it  is!  It  saves.  It  teaches  us  to  fear.  It  secures  our  hope.  It 
brings  us  home. 

The  grace  of  God  is  an  awesome  thing.  It  is  only  by  the  Spirit’s  help  that 
we  can  proclaim  it.  It  is  only  by  inspired  courage  that  we  can  live  it.  And  as 
we  seek  to  live  it,  the  claim  of  God’s  grace  becomes  more  mysterious  in  its 
power,  more  transforming  in  its  breadth,  more  compelling  in  its  depth. 

“Come  Thou  Fount  of  every  blessing,  tune  our  hearts  to  sing  thy  grace.” 

With  our  ancestors  in  the  faith,  there  is  a part  of  us  that  accepts  with 
some  ease  the  call  to  sing  God’s  song  in  the  foreign  and  alien  places  of  our 
world,  even  though  places  of  marginality  are  often  painful  and  lonely. 

With  our  ancestors  in  the  faith,  there  is  a part  of  us  that  accepts  with 
some  assurance  the  call  to  work  for  that  which  we  will  never  see  come  to 
fruition,  even  though  investment  in  a future  one  will  never  see  often  leaves 
us  outraged  and  sad. 

And  similarly  in  the  spirit  of  our  ancestors,  there  is  a part  in  most  of  us 
that  does  not  accept  with  any  ease  or  comfort  a world  where  the  third-hour 
and  eleventh-hour  workers  are  equal  in  worth  and  pay.  This  is  a claim  upon 
us  that  offends  and  confuses,  hurts  and  shatters.  This  picture  of  grace  we 
want  to  deny,  resist,  reduce. 

Picture  with  me  the  scene.  There  is  a householder  who  hires  workers  for 
work  in  the  vineyard.  Workers  are  gathered  when  the  sun  rises,  at  the  third 
hour,  the  sixth  hour,  the  ninth  hour,  and  the  eleventh  hour.  There  is  hard, 
blistering  work  to  be  done.  Some  have  labored  in  the  scorching  heat  for 
eleven  hours,  some  for  one.  The  day  of  work  ends  and  all  are  gathered 
together.  The  wages  are  to  be  paid,  and  there  is  quiet  anticipation  in  the  air. 
The  steward  slowly  and  deliberately  hands  each  and  every  worker  one  de- 
narius. And  Jesus  says:  this  is  what  the  reign  of  God  looks  like. 

In  1986,  a movie  entitled  The  Mission  was  released.  Since  that  time,  many 
of  us  in  the  church  have  experienced  its  powerful  story.  As  with  all  great 
movies,  its  themes  and  issues  are  complex  and  multifaceted.  It  is  about  the 
killing  and  enslavement  of  an  indigenous  South  American  tribe  by  the  em- 
pires of  Spain  and  Portugal.  It  is  about  the  work  and  life  of  Jesuit  priests  in 
the  missions  of  South  America  in  the  mid-eighteenth  century.  It  is  about 


CLAIM  BEYOND  IMAGINING  269 

Father  Gabriel  and  his  passionate  call.  It  is  about  Rodrigo  Mendosa,  a slaver, 
a mercenary,  a murderer,  and  his  redemption. 

Rodrigo  has  been  the  leader  of  those  who  have  been  in  the  land  of  the 
Guarani  in  order  to  capture  and  enslave  them.  He  is  ruthless  and  without 
mercy  in  his  greed.  His  life  has  been  full  of  violence,  and  at  one  point  in  the 
story  we  see  him  murder  his  own  brother. 

Father  Gabriel  challenges  Rodrigo  to  reclaim  his  life  by  choosing  his  pen- 
ance. Rodrigo  chooses  to  join  the  priests  in  their  journey  back  to  the  village 
of  the  Guarani,  a journey  that  takes  them  up  the  falls  to  the  top  of  an  enor- 
mous mountain.  Rodrigo  makes  this  journey  dragging  a net  filled  with  ar- 
mor and  swords  and  metal,  a load  that  makes  his  struggle  to  climb  inhu- 
mane and  treacherous.  At  one  point  in  the  journey  one  of  the  priests  can 
bear  it  no  longer,  and  cuts  him  free.  Rodrigo  climbs  to  the  bottom,  attaches 
the  rope  and  load  to  his  body,  and  begins  the  climb  again. 

At  another  stop  along  the  way  the  same  priest  tells  Father  Gabriel:  “We 
all  think  he  has  carried  the  load  long  enough.”  Father  Gabriel  says:  “But  he 
doesn’t  think  so  John,  and  until  he  does,  neither  do  I.” 

When  they  reach  the  top,  the  tribe  welcomes  back  the  priests  with 
warmth  and  joy.  Then  they  spot  Rodrigo  and  instantly  recognize  him  as  the 
same  man  who  has  been  their  captor.  There  is  a moment  of  wonder  and 
silence,  until  one  of  the  Guarani  men  finally  picks  up  a knife,  runs  to  Rod- 
rigo, lifts  his  chin  as  if  to  take  his  life,  and  cuts  the  rope  of  his  burden  and 
throws  it  over  the  mountain  side.  And  there,  surrounded  by  those  he  sought 
to  enslave,  he  begins  to  sob.  It  is  the  sob  of  release.  It  is  the  sob  of  new  life. 
It  is  the  sob  of  grace.  This  is  indeed  what  the  reign  of  God  looks  like! 

Here  is  a grace  that  allows  the  one  oppressed  to  become  the  liberator  of 
the  one  who  would  enslave.  Our  rational  minds  tell  us  that  the  slaying  of 
the  oppressor  would  be  fair,  would  be  justified.  We  know  the  grumblings 
of  the  first-hour  workers  oh  so  well.  “These  last  worked  only  one  hour,  and 
you  have  made  them  equal  to  us  who  have  borne  the  burden  of  the  day  and 
the  scorching  heat.”  This  unspeakable  grace  we  can  hardly  take  in,  hardly 
receive,  hardly  celebrate.  Instead  of  welcoming  the  magnitude  of  this  gra- 
ciousness, it  offends  our  sensibilities,  for  it  demands  too  much. 

Yet  in  the  midst  of  our  grumblings,  our  faithful  hearts  sing  with  hope 
when  a knife  of  death  becomes  a knife  of  forgiveness  and  liberation.  Here 
is  grace  we  long  to  taste,  we  need  to  know  and  feel,  we  are  called  to  live. 
Here  is  a love  that  forever  changes  everything  it  touches.  We  know  it  is  a 
grace  too  seldom  known  and  experienced  in  our  world.  We  see  ourselves  so 
readily  as  the  workers  in  the  vineyard,  faithfully  doing  that  which  is  ex- 


270 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


pected  and  agreed  upon.  Is  it  not  a profoundly  different  call  to  become  a 
steward,  sharing  and  embodying  a free  and  unconditional  gift?  Are  you 
ready?  Am  I ready?  Are  we  ready,  to  claim  such  love,  such  grace,  and  be 
claimed  by  it? 

If  we  allow  ourselves  to  claim  and  be  claimed  by  such  grace,  it  will  for- 
ever leave  us  shocked  and  confused.  It  will  turn  our  world  upside  down,  it 
will  transform  all  reality  as  we  have  known  it. 

A few  months  ago  a friend  shared  a story  with  me  of  a woman  she  knows 
whose  world  was  forever  turned,  forever  changed,  by  a moment’s  encounter 
with  a stranger. 

Kay  was  walking  the  streets  of  New  York  with  lunch  in  hand  when  she 
passed  a woman  rummaging  in  the  trash  can  on  the  corner.  She  paused  and 
asked  the  woman,  “Would  you  like  my  lunch?”  The  woman  said,  “No 
thank  you,  I’ve  already  eaten.”  Kay  began  to  walk  on,  turned  for  a moment 
to  look  at  the  woman  once  more,  when  the  woman  looked  her  straight  in 
the  eye  and  said,  “Do  you  need  me  to  eat  your  lunch?”  and  Kay  paused, 
and  said  “yes.” 

Who  can  say  who  are  the  bearers  of  grace  in  this  world?  Who  can  speak 
fully  of  the  sheer  mystery  in  a loving  act? 

The  one  we  would  enslave  becomes  our  liberator.  The  one  we  would  give 
to  becomes  our  teacher  and  pastor,  and  nothing  is  ever  the  same  again. 

Amazing  grace  it  is!  It  saves.  It  teaches  us  to  fear.  It  secures  our  hope.  It 
brings  us  home. 

The  claim  this  grace  makes  upon  us  is  great.  It  says  that  life  is  not  pre- 
dictable, secure,  or  orderly.  Neither  is  life  preferential,  fair,  or  comfortable. 

When  the  steward  gave  one  denarius  to  each  and  every  worker,  some 
were  outraged,  some  were  amazed,  some  were  ecstatic,  all  were  changed ! 

How  shall  we  sing  this  grace  in  foreign  and  strange  lands;  in  the  midst 
of  work  that  never  will  be  finished;  in  the  moments  of  life  where  order 
becomes  liberating  chaos,  and  stability  becomes  shifting  ground? 

We  would  surely  hope  on  this  day,  as  you  are  about  to  leave  this  place, 
that  whatever  else  this  time  in  seminary  has  been  for  you,  it  has  been  a time 
to  learn  how  to  see  and  discern,  name  and  proclaim  God’s  grace.  We  hope 
it  has  been  a time  when  you  have  tuned  your  heart  and  your  spirit  to  receive 
and  to  be  the  steward  of  this  wondrous  love. 

Have  you  learned  how  to  stand  and  watch  a mother  wave  good-bye  to 
her  children  on  a cold  winter’s  day;  yelling  across  a field  “Daniel,  do  you 
have  your  second  pair  of  socks?”  and  saying  that  final  “I  love  you"  as  they 


CLAIM  BEYOND  IMAGINING 


271 

board  the  bus?  Have  you  learned  to  quietly  stand  in  that  moment;  to  won- 
der, to  know,  to  celebrate,  the  sustaining  power  of  grace? 

Have  you  learned  to  walk  the  streets  of  New  York,  watching  for  the 
strength  of  the  homeless  as  they  engage  the  eyes  of  the  comfortable,  or  lis- 
tening to  the  vulnerability  of  the  hungry  who  constantly  ask  for  help?  Have 
you  learned  to  quietly  stand  in  that  moment;  to  be  shocked,  to  feel  exposed, 
to  be  haunted  by  the  transforming  power  of  grace? 

Have  you  learned  to  feel  the  pain  and  torment  of  the  human  heart,  your 
own  and  others?  Have  you  learned  to  watch  for  the  despair  of  broken 
dreams,  the  ache  of  shattered  promises,  the  shame  of  betrayal  and  abuse? 
Have  you  learned  to  quietly  stand  in  that  moment;  to  listen,  to  weep,  to 
embrace  the  releasing  power  of  grace? 

If  you  have  learned  to  do  these  things,  you  have  been  claimed  by  a grace 
that  has  changed  you,  and  can  change  the  world! 

The  parable  of  the  vineyard  workers  calls  us  to  be  those  who  usher  in  a 
reign  of  radical  grace-,  a grace  that  does  not  give  our  lives  security  but  roots 
them  in  hope;  does  not  give  us  exclusive  status  but  engenders  shared  hu- 
manity; does  not  momentarily  comfort  but  eternally  redeems. 

The  claim  of  this  grace,  the  grace  of  this  claim,  is  beyond  our  imagining! 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


Lee,  Sang  Hyun.  The  Philosophical  Theology  of  Jonathan  Edwards.  Princeton: 
Princeton  University  Press,  1988.  Pp.  248.  $35.00. 

In  recent  years  Jonathan  Edwards  scholarship  has  focused  less  upon  broad  inter- 
pretations and  assessments  of  the  contemporary  relevance  of  Edwards  and  more 
upon  the  historical  context  of  his  thought  and  his  distance  from  contemporary  con- 
cerns. In  this  context  claims  to  account  for  both  the  unity  of  Edwards’  thought  and 
its  contemporary  importance  are  bold  claims  indeed.  In  The  Philosophical  Theology 
of  Jonathan  Edwards  Sang  Hyun  Lee,  Professor  of  Theology  at  Princeton  Theolog- 
ical Seminary,  backs  up  these  claims  by  offering  one  of  the  two  or  three  most  im- 
portant works  on  Edwards  since  Perry  Miller’s  famous  1949  biography. 

Lee’s  study  focuses  upon  the  concept  of  habit  or  disposition  as  the  key  to  the 
nature  of  reality  for  Edwards.  He  shows  how  Edwards  retrieved  the  classical  and 
medieval  concept  of  habit  and  reworked  it  to  solve  dilemmas  posed  for  theologians 
and  philosophers  by  Locke,  Newton,  and  others.  Central  to  Lee’s  analysis  are  three 
features  of  habits  which  recur  in  all  the  themes  he  treats.  First,  habits  are  ontologi- 
cally  real  as  tendencies  toward  particular  actions  and  events,  and  are  actualized  but 
not  exhausted  in  those  actions  and  events.  Thus  reality  is  both  permanent  and  a 
dynamic  movement  from  real  (not  simply  logical)  possibility  to  actuality.  Second, 
habits  are  relational.  They  are  patterns  or  laws  which  determine  that  events  and 
actions  will  be  realized  in  relation  to  other  occasions  as  conditions  for  their  actual- 
ization. Third,  since  they  are  exercised  in  ever  new  relational  occasions,  actualiza- 
tions of  habits  in  history  or  in  human  life  involve  an  increase  or  expansion  of  reality, 
and  are  not  merely  instances  of  timeless  forms.  Thus  human  life  and  history  possess 
genuine  meaning. 

Using  habit  as  a clue,  Lee  examines  Edwards’  notions  of  being,  the  imagination 
and  God.  In  regard  to  being,  Lee  analyzes  Edwards’  attempts  to  affirm  both  the 
permanence  and  the  dynamism  of  reality  and  to  show  how  the  world  maintains  its 
own  integrity  while  depending  radically  upon  a sovereign  God.  Though  established 
by  God,  habits  as  laws  possess  a degree  of  independence  from  God,  yet  they  depend 
for  their  actualization  upon  God  supplying  the  occasions  in  relation  to  which  they 
issue  forth  in  events  or  actions.  In  an  insight  that  deserves  further  theological  atten- 
tion, Lee  shows  how  the  relationality  of  habits  as  laws  enabled  Edwards  to  over- 
come the  disjunction  between  teleology  and  mechanism  by  explaining  causation  in 
terms  of  what  is  required  by  the  mutual  fittingness  of  relations. 

Students  of  Edwards  are  familiar  with  his  thesis  that  reality  becomes  actual  in 
the  form  of  ideas  known  and  loved  by  finite  minds.  Lee  is  the  first  to  connect  this 
theme  with  the  imagination.  According  to  Lee  the  imagination  for  Edwards  me- 
diates between  the  mind’s  creative  shaping  capacity  and  its  reception  of  ideas  of 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


273 

sensation.  As  a habit  it  orders  sense  ideas  into  meaningful  relations  and  thereby 
brings  to  actuality  the  habits  or  tendencies  inherent  within  the  ideas  themselves. 
The  divinely  given  habit  of  grace  enables  the  regenerate  mind  to  place  ideas  in  their 
ultimate  context,  namely  their  relation  to  the  beauty  of  God  as  disclosed  in  Christ. 
Known  and  loved  in  this  wider  context,  both  entities  and  the  minds  which  know 
and  love  them  become  fully  actual. 

Lee  points  the  way  out  of  a current  debate  among  Edwards  scholars  over 
whether  Edwards  is  an  empiricist  or  a rationalist.  As  habit,  the  imagination  is  a 
priori  and  shapes  reality,  but  it  depends  upon  ideas  of  sensation  for  actualization. 
Lee  also  lays  the  groundwork  for  a comparison  of  Edwards  with  current  theological 
construals  of  the  imagination. 

Lee’s  boldest  move  is  his  attempt  to  analyze  Edwards’  doctrine  of  God  in  terms 
of  the  centrality  of  habit.  According  to  Lee,  Edwards  viewed  God  as  perfectly  ac- 
tualized yet  with  a habit  or  disposition  to  repeat  this  actuality  ad  extra  in  space  and 
time.  God  therefore  creates  the  occasions  (creatures)  in  whose  knowing  and  loving 
the  repetition  of  the  divine  fullness  becomes  actual. 

Although  Lee’s  attempt  to  understand  the  immanent  Trinity  in  terms  of  habit 
and  actualization  requires  major  qualifications  of  previous  definitions,  his  under- 
standing of  creation  and  redemption  as  the  actualization  in  space  and  time  of  God’s 
disposition  to  repeat  the  divine  fullness  is  brilliant  and  suggestive.  It  advances  be- 
yond tired  disputes  over  whether  Edwards  was  a Neoplatonist  emanationist  or  a 
traditional  Calvinist  and,  as  promised,  provides  an  alternative  to  classical  theism 
and  process  theology.  Again  Lee’s  work  invites  Edwards’  into  current  conversations 
concerning  the  relation  of  being  and  becoming  in  God  and  God’s  relation  to  the 
world. 

Historians  may  quarrel  with  Lee’s  tendencies  to  downplay  Edwards’  dualistic 
distinctions  between  natural  and  supernatural  and  matter  and  spirit  and  with  his 
assumptions  about  Edwards’  debt  to  Locke  and  Newton.  Nevertheless  Lee’s  project 
is  an  overwhelming  success.  The  concept  of  habit  links  together  each  of  the  themes 
Lee  treats  with  remarkable  consistency.  Problems  often  found  in  Edwards — for 
example,  tensions  between  divine  sovereignty  and  the  integrity  of  creation,  ratio- 
nalism and  empiricism,  Neoplatonism  and  Calvinism — are  surprisingly  clarified 
when  Lee  views  them  under  the  lens  of  habit.  Moreover,  in  addition  to  providing 
an  alternative  to  classical  theism  and  process  theology,  Lee’s  Edwards  is  a rich  re- 
source for  contemporary  theological  reflection  on  the  imagination,  the  relationality 
of  reality,  and  the  theological  meaning  of  history. 

The  clarity  and  consistency  of  this  book  makes  some  of  the  most  difficult  features 
of  Edwards’  thought  accessible  to  the  non-specialist  while  its  rare  union  of  depth 
and  breadth  and  its  sensitivity  to  current  debates  make  it  necessary  for  any  serious 
student  of  Edwards  and  valuable  for  anyone  concerned  with  theological  reconstruc- 


274  THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 

tion.  We  are  greatly  indebted  to  Sang  Hyun  Lee  and  look  forward  to  more  from 
his  pen. 

Gerald  P.  McKenny 
Rice  University 

Capps,  Donald.  Deadly  Sins  and  Saving  Virtues.  Philadelphia:  Fortress,  1987.  Pp. 
162.  $9.95. 

Donald  Capps,  the  William  Harte  Felmeth  Professor  of  Pastoral  Theology  at 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary,  does  not  come  to  this  study  unprepared.  Two  of 
his  earlier  books,  Life  Cycle  Theory  and  Pastoral  Care  and  Pastoral  Care  and  Herme- 
neutics, explore  issues  central  to  this  latest  study:  viz.,  the  importance  of  taking  a 
developmentalist  approach  to  the  moral  life,  and  the  ways  in  which  the  Bible  re- 
mains a “powerful  ally”  for  the  pastoral  task  as  well  is  for  the  ethical  formation  and 
discernment  of  communities  of  faith. 

This  latest  study  is  divided  into  three  sections.  The  first  part  of  the  book  focuses 
on  “The  Deadly  Sins,”  which  Capps  believes  are  “still  relevant  for  us  today.”  Capps 
begins  with  an  explication  of  the  traditional  list  of  seven:  pride,  envy,  anger,  sloth, 
greed,  gluttony,  and  lust.  For  several  reasons,  Capps  reinstates  “melancholy”  to  the 
traditional  list,  thereby  bringing  the  total  to  eight.  Unlike  some  treatments  of  these 
sins,  Capps  is  less  interested  in  the  specific  behaviors  with  which  they  have  come  to 
be  associated,  and  more  interested  in  them  as  they  point  to  dispositions  which  are  a 
part  of  selfhood.  Indeed,  one  of  the  great  merits  of  Capps’  analysis  is  the  way  in 
which  he  keeps  the  social  character  of  the  “deadly  sins”  in  focus  while  also  main- 
taining that  these  dispositions  or  attitudes  are  “dynamically  rooted  in  the  personal- 
ity” of  individuals. 

The  second  section  of  Capps’  study  focuses  on  “The  Saving  Virtues.”  If  the  first 
section  of  the  book  focuses  on  a “diagnosis  of  the  problem,”  this  section  turns  to 
those  resources  within  which  “a  cure  may  be  found.”  Capps  correlates  the  deadly 
sins  with  a list  of  virtues  which  he  adapts  from  Erik  Erikson’s  life  cycle  theory  with 
its  eight  stages:  infancy,  early  childhood,  play  age,  school  age,  adolescence,  young 
adulthood,  adulthood,  and  mature  adulthood.  Each  of  these  stages  involves  a work- 
ing through  of  “a  crisis  that  is  crucial  for  our  continued  development.” 

Thus,  Capps  attempts  to  correlate  the  “saving  virtues”  of  hope,  will,  purpose,  com- 
petence, fidelity,  love,  care,  and  wisdom  with  the  integration  ot  the  self  at  each  stage 
of  the  life  cycle.  Here  Capps  diverges  from  the  traditional  classification  within 
which  the  vices  and  virtues  had  been  correlated  in  classical  Christianity.  Unlike 
Chaucer’s  list  of  virtues,  which  appears  to  be  focused  on  th t avoidance  of  sin  through 
self-control  or  denial,  Capps  prefers  to  discuss  the  virtues  “in  more  active  terms.” 
Therefore,  he  adopts  Erikson’s  understanding  of  virtue  as  “a  vital  strength  that 
issues  out  of  an  effective  negotiation  of  the  crisis  of  a given  stage”  (p.  74). 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


275 


Thus,  according  to  Capps,  the  problem  with  “patience”  is  that  it  is  “a  rather 
negative  virtue,  more  passive  than  active.”  Further,  patience  supposedly  “lacks  the 
vigorous  engagement  with  the  world  that  the  virtues  of  will  and  courage  reflect” 
(p.  85).  Here  I would  want  to  raise  a question  about  the  ways  in  which  Capps 
characterizes  the  traditional  list  of  virtues  as  “passive”  and  reactive.  I think  we  must 
ask  ourselves  whether  this  understanding  of  patience  is  central  to  the  Christian 
theological  tradition,  or  is  it  a rather  debased  understanding  resultant  from  a mor- 
alistic pastoral  usage  in  the  late  medieval  period? 

Surely,  there  is  a richer  sense  of  “patience”  deeply  embedded  in  the  biblical  wit- 
ness as  well  as  in  the  ecumenical  tradition  which  is  not  merely  reactive.  Perhaps  if 
Capps  had  consulted  such  writings  as  St.  Thomas  Aquinas’  “Treatise  On  the  Vir- 
tues” ( Summa  Theologiae  I-II,  49-67)  with  its  different  catalogue  of  virtues  and  its 
different  moral  psychology,  he  would  have  also  found  the  same  dynamic  counter- 
balance of  passion  and  integrity  which  he  found  in  Erikson’s  works,  but  without 
the  developmentalist  presuppositions  of  the  life-cycle  theory. 

The  third  section  of  the  book  “The  Saving  Graces”  focuses  on  the  Beatitudes 
(yes,  there  are  eight  of  them!)  and  the  way  in  which  these  can  also  be  correlated  to 
the  life-cycle  theory  as  adapted  by  Capps.  In  addition,  Capps  also  conducts  a nar- 
rative analysis  of  the  “metastory”  of  the  first  eight  books  of  the  Old  Testament  in 
relation  to  the  “pilgrimage”  theme  of  John  Bunyan’s  Pilgrim’s  Progress.  At  this 
point,  the  author  acknowledges  that  this  fourth  pattern  of  eight  seems  “contrived” 
(p.  138),  but  Capps  adroitly  defends  this  scheme,  arguing: 

The  story  begins  with  a family  who,  though  created  by  God,  sinned  against 
God;  this  led  to  terrible  consequences.  But  the  story  ends  with  the  formation 
of  another  family  that  had  much  less  promising  beginnings  but  is  in  fact  a 
model  of  the  experience  of  salvation.  Thus,  the  metastory  beginning  with  Gen- 
esis and  ending  with  Ruth  is  a pilgrimage  from  sin  to  salvation.  The  metastory 
follows  the  stages  of  the  life  cycle. 

Not  everyone  will  find  this  fourfold  juxtaposition  of  vices,  virtues,  beatitudes, 
and  biblical  pilgrimage  with  life-cycle  stages  to  be  compelling  at  every  point.  Some 
sections  of  the  book  almost  demand  further  development,  even  as  they  dazzle  the 
reader  with  provocative  suggestions.  But  one  of  the  great  merits  of  Capps’  study  is 
its  heuristic  power  in  suggesting  connections  which  we  might  not  have  otherwise 
made. 

Every  chapter  of  Deadly  Sins  and  Saving  Virtues  makes  some  connection  between 
ethics,  psychology,  and  hermeneutics  while  always  keeping  forefront  the  Christian 
life  pilgrimage.  Capps’  readers  will  be  grateful  that  he  has  presented  us  with  a book 
that  opens  up  more  than  it  resolves,  and  that  calls  upon  the  reader  to  follow  up  on 
these  kinds  of  connections.  Indeed,  it  is  a book  which  demands  to  be  tested  within 


276 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


the  context  of  pastoral  care  where  interpretation  of  the  Bible  is  conjoined  with  the 
interpretation  of  the  lives  of  the  saints. 

Michael  G.  Cartwright 
Allegheny  College 

Green,  Garrett.  Imagining  God : Theology  and  the  Religious  Imagination.  New 
York:  Harper  and  Row,  1989.  Pp.  179.  $22.95. 

Garrett  Green,  who  chairs  the  religious  studies  department  of  Connecticut  Col- 
lege, has  written  an  insightful  book  on  the  role  of  the  imagination  in  theology.  His 
work  is  divided  into  two  major  parts,  the  first  dealing  with  religious  imagination 
in  which  he  examines  some  nineteenth-century  thinkers,  the  Barth-Brunner  debate 
about  natural  theology,  the  role  of  paradigms  in  natural  science,  and  the  places  of 
imagination  in  religion;  and  the  second  dealing  with  the  Christian  imagination  in 
which  he  examines  the  image  of  God,  the  function  of  scripture,  and  the  task  of 
theology. 

Concern  about  the  place  of  imagination  in  Christian  faith  is  not  new,  as  Green’s 
illuminating  treatment  of  some  prominent  nineteenth-century  figures  shows.  Al- 
though the  concept  was  often  present  only  in  an  implicit  way,  it  was  nonetheless  a 
central  issue.  The  general  development,  pioneered  by  thinkers  such  as  Kant  and 
Hegel,  was  in  the  direction  of  making  a sharp  distinction  between  scientific  and 
religious  ways  of  knowing.  Inevitably,  the  result  of  this  development  was  a tendency 
to  reduce  religion  to  something  other  than  knowledge.  Green  argues  that  such  re- 
ductive tendencies  arose  trom  a mistaken  view  of  the  imagination  and  its  role  in 
human  knowledge,  especially  scientific  forms  of  knowledge.  A proper  understand- 
ing of  how  imagination  comes  into  play  in  human  cognition  can  thus  do  much  to 
counter  reductionist  approaches. 

Green  also  contends  that  a proper  understanding  of  imagination  can  help  us  to 
move  beyond  the  impasse  created  by  the  Barth-Brunner  debate.  As  the  ability  to 
grasp  and  use  paradigms  to  understand  the  nature  of  the  world  and  God,  the  imag- 
ination is  a purely  formal  capacity  awaiting  the  concrete  forms  that  direct  its  activ- 
ity. It  therefore  provides  no  basis  for  a natural  theology  yet  offers  a “point  of  con- 
tact” for  revelation,  understood  as  God’s  impression  on  the  mind  through 
paradigms  that  allow  us  to  imagine  God  rightly. 

Science  also  approaches  the  world  through  paradigms.  Although  he  takes  the 
concept  of  paradigms  from  Kuhn,  Green  defends  it  in  a way  Kuhn  ultimately  did 
not  and  clarifies  it,  defining  it  as  “the  constitutive  pattern  according  to  which  some- 
thing is  organized  as  a whole-in-parts”  (p.  52).  Such  patterns  may  or  may  not  be 
true,  which  means  that  the  adequacy  of  perceptions  and  truth  claims  cannot  be 
decided  by  determining  whether  the  imagination  is  involved.  The  distinction  be- 
tween science  and  religion  needs  softening,  then,  since  both  require  the  paradig- 
matic imagination  and  may  make  both  true  and  false  claims  to  knowledge. 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


277 


One  of  the  most  interesting  arguments  advanced  by  Green  is  the  claim  that  the 
“image  of  God”  should  be  understood  as  the  capacity  to  imagine  God  rightly.  Sin 
has  destroyed  the  material  image  of  God,  the  true  insight  into  God’s  nature,  but 
not  the  formal  capacity  to  imagine  God,  the  paradigmatic  imagination,  which  pro- 
vides a point  of  contact  with  God.  This  is  a provocative  suggestion  and  provides 
some  helpful  insights,  yet  it  is  also  difficult  to  see  how  this  understanding  can  be 
justified  on  the  basis  of  the  biblical  texts  involved  and  how  it  does  justice  to  all  that 
this  symbol  evokes. 

Scripture  and  theology  come  into  focus  with  this  understanding  of  imagination. 
The  Bible,  especially  in  its  narrative  about  Jesus,  is  the  source  of  paradigms  that 
provide  a true  knowledge  of  God.  Theology  is  the  critical  interpretation  of  the 
Christian  paradigmatic  structure.  The  task  of  theology  is  to  understand  faith’s  lan- 
guage rather  than  to  explore  experience  since  language  shapes  experience.  To  the 
charge  that  this  is  a form  of  fideism,  Green  responds  that  the  Christian  paradigm  is 
not  immune  from  argument.  Rather,  arguments  about  such  matters  must  deal  with 
the  whole  paradigmatic  structure  and  not  just  isolated  parts  of  it. 

Green’s  presentation  is  clear,  shows  an  excellent  grasp  of  a number  of  important 
figures,  and  offers  some  stimulating  arguments.  Unlike  the  tendency  of  some  to 
treat  the  imagination  as  primarily  constructive  (e.g.  Gordon  Kaufman),  Green  notes 
its  receptive  dimension.  Unfortunately,  he  seems  to  have  lost  sight  of  its  constructive 
capabilities,  at  least  in  the  formulation  of  the  paradigms  by  which  it  operates,  for 
he  treats  the  imagination  almost  exclusively  as  a power  that  takes  over  paradigms 
from  other  sources.  Is  there  any  reshaping  that  occurs  in  this  process?  A closely 
related  issue  is  his  treatment  of  the  relationship  between  paradigms  and  experience. 
It  is  surely  right  that  language  shapes  experience.  But  is  there  no  reverse  influence? 
What  is  needed  is  a more  genuinely  dialectical  understanding  of  the  interaction 
between  language  and  experience. 

David  J.  Bryant 
Eckerd  College 

Hall,  Douglas  John.  Thinking  the  Faith:  Christian  Theology  in  a North  American 
Context.  Minneapolis:  Augsburg,  1989.  Pp.  456.  $29.95. 

This  notable  book  by  Douglas  John  Hall,  Professor  of  Christian  Theology  at 
McGill  University  in  Montreal,  launches  a three-volume  constructive  theology.  The 
first  volume,  Thinking  the  Faith,  provides  the  prolegomena  and  is  to  be  followed  by 
Professing  the  Faith  (which  will  deal  with  the  doctrine  of  God,  anthropology,  and 
Christology),  and  Confessing  the  Faith  (which  will  focus  on  ecclesiology  and  escha- 
tology and  will  ask  what  it  means  to  live  the  faith  as  the  church  in  North  America 
today).  Readers  familiar  with  Hall’s  previous  writings,  especially  Lighten  our  Dark- 
ness, will  not  be  surprised  that  the  “theology  of  the  cross”  is  a pervasive  motif  of  his 
new  book. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


278 

The  subtitle  expresses  the  distinctive  emphasis  of  Hall’s  theological  project.  Ar- 
guing that  theology  is  necessarily  contextual,  he  insists  that  responsible  theological 
work  in  North  America  presupposes  a clear  understanding  of  this  particular  society 
and  culture  and  the  courage  to  rethink  the  faith  in  relation  to  the  questions  and 
crises  ot  the  North  American  context.  Hall  contends  that  the  “failure  to  become 
purposively  and  profoundly  contextual  in  our  thinking”  (p.  235)  prevents  the  light 
ot  the  gospel  from  penetrating  our  North  American  darkness. 

The  two  parts  of  this  first  volume  of  the  projected  trilogy  are  titled  “The  Disciple 
Community”  and  “The  Discipline.”  In  the  first  part  Hall  identifies  seven  critical 
components  ot  our  post-modern  North  American  context:  the  end  of  the  Constan- 
tinian  era;  religious  pluralism;  the  theological  impact  of  the  holocaust;  the  revolu- 
tion of  the  oppressed;  the  rebellion  of  nature;  the  nuclear  crisis;  and  the  rise  of 
religious  simplism.  According  to  Hall,  the  deepest  crisis  of  our  context  is  the  dawn- 
ing recognition  of  “the  failure  of  modernity”  to  provide  us  with  intellectual  and 
spiritual  resources  to  cope  with  negation.  “Our  crisis  is  the  crisis  of  the  disillusioned 
who  have  no  frame  of  reference  for  the  experience  of  disillusionment”  (p.  197).  The 
optimistic  worldview  of  the  Enlightenment  has  broken  down,  and  the  exaggerated 
claims  of  technical-scientific  reason  have  been  humbled.  Hall  finds  in  this  situation 
a unique  invitation  to  a renewed  “theology  of  the  cross,”  by  which  he  means  a 
theology  that  speaks  of  the  crucified  and  hidden  God  and  is  thus  willing  to  share  in 
the  humiliation  of  the  modern  spirit,  to  accompany  it  in  its  descent  into  the  partic- 
ular hell  of  its  own  making,  and  to  speak  there  of  a God  of  suffering  love  who  frees 
humanity  from  its  mad  effort  to  win  meaning  and  security  through  the  exploitation 
of  nature  and  the  domination  of  other  human  beings.  Such  a theology  of  the  cross 
stands  in  marked  contrast  to  the  triumphalism  of  bourgeois  Christianity  in  North 
America  and  its  promotion  of  easy  answers  to  the  almost  desperate  questions  which 
thoughtful  people  ask  today.  Over  against  all  pious  simplism  Christians  “must  learn 
how  to  identify  themselves  with  the  questions  of  a humiliated  and  fearful  rationality. 

. . . Only  as  we  participate  in  the  suffering  of  the  intellect  and  the  humbling  of  the 
human  enterprise  shall  we  have  any  possibility  of  bringing  comfort  from  the  side 
of  the  suffering  God”  (p.  425). 

In  the  second  part  of  the  book  Hall  discusses  the  elements  of  the  discipline  of 
theology:  faith,  Bible,  doctrinal  traditions,  experience,  prayer,  church,  and  world. 
The  theological  method  he  espouses  is  perhaps  best  characterized  as  dialogical  and 
dialectical.  He  finds  strengths  in  both  the  kerygmatic  theology  of  Barth  and  the 
apologetic  theology1  of  Tillich  but  charges  both,  in  varying  degrees,  with  being  in- 
sufficiently contextual:  “The  great  works  of  theology  produced  by  our  immediate 
predecessors  seem  singularly  lacking  in  explicit  references  to  their  own  situation" 
(p.  361).  Hall  negotiates  deftly  between  secular  and  biblicistic  views  of  the  Bible, 
between  fideism  and  subjectivism,  between  modernism  and  traditionalism,  and  be- 
tween the  absolutization  and  the  rejection  of  experience  in  theological  reflection. 
His  discussion  of  the  place  of  prayer  in  theological  work  is  among  the  most  arrest- 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


279 

ing  sections  of  this  part  of  the  volume.  Prayer  as  passionate  seeking  and  intense 
struggle,  in  contrast  to  the  pietistic  trivialization  of  prayer,  must  be  reclaimed  as  an 
essential  ingredient  of  the  discipline  of  theology. 

A bold  and  imaginative  attempt  to  think  through  the  faith  in  ways  especially 
pertinent  to  North  American  Christians,  Hall’s  book  will  prompt  numerous  ques- 
tions. One  is  \yhether  a theology  in  the  North  American  context  does  not  have  to 
give  more  attention  to  the  voices  of  women  and  minorities  than  Hall  does  in  this 
volume.  He  suggests  that  the  witness  of  the  victims  of  the  dominant  culture  cannot 
substitute  for  an  in-depth  diagnosis  of  that  culture.  That  is  of  course  true,  but  it  is 
misleading  to  imply  that  such  criticism  of  the  dominant  culture  in  North  America 
is  not  in  fact  being  provided  by  the  heretofore  silent  voices  of  the  Christian  com- 
munity. Another  important  issue  is  whether  Hall’s  analysis  of  the  North  American 
context  and  its  implications  for  theological  method  is  entirely  consistent.  On  the  one 
hand,  he  rightly  criticizes  the  triumphalistic  amalgamation  of  piety  and  patriotism 
in  North  America  and  calls  for  a genuinely  prophetic  theology;  on  the  other  hand, 
he  argues  that  in  our  situation  it  would  be  inappropriate  to  stress  the  discontinuity 
between  God  and  the  world,  gospel  and  culture,  since  the  discontinuous  side  of  the 
dialectic  of  faith  and  culture  is  already  overplayed. 

But  these  and  other  questions  that  could  be  raised  are  simply  indicators  of  the 
important  conversation  that  this  pioneering  theological  work  will  prompt.  The  sub- 
sequent two  volumes  of  the  trilogy  will  be  eagerly  awaited. 

Daniel  L.  Migliore 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 

Villa-Vicencio,  Charles,  ed.  On  Reading  Karl  Barth  in  South  Africa.  Grand  Rapids, 
Michigan:  Eerdmans,  1988.  Pp.  172.  $14.95. 

Social  location  makes  a difference  in  theological  reflection.  Any  doubt  about  this 
is  readily  dispelled  by  this  collection  of  lively  essays  by  Reformed  pastors  and  theo- 
logians in  South  Africa,  all  committed  to  resistance  to  apartheid  and  all  energized 
in  this  struggle  by  their  continuing  encounter  with  the  theology  of  Karl  Barth. 

As  is  well  known,  traditional  Reformed  theology  in  South  Africa  has  been  ap- 
propriated by  the  forces  of  oppression.  Less  well  known  is  that  precisely  in  this 
situation  Barth’s  theology  is  being  rediscovered  as  a liberating  and  revolutionary 
resource.  Instructed  by  the  experiences  and  questions  of  the  oppressed  blacks  of 
South  Africa,  the  contributors  to  this  volume  aim  to  identify  a Christian  “counter- 
tradition,” a heritage  of  liberating  faith  that  has  been  ignored  or  suppressed  by  the 
dominant  theology  of  the  white  churches  in  that  land.  When  Barth’s  theology  is 
“reread”  within  the  South  African  situation,  both  theological  text  and  social  context 
are  illumined.  Important  features  of  Barth’s  theology  that  are  often  overlooked  or 
minimized  in  other  contexts  become  strikingly  prominent  (e.g.  his  insistence  on  the 
inseparability  of  theory  and  praxis),  and  Barth’s  theology  in  turn  clarifies  the  pro- 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


280 

phetic  edge  of  the  gospel  and  the  task  of  the  church  in  South  Africa  today  (e.g.  his 
summons  to  the  confessing  church  in  Germany  to  resist  Nazi  ideology  anticipates 
the  call  to  Christian  resistance  in  face  of  the  sin  and  heresy  of  apartheid). 

Each  author  explores  some  aspect  of  this  interplay  of  Barth’s  theology  and  South 
African  context.  Dirkie  Smit  finds  special  relevance  in  Barth’s  interpretation  of  the 
miracles  of  Jesus  as  paradigms  of  God’s  unconditional  free  grace  toward  humanity 
not  only  as  sinners  but  as  suffering  creatures  in  need  of  total  redemption.  Charles 
Villa-Vicencio,  the  editor  of  the  volume,  argues  that  when  Barth’s  theology  is  read 
“in  the  eye  of  the  storm”  as  in  South  Africa  today,  it  provides  a much-needed  and 
uncompromising  theological  No  to  the  structures  of  injustice  legitimized  by  a he- 
retical Christian  theology.  Robin  Petersen  traces  “the  socialist  continuity”  in  Barth’s 
theology  and  praxis  from  his  earliest  writings  as  a pastor  in  Safenwil  to  the  latest 
volumes  of  the  Church  Dogmatics  and  argues  that  disregard  of  this  continuity  results 
in  the  misappropriation  of  his  theology  by  political  conservatism  and  a-political 
scholasticism.  C.  W.  Wanamaker  charts  the  changing  emphases  of  Barth’s  under- 
standing of  the  relationship  of  church  and  state  in  his  several  expositions  of  Romans 
13.  Nico  Horn  argues  that  the  present  situation  in  South  Africa  is  a status  confessionis 
and  compares  the  Kairos  Document  of  1985  to  the  Barmen  Declaration  of  1934. 
Jaap  Durand  examines  Barth’s  and  Abraham  Kuyper’s  understandings  of  the  sov- 
ereignty of  Christ  and  shows  the  vulnerability  of  Kuyper’s  theme  of  independent 
spheres  of  life  to  an  interpretation  that  has  not  only  contributed  to  the  silencing  of 
the  Dutch  Reformed  church  in  South  Africa  on  sociopolitical  issues  but  resulted  in 
the  capture  of  Kyperians  by  Afrikaner  civil  religion.  Finally,  John  de  Gruchy  con- 
tends that  there  is  for  Barth  an  intrinsic  relationship  between  the  gift  of  reconcilia- 
tion in  Jesus  Christ  and  the  call  to  participation  in  the  struggle  for  justice  and  free- 
dom. 

While  aiming  primarily  to  highlight  the  liberating  resources  of  Barth’s  theology 
for  the  South  African  church,  the  contributors  are  not  uncritical  of  Barth.  In  partic- 
ular, they  contend  that  greater  attention  to  concrete  social  analysis  than  Barth  him- 
self was  inclined  to  offer  is  a prerequisite  of  prophetic  theology.  Since  detailed  anal- 
ysis of  the  South  African  context  is  mostly  assumed  rather  than  provided  in  this 
book,  the  criticism  which  the  authors  make  of  Barth  might  also  be  turned  on  them 
if  one  did  not  know  that  many,  if  not  all  of  these  writers  have  elsewhere  attended 
in  depth  to  the  particularities  of  their  social  situation.  No  doubt  aspects  of  some  of 
the  interpretations  of  Barth  offered  are  in  need  of  fine  tuning,  as  when  it  is  claimed 
that  he  largely  abandoned  the  dialectical  method  in  his  later  writings  (p.  97)  when 
it  would  be  more  accurate  to  say  that  his  way  of  analogy  in  the  Church  Dogmatics, 
properly  understood,  always  includes  a dialectical  moment,  just  as  God’s  mighty 
Yes  contains  an  unmistakable  No.  Still,  what  impresses  the  reader  most  is  not  such 
relatively  minor  flaws  but  the  fact  that  in  this  rereading  and  reclaiming  of  Barth’s 
theology  in  the  context  of  church  conflict  and  struggle  for  social  justice  in  South 
Africa  a Reformed  liberation  theology  is  in  the  making. 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


281 


Dedicated  to  Paul  Lehmann  whose  interpretation  of  Barth  as  “theologian  of  per- 
manent revolution”  has  obviously  influenced  several  of  the  authors,  this  book 
should  be  on  the  reading  list  not  only  of  every  course  on  the  theology  of  Barth  but 
also  of  every  course,  in  church  or  seminary,  interested  in  exploring  the  possibility 
and  promise  of  a liberation  theology  that  is  both  self-consciously  contextual  and 
vigorously  Reformed. 

Daniel  L.  Migliore 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 

Van  Buren,  Paul  M.  A Theology  of  the  Jewish -Christian  Reality.  Part  III,  Christ  in 
Context.  New  York:  Harper  & Row,  1988.  Pp.  312.  $29.95. 

This  book  is  the  third  and  central  work  of  a series  on  the  Jewish-Christian  reality. 
Part  I was  entitled,  Discerning  the  Way;  Part  II,  A Christian  Theology  of  the  People  of 
Israel ; and  Part  III,  Christ  in  Context. 

In  successive  chapters  of  the  present  volume  the  author  deals  with  the  place  and 
function  of  Christology,  with  the  context  of  Jesus  Christ  as  Israel  and  the  Church, 
with  Christ  as  risen,  as  the  presence  of  God,  and  as  the  crucified  one,  with  the 
novelty  of  Jesus  Christ,  with  Christian  witness  to  him  as  the  eternal  Son,  the  incar- 
nate Word,  and  the  Lord  (who  is  the  Spirit),  and  with  the  consummation.  Van 
Buren  insists  that  Christology  must  be  seen  in  context,  namely,  “as  Israel’s  gift  to 
and  claim  upon  the  Church.”  He  stresses  that  Jesus’  death  was  “an  all-too-typically 
Jewish  death  of  the  time:  he  was  killed  by  Gentiles”  (p.  74).  It  is  true  that  the  Gentile 
Pilate  pronounced  the  sentence  reluctantly  but  only  at  the  clamor  of  the  Jewish 
people.  The  Apostle  Paul  was  more  even-handed  when  in  his  letter  to  the  Romans 
(3 :9ff.)  he  charged  that  “all  men,  both  Jews  and  Greeks,  are  under  the  power  of  sin. 

. . . None  is  righteous,  no,  not  one.” 

So  intent  is  Van  Buren  to  uphold  his  thesis  that  he  argues  that  “the  author  of  the 
(Johannine)  Prologue  is  wrong”  when  he  wrote  that  “he  came  to  his  own  and  his 
own  received  him  not.”  He  cites  Mary  and  Joseph,  Peter,  Andrew,  James,  and  John 
as  those  who  “received”  Jesus.  The  truth  is  that  in  the  end  they  “all  forsook  him 
and  fled”  (Mk.  14:50);  they  denied  and  betrayed  him.  It  was  not  until  he  was  raised 
from  the  dead  and  the  Holy  Spirit  was  poured  out  on  them  that  the  disciples  con- 
fessed in  Thomas’  words:  “My  lord  and  my  God.”  Later  (p.  87)  Van  Buren  explains 
that  Thomas’  confession  “could  not  have  meant  that  the  Jew  Jesus  was  God,  the 
God  of  the  Jews.  It  could  indeed  mean,  however,  that  directly  and  specifically  in 
their  meeting  with  Jesus  of  Nazareth,  they  had  met  their  God,  the  God  of  Israel.” 
The  author’s  subtle  distinction  between  affirming  that  Jesus  was  (is)  God,  and  meet- 
ing God  in  Jesus  escapes  his  reviewer’s  comprehension. 

Yet  surely  Van  Buren  is  correct  when  he  writes:  “If  the  world  should  ask  where 
God  is,  let  it  begin  by  looking  to  see  where  Israel  is”  (p.  91).  As  others  have  con- 
tended, the  existence  of  the  Jews — in  spite  of  all  attempts  to  annihilate  or  to  assim- 


282 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


ilate  them — is  the  one  natural  proof  of  the  existence  of  God.  Moreover,  God’s  cov- 
enant of  grace  was  and  is  His  covenant  with  Israel.  To  this  covenant  some  Gentiles 
have  been  admitted  “by  grace  through  faith”  in  Christ  (Eph.  2:1-22).  “As  God’s 
anointed,  Jesus  binds  the  nations  of  the  world  to  the  nation  of  Jesus — -the  nation  of 
the  covenant,  the  Jewish  people”  (p.  137). 

The  chief  merit  of  Van  Buren’s  book  is  that  it  deals  with  the  Jews  theologically. 
For  centuries  the  Church  has  taught  that  it  has  superseded  the  Jews  as  God’s  chosen 
people.  Yet  Paul  insisted  that  the  Gospel  is  “to  the  Jew  first  and  also  to  the  Greek” 
(Rom.  1:16;  2:9-10;  10:12)  and  that  the  faithlessness  of  some  Jews  does  not  nullify 
the  faithfulness  of  God  (Rom.  3:3^).  As  Karl  Barth  and  Van  Buren  teach,  we  cannot 
call  the  Jews  the  “rejected”  and  the  Church  the  “elected”  community.  What  is 
elected  in  Jesus  Christ  is  the  community  which  has  the  twofold  form  of  Israel  and 
the  Church.  Hatred  of  the  Jews — in  every  century  and  in  every  land — is  basically 
a hatred  of  the  Jew,  Jesus  of  Nazareth.  If  Hitler  had  triumphed  in  World  War  II, 
we  may  be  sure  that  Christians  would  have  suffered  the  fate  of  six  million  Jews. 
Alas,  except  for  a significant  few,  Christians  did  not  protest  the  discrimination 
against  the  persecution  of  Jews.  Shiploads  of  Jewish  refugees  were  turned  away 
from  American  and  Cuban  harbors. 

Van  Buren  argues  that  Auschwitz  raises  the  question  whether  the  cross  of  Christ 
happened  “once  for  all.”  “To  say  that  God  was  directly,  personally,  and  immedi- 
ately involved  in  the  suffering  of  Jesus  becomes  unbearable  when  we  reflect  on  the 
suffering  of  the  Jewish  men,  women,  and  children  in  the  Holocaust.  . . . We  shall 
learn  to  speak  of  Auschwitz  from  the  perspective  of  the  cross  by  first  learning  to 
speak  of  the  cross  from  the  perspective  of  Auschwitz.  . . . The  death  of  God’s  faith- 
ful son  Jesus  must  have  hurt  God,  and  the  deaths  of  six  million  of  God’s  sons  and 
daughters  in  the  Holocaust  must  have  hurt  God  even  more”  (pp.  165-166).  We 
would  prefer  to  confess  that  Christ’s  death  on  the  cross  was  for  the  sake  of  the  six 
million  murdered  Jews. 

In  spite  of  the  above  strictures  we  commend  Van  Buren’s  book.  It  wrestles  with 
the  basic  question  of  the  relation  of  Jews  and  Christians  to  the  Jew — Jesus  of  Naz- 
areth. 

Arthur  C.  Cochrane 
University  of  Dubuque  Theological  Seminary 

Taylor,  Mark  Kline.  Paul  Tillich:  Theologian  of  the  Boundaries.  London:  Collins, 
1987.  Pp.  351.  $19.95. 

In  Paul  Tillich : Theologian  of  the  Boundaries  Mark  Kline  Taylor,  a professor  of 
systematic  theology  at  Princeton  Theological  Seminary,  provides  us  with  a rich  set 
of  Tillich’s  writings,  spanning  his  early  life  in  Germany  to  his  last  lecture.  Although 
most  of  these  were  previously  published,  this  volume  offers  a well-chosen  represen- 
tation of  many  of  Tillich’s  major  theological  directions. 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


283 


Taylor’s  well-written  introductory  comments  connect  the  issues  of  Tillich’s  the- 
ological life  to  present  day  theological  concerns.  Like  Tillich,  Christian  thinkers 
today  find  themselves  facing  many  of  the  same  “boundary”  tensions  although  the 
focus  of  their  work  may  be  different  from  and  critical  of  Tillich’s  theology.  Taylor 
uses  Tillich’s  boundary  experiences  to  organize  the  selections  and  entitles  each  set 
by  the  mediating  theme  which  Tillich  used  to  draw  together  the  two  sides  of  an 
issue. 

The  first  boundary  shows  Tillich  in  the  midst  of  the  tension  between  being  a 
theologian  of  culture  and  being  a church  theologian.  “On  the  Idea  of  a Theology  of 
Culture”  (1919)  and  a selection  from  “Basic  Principles  of  Religious  Socialism” 
(1923)  show  Tillich  arguing  for  a new  “theonomy”  which  takes  seriously  the  con- 
crete political  and  cultural  situation  while  allowing  for  its  transformation  and  ful- 
fillment in  religious  meaning. 

A second  tension  informing  Tillich’s  thought  was  between  the  Protestant  affir- 
mation and  critique  of  socialism.  Tillich  argues  for  a theonomous  socialism,  recog- 
nizing the  underlying  faith  and  depth  dimension.  In  “Realism  and  Faith”  (1929) 
Tillich  proposes  a “self-transcending”  realism  which  combines  historical  realism 
and  the  transcending  power  of  faith.  An  excerpt  from  The  Socialist  Decision  (1933) 
continues  this  theme  but  with  critical  application  to  the  myth  of  origin  in  Nazi 
Socialism.  Other  selections  here  include  a critique  of  Barth’s  “dialectic”  theology 
(“What  is  Wrong  with  the  ‘Dialectic’  Theology,”  1935)  “Nature  and  Sacrament” 
(1929)  which  emphasizes  the  sacramental  basis  which  underlies  Protestant  critique, 
and  a previously  untranslated  set  of  ten  theses  on  “The  Church  and  the  Third 
Reich”  (1932). 

The  themes  of  the  immanence  and  the  transcendence  of  God  set  the  tension  for 
Taylor’s  third  section  of  Tillich’s  writings.  This  tension  is  increased  by  the  existen- 
tial experience  of  the  sacred  void,  of  absolute  meaning  in  the  midst  of  meaningless- 
ness. Selections  from  the  first  volume  of  the  Systematic  Theology  (1951)  and  The 
Courage  to  Be  (1952)  are  complemented  by  “Religion  and  Secular  Culture”  (1946) 
and  “The  Problem  of  Theological  Method”  (1947)  to  provide  a helpful  overview  of 
Tillich’s  understanding  of  God  as  both  transcendent  of  and  yet  immanent  in  the 
basic  structures  and  experiences  of  life. 

Following  the  outline  of  Tillich’s  Systematic  Theology,  Taylor’s  next  two  sections 
of  texts  deal  with  Christ  as  the  New  Being  in  relation  to  the  structures  of  estrange- 
ment and  evil  (Volume  II,  1957)  and  the  Spirit  and  the  Churches  in  relation  to  the 
ambiguities  of  life  (Volume  III,  1963).  Taylor  analyzes  Tillich’s  writings  on  sin/evil 
and  the  Christ  as  arising  from  the  tension  between  an  historicist  understanding 
(focus  on  the  Fall  and  the  Christ  as  historical  realities)  and  a presentist  understand- 
ing (focus  on  the  significance  of  these  for  Christians  in  their  present  situations). 
Taylor  has  carefully  edited  his  selections  from  the  third  volume  to  emphasize  the 
tension  between  the  structures  of  personal  and  social  life  and  the  experience  of 
spiritual  ecstasy  that  can  transform  and  fulfill  those  structures. 


284 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


The  final  set  of  texts  highlights  the  contemporary  tension  between  acceptance  of 
pluralism  and  specific  commitment.  Included  here  is  Tillich’s  last  public  lecture, 
“The  Significance  ot  the  History  of  Religions  for  the  Systematic  Theologian”  (1965) 
which  looks  toward  a new  phase  of  theology  that  considers  the  breadth  of  world 
religions  and  yet  recognizes  the  roots  of  theology  in  the  concrete  local  situation  of 
the  theologian.  Appropriately,  Taylor  concludes  this  anthology  with  one  of  Tillich’s 
powerful  sermons,  “The  Right  to  Hope”  (1965)  which  draws  hope  for  this  world 
and  its  people  from  their  fragmentary  fulfillments  in  specific  historical  moments. 

Taylor’s  volume  of  Tillich’s  writings  will  be  useful  in  the  classroom  as  an  intro- 
duction to  Tillich’s  theology  but  also  valuable  to  pastors  and  to  activist  ministers 
who  find  themselves  facing  the  same  tensions  that  Tillich  did  on  a daily  basis  in 
their  work. 

Mary  Ann  Stenger 
University  of  Louisville 

Alter,  Robert,  and  Frank  Kermode,  eds.  The  Literary  Guide  to  the  Bible , Cam- 
bridge: Harvard  University  Press,  1987.  Pp.  viii  + 678.  $29.95. 

The  editors  of  this  volume,  each  eminent  in  his  field  (Alter  is  professor  of  He- 
brew and  Comparative  Literature,  University  of  California  at  Berkeley,  and  Ker- 
mode is  professor  of  English  Literature,  University  of  Cambridge),  have  planned 
the  scope  of  their  volume  on  a grand  scale.  Their  focus  is  literary  rather  than  his- 
torical or  theological,  and  they  have  invited  as  contributors  a wide  range  of  scholars. 
There  are  twenty-three  articles  on  the  books  of  the  Old  Testament,  and  nine  on  the 
New.  The  division  of  space  is  partly  determined  by  the  literary  interest  of  the  writ- 
ings. Thus  there  are  separate  treatments  of  Ruth,  the  Song  of  Songs,  Esther,  and 
Jonah,  while  Jeremiah  and  Ezekiel  are  considered  in  the  same  chapter,  as  are  the 
Twelve  (without  Jonah).  Each  of  the  four  Gospels  has  its  own  chapter,  as  do  Acts 
and  Revelation,  but  the  Pauline  Epistles  are  grouped  together  and  Hebrews  is 
treated  with  the  Catholic  Epistles.  At  the  close  of  the  book  there  are  seven  general 
articles  on  various  topics  (such  as  the  Hebrew  Bible  and  Canaanite  Literature,  the 
Canon,  Midrash  and  Allegory,  and  the  King  James  Version). 

Obviously  it  is  impossible  in  the  space  available  here  to  discuss  each  of  the  thirty- 
nine  chapters,  all  of  them  deserving  of  comment  and  evaluation.  The  only  feasible 
procedure  to  follow  will  be  to  select  some  details  that,  for  one  reason  or  another, 
struck  the  reviewer  as  deserving  of  comment,  and  then  to  look  at  the  general  ap- 
proach and  success  of  the  undertaking  as  a whole. 

Among  the  contributors  to  the  Old  Testament,  David  Damrosch  of  Columbia 
University  provides  a powerful  literary  reading  of  Leviticus — a book  that,  he  sug- 
gests, is  “such  an  unappetizing  vein  of  gristle  in  the  midst  of  the  Pentateuch  [that] 
the  natural  reaction  of  most  readers  is  simply  to  push  it  quietly  off  the  plate.”  His 
interpretation  (and  this  is  a sign  of  its  strength)  seems  perfectly  obvious  in  the  after- 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


285 


math  of  its  working  out:  the  legal  prescriptions  of  Leviticus  take  on  their  full  mean- 
ing only  in  the  context  of  the  narrative  that  surrounds  them,  especially  the  narrative 
of  the  Aaronic  priesthood. 

Moshe  Greenberg  (Hebrew  University,  Jerusalem)  provides  an  analysis  of  the 
book  of  Job  that  is  noteworthy  for  its  rejection  of  any  theory  of  composite  author- 
ship, refusing  to  separate  the  poem  from  the  prose  story,  and  showing  how  sense 
can  be  made  of  the  appearance  of  Elihu  in  chapter  32,  and  even  of  the  wisdom 
poem  in  chapter  28,  in  the  setting  of  the  entire  work.  In  his  chapter  on  Isaiah  Luis 
Alonzo  Schokel,  S.J.,  of  the  Pontifical  Biblical  Institute  ol  Rome,  looks  at  the  poetic 
and  rhetorical  devices  used  by  the  prophets  who  composed  the  three  main  parts  of 
the  book:  chapters  1-39,  telling  of  events  in  the  life  ol  Isaiah  himself,  between  about 
767  and  698  B.C.;  chapters  40-55,  attributed  to  Deutero-Isaiah,  are  situated  about 
553-539  B.C.;  and  Trito-Isaiah,  chapters  56-66,  appears  to  be  post-Exilic.  Embedded 
in  the  first  section  is  a special,  late  block  (chapters  24-27)  that  some  call  apocalyptic 
but  is  more  appropriately  called  eschatological.  Schokel  characterizes  the  book  as  a 
whole  as  “a  collection  of  collections,  like  a lake  into  which  the  waters  of  various 
rivers  and  tributaries  flow”  (p.  165). 

In  the  New  Testament  section,  Michael  Goulder  of  the  University  of  Birming- 
ham assesses  the  main  Pauline  letters  in  the  light  of  the  several  rhetorical  devices 
used  by  the  apostle  in  order  to  achieve  his  purposes.  Paul  is  ordinarily,  Goulder 
thinks,  “in  a pastoral  mood  [and]  tries  to  be  tactful,  but  he  finds  this  a strain.”  In 
Goulder’s  view,  “the  argument  of  Galatians  is  a sequence  of  preposterous  sophist- 
ries” by  which  the  apostle  sought  valiantly  to  prove  that  “dependence  on  circumci- 
sion and  the  Law  is  a total  error:  we  are  saved  by  Christ,  who  bore  our  curse  on  the 
tree,  and  by  faith  we  are  crucified  with  him,  and  live.” 

In  his  essay  on  Luke,  John  Drury  of  King’s  College,  Cambridge,  provides  an 
introduction  to  the  Third  Gospel  that  is  exemplary  in  its  scholarship  and  interpre- 
tative finesse.  Especially  penetrating  is  his  reading  of  the  scene  (from  Luke  24)  in 
which  two  disciples  encounter  the  risen  Christ  on  their  way  from  Jerusalem  to 
Emmaus.  He  writes:  “They  are  moving  away  from  the  locality  where  the  decisive 
events  are  happening  toward  a place  of  no  significance.  They  are  on  a dispirited 
narrative  detour  which,  quite  unexpectedly,  will  be  revelatory.  It  is  typical  of  Luke 
that  Emmaus,  as  a place  which  is  nowhere  in  particular,  should  be  lit  up  with 
marvelous  significance:  Nazareth  was  like  that  too”  (p.  424).  After  that  profound 
encounter,  everything  changes:  “The  end  of  the  Gospel  is  also  a beginning.  As  the 
first  two  chapters  gravitated  toward  Jerusalem  centripetally,  so  from  now  on  the 
news  will  spread  out  from  Jerusalem  centrifugally.  For  a while  the  apostles  are  to 
wait  at  Jerusalem,  but  only  until  the  power  to  work  comes  upon  them.  Then  their 
journeys  away  from  it  will  be  creative,  not  evasions  of  disaster  as  in  the  sad  walk 
from  Jerusalem  to  Emmaus”  (p.  423). 

From  the  standpoint  of  the  declared  purpose  of  the  volume,  namely,  to  assist  the 
reader  of  the  Scriptures  to  understand  what  holds  a biblical  book  together,  the 


286 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


chapter  on  the  book  of  Revelation  is  perhaps  the  least  helpful  of  any.  Here  Bernard 
McGinn  of  the  University  of  Chicago,  instead  of  providing  a fresh  literary  analysis 
ot  the  structure  of  this  marvelous  book,  merely  serves  up  a smorgasbord  of  the  ways 
in  which  the  Apocalypse  has  been  interpreted  from  early  Christian  times  down  to 
the  present  century. 

Ot  the  several  general  essays  at  the  end  ot  the  volume,  the  one  on  “English  T rans- 
lations  of  the  Bible”  by  Gerald  Hammond  (University  of  Manchester)  is  a frank 
and  unabashed  apologia  for  the  superiority  of  the  King  James  Bible  of  1 6 1 1 above 
all  other  English  versions.  No  matter  that  later  translators  have  had  access  to  older 
and  better  manuscripts  of  the  Bible  than  those  that  were  available  in  the  seventeenth 
century,  the  literary  charm  of  the  Elizabethan  cadences  of  this  version  have  never 
been  surpassed,  and  therefore  any  alteration  must  (in  Hammond’s  eyes)  inevitably 
be  for  the  worse!  No  matter  that  there  are  occasional  mistakes  in  English  grammar 
in  the  King  James  Bible  (“Whom  do  you  say  that  I am”)  and  no  matter  that  the 
inherent  bias  of  the  English  language  towards  the  masculine  gender  sometimes 
results  in  restricting  or  obscuring  the  meaning  ot  the  original  text  (e.g.,  "He  that 
hath  an  ear,  let  him  hear  . . .”),  it  still  should  be  regarded  as  the  literary  standard 
against  which  all  other  renderings  are  to  be  measured.  In  fact,  Hammond’s  point 
of  view  is,  to  a great  extent,  shared  by  the  editors  and  by  many  of  the  other  contrib- 
utors to  the  volume,  who  as  a rule  use  the  King  James  Version  in  making  quotations 
from  the  Scriptures. 

What  should  be  said,  finally,  about  the  impression  made  by  the  book  as  a whole' 
Typographically  the  volume,  crafted  by  the  Belknap  Press  of  Harvard  University 
Press,  is  a superior  piece  of  book-making — though  lamentably  with  footnotes 
placed  at  the  end  of  a chapter.  (What  would  be  thought  of  a piece  of  music  in  which 
the  bass  clef  followed  some  pages  after  the  treble  clef?)  But  more  to  the  point,  how 
does  this  book  compare  with  other  literary  guides  to  the  Bible — of  which  there  are 
not  a few  on  the  market? 

First  of  all,  it  must  be  said,  the  approach  here  is  strictly  literary:  the  authors  are 
not  concerned  with  questions  of  historical  accuracy  or  with  what  may  be  called  the 
truthfulness  of  the  Scriptures.  In  fact,  the  assumption  shared  by  the  authors  of  the 
chapters  on  the  Gospels  is  that  the  distinctive  features  of  these  four  books — the 
unities  and  significant  turns  of  character,  plot,  and  theme — derive  from  the  evan- 
gelists’ vivid  imaginations,  not  from  privileged  and  accurate  knowledge.  On  the 
other  hand,  it  should  be  noted  that  such  an  approach  can  also  be  regarded  as  a 
significant  rehabilitation  of  the  whole  idea  of  authorship,  a kind  of  rescue  operation 
of  biblical  texts  from  the  clutches  of  redactors.  For  readers  who  have  had  the  equiv- 
alent of  a theological  seminary  training,  most  of  these  essays — all  of  them  urbane 
and  learned  without  being  tedious— will  open  up  fresh  vistas  within  the  biblical 
stories  and  poetry. 

But  at  the  same  time  one  must  be  struck,  as  George  Steiner  confesses  he  was 
struck  (in  his  perceptive  review  of  the  book  in  The  New  Yorker,  January  n,  1988), 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


287 


by  the  absence  of  any  consideration  of  the  numinous  and  the  mysterium  tremendum 
that  inevitably  attends  endeavors  to  speak  to  and  of  God.  There  is  a more  or  less 
polite  dismissal  of  the  reality  of  the  spiritual  world  and  of  the  central  theme  that 
binds  the  Scriptures  into  a unity  arising  from  the  covenant  relation  between  God 
and  his  people. 

Finally,  does  not  the  title  smack  of  hubris  in  using  the  definite  article,  “ The  Lit- 
erary Guide  . . . ,”  rather  than  the  more  modest  indefinite  article,  “A  Literary  Guide 
. . 

Bruce  M.  Metzger 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 

Bauer,  Walter.  Griechisch-deutsches  Worterbuch  zu  den  Schriften  des  Neuen  Testa- 
ments und  der  friihchristlichen  Literatur,  6th  fully  reworked  edition,  Kurt  Aland  and 
Barbara  Aland,  eds.  Berlin:  Walter  de  Gruyter,  1988.  Pp.  xxiv  + 1796  columns. 
DM  148.00. 

The  standard  Greek  Lexicon  of  the  New  Testament  and  other  early  Christian 
Literature  was  prepared  some  years  ago  by  the  indefatigable  labor  of  Walter  Bauer, 
working  seven  days  a week  for  many  years.  Not  only  was  there  a gigantic  amount 
of  material  to  be  mastered,  involving  the  most  minute  acquaintance  with  the  whole 
body  of  Christian  literature,  but  this  task  required  at  the  same  time  the  gift  of 
combining  and  relating  facts  as  well  as  reporting  them  in  the  most  concise  way 
possible.  An  English  translation  of  the  fourth  edition  was  published  in  1957  thanks 
to  the  work  of  two  American  scholars,  W.  F.  Arndt  and  F.  W.  Gingrich,  and  the 
generosity  of  a sizeable  subvention  made  by  the  Lutheran  Church  Missouri  Synod. 
Concurrently  with  the  appearance  of  the  English  translation,  a fifth,  enlarged  edi- 
tion of  the  German  lexicon  was  published  (1958),  and  in  due  time  the  additional 
information  provided  in  it  was  incorporated  into  a second  edition  of  the  English 
translation,  revised  and  augmented  by  Gingrich  and  F.  W.  Danket  (1979). 

Now,  with  the  scholarly  resources  and  personnel  (notably  Viktor  Reichmann) 
available  at  the  Institute  for  New  Testament  Text  Research  at  Munster,  a still  larger 
Greek-German  Lexicon  has  been  published  under  the  editorial  supervision  of  Kurt 
and  Barbara  Aland.  As  would  be  expected,  the  quotations  from  the  New  Testament 
have  been  accommodated  to  the  1984  text  of  the  United  Bible  Societies’  Gree\  New 
Testament,  third  edition  (corrected).  Lexicographic  additions  have  been  collected 
from  a broad  range  of  non-Christian  papyri;  quotations  from  ancient  literature, 
whether  patristic  or  secular,  have  been  verified  and  augmented.  This  is  particularly 
noticeable  in  the  increase  of  references  to  the  exegetical  use  made  of  New  Testa- 
ment passages  by  leading  church  fathers.  Modern  bibliographic  references  to  schol- 
arly discussions,  both  philological  and  theological,  replace  some  of  the  earlier  ref- 
erences. According  to  information  given  in  the  preface,  the  new  edition  contains 
about  one-third  more  material  than  the  previous  edition,  yet  the  user  will  observe 


288 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


that  the  physical  bulk  of  the  volume  has  not  been  correspondingly  increased  (only 
1796  columns  compared  with  1780).  The  saving  in  space  comes  about  by  employing 
a smaller  sized  type-face  for  material  not  directly  connected  with  New  Testament 
passages.  Furthermore,  by  using  bold-face  type  for  the  New  Testament  references 
and  definitions,  these  stand  out  prominently  and  thus  assist  the  reader  who  wishes 
to  concentrate  only  on  such  information. 

The  editors  K.  and  B.  Aland,  are  to  be  congratulated  for  making  the  standard 
tool  for  New  Testament  lexicography  even  better  than  it  was  previously.  It  is  to  be 
hoped  that,  for  the  sake  of  students  who  are  not  able  to  make  use  of  the  German 
edition,  an  English  translation  will  be  forthcoming  in  due  course. 

Bruce  M.  Metzger 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 

Cogan,  Mordechai  and  Hayim  Tadmor.  II  Kings:  A New  Translation  with  Intro- 
duction and  Commentary.  The  Anchor  Bible  n.  Doubleday  & Company,  Inc.,  1988. 
Pp.  xxxv  + 371.  $20.00. 

Biblical  scholars  have  long  awaited  the  appearance  of  Hayim  Tadmor’s  Anchor 
Bible  commentary  on  the  books  of  Kings.  The  work  of  this  eminent  Israeli  Assyr- 
lologist  promised  to  fully  exploit  the  wealth  of  contemporary  Assyrian  and  Baby- 
lonian sources  in  his  interpretation  of  these  biblical  books.  The  anticipation  was 
particularly  strong  among  those  scholars  working  on  the  last  half  of  the  seventh 
century,  the  period  of  Isaiah’s  ministry,  because  Tadmor,  who  is  also  editing  the 
very  poorly  preserved  annals  of  the  contemporary  Assyrian  ruler  Tiglath-pileser 
III,  probably  controls  the  Assyrian  sources  for  this  period  better  than  any  other 
living  scholar.  Since  the  history  of  the  Israelite  kingdoms  was  closely  entwined  with 
the  history  of  Assyria  during  this  period,  it  was  felt  that  Tadmor’s  commentary 
might  finally  resolve  some  of  the  difficult  historical  cruxes  found  in  2 Kings.  The 
international  reputation  of  Tadmor’s  coauthor,  Mordechai  Cogan,  an  Israeli  biblical 
scholar,  further  raised  the  expectations  for  the  commentary. 

Both  scholars’  major  scholarly  interests  are  in  the  Assyrian  and  Babylonian  per- 
iods, so  they  decided  to  publish  the  commentary  on  2 Kings  first.  Since  they  are  also 
reserving  the  main  discussion  of  the  literary  formation  of  the  books  of  Kings  for 
the  publication  of  the  volume  on  1 Kings,  it  is  difficult  to  evaluate  their  literary 
analysis  in  detail.  They  do  treat  the  work  as  a deuteronomic  production,  however, 
and  they  attribute  the  composition  of  the  bulk  of  the  work  to  the  reign  of  Josiah 
with  only  an  editorial  updating  in  the  exilic  period.  They  also  think  it  is  possible  to 
isolate  parts  of  an  earlier  north-Israelite  composition  embedded  in  Kings.  This  is  a 
promising  approach,  and  one  looks  forward  to  their  elaboration  of  these  views  in 
the  subsequent  volume  on  1 Kings. 

The  volume  on  2 Kings  is  a very  fine  commentary,  but  it  only  partially  fulfills  its 
expectations.  It  focuses  on  the  historical  issues,  but  it  also  offers  a good  translation 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


289 


with  excellent  philological  notes.  It  makes  extensive  use  of  the  available  non-biblical 
sources  with  particular  attention  to  the  contemporary  cuneiform  sources,  and  its  use 
of  this  non-biblical  material  is  careful  and  sober.  Both  biblical  and  non-biblical  ma- 
terial is  treated  with  critical  respect.  One  cannot  charge  the  authors  with  the  typical 
abuses  of  such  comparative  study;  neither  side  of  the  comparative  study  is  deni- 
grated in  favor  of  the  other,  and  the  sources  are  not  pushed  to  say  more  than  what 
can  be  legitimately  derived  from  them.  If  anything,  there  is  too  much  reserve,  and 
it  may  be  that  reserve  that  left  this  reviewer,  at  least,  with  a certain  sense  of  disap- 
pointment. Tadmor  in  his  earlier  historical  work,  particularly  in  his  famous  study 
on  Azariah  of  Judah,  had  shown  a willingness  to  engage  in  theoretical  reconstruc- 
tion to  explain  the  historical  dynamics  of  the  period.  In  this  commentary,  that  drive 
to  explain  has  been  sacrificed  to  the  desire  not  to  go  beyond  the  sources. 

This  failure  to  offer  a larger  theoretical  framework  in  which  to  explain  the  in- 
dividual details  of  the  text  undercuts  Tadmor  and  Cogan’s  attempts  to  resolve  the 
difficult  historical  cruxes  of  this  period.  They  have  their  opinions,  of  course,  but 
anyone  familiar  with  the  debate  over  these  cruxes  will  not  find  their  new  evidence 
or  insights  significant  enough  to  shift  the  balance  of  probabilities  one  way  or  an- 
other. In  their  treatment  of  Sennacherib’s  campaign  against  Jerusalem,  for  instance, 
they  do  not  adequately  explain  when  or  how  the  account  of  God’s  miraculous  de- 
liverance of  the  city  arose,  and  anyone  who  holds  to  the  two-campaign  theory  will 
find  their  cursory  dismissal  of  the  evidence  supporting  that  theory  totally  inade- 
quate. In  short,  they  have  not  incorporated  all  the  evidence  in  a new  reconstruction 
that  is  more  satisfying  than  the  previously  espoused  theories. 

Ministers  will  find  the  volume  short  on  theological  reflection,  but  one  does  not 
really  expect  the  Anchor  Bible  series  to  be  strong  in  that  area.  The  volume  is  strong 
on  history,  on  the  use  of  non-biblical  sources,  and  on  philology,  and  despite  the 
disappointment  expressed  above,  these  strengths  will  make  the  volume  a valuable 
addition  to  the  minister’s  library. 

J.  J.  M.  Roberts 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 

Clements,  Ronald  E .Jeremiah.  Interpretation  Commentary.  Atlanta:  John  Knox 
Press,  1988.  Pp.  276.  $17.95. 

Good  commentaries  on  Jeremiah  were  hard  to  come  by  ten  years  ago,  but  that 
void  has  been  filled  in  recent  years  by  several  complete  and  updated  studies  on  this 
unique  prophet  of  the  Old  Testament.  No  one  commentary  better  fills  the  gap  from 
a theological  perspective,  however,  than  Ronald  Clement’s  recent  addition  to  the 
fine  interpretation  commentary  series.  Clements  finds  the  delicate  balance  between 
keeping  in  view  the  real  historical  and  political  events  surrounding  the  ancient 
readers  of  Jeremiah’s  book  and  the  enduring  theological  insights  which  continue  to 
address  contemporary  readers. 


290 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Clements  is  a British  Old  Testament  scholar  who  has  worked  extensively  on  the 
prophets  and  on  issues  of  Old  Testament  theology.  His  broad  expertise  enables  him 
to  work  effectively  with  the  larger  issues  of  theological  importance  which  the  book 
of  Jeremiah  raises.  Examples  include  the  tension  of  divine  wrath  and  divine  love, 
the  relationship  of  judgment  and  hope,  the  struggle  to  discern  the  true  word  of  God 
in  true  and  false  prophecy,  the  understanding  of  sin,  and  the  relationship  of  faith 
and  the  behavior  and  attitude  of  moral  and  social  life. 

In  contrast  to  earlier  commentators,  Clements  follows  a recent  trend  in  much 
contemporary  biblical  scholarship.  He  focuses  more  on  the  present  shape  of  the 
book  of  Jeremiah  rather  than  on  trying  to  peel  away  the  editorial  layers  to  get  at 
the  “authentic”  words  of  the  prophet.  The  result  is  a fresh  appreciation  of  how  the 
book  of  Jeremiah  was  read  as  a whole  by  the  exiles  after  the  destruction  of  Jerusa- 
lem in  587  B.C.  As  Clements  notes,  “the  shadow  of  the  events  of  587  B.C.  covers 
the  entire  book  of  Jeremiah,  in  much  the  same  way  as  the  shadow  of  the  crucifixion 
rests  over  the  whole  of  Mark’s  Gospel”  (p.  9). 

Readers  of  Clements’  commentary  may  come  to  new  insights  about  the  image  or 
persona  of  the  prophet  which  the  editors  of  Jeremiah’s  words  portrayed.  Often 
people  think  of  prophets  only  as  angry  and  negative  and  largely  political  critics. 
Jeremiah  certainly  is  portrayed  as  having  some  of  those  characteristics.  But  the 
words  of  Jeremiah  have  been  shaped  toward  a quite  different  ultimate  goal.  As 
Clements  notes,  “like  all  the  Old  Testament  prophetic  collections,  Jeremiah  is  es- 
sentially formulated  as  a message  of  hope  throughout”  (p.  177).  Moreover,  in  con- 
trast to  Isaiah,  Jeremiah  seems  much  less  concerned  with  the  political  mistakes  of 
kings  and  much  more  concerned  with  the  deeper  issues  of  the  whole  people’s  sin 
and  rebellion  against  God. 

Clements  does  well  in  tracing  the  many  ways  in  which  the  suffering  and  endur- 
ance of  Jeremiah  function  as  a kind  of  forerunner  for  the  people’s  future  life  in 
exile.  Jeremiah’s  life  becomes  a window  into  the  people’s  future.  However,  Clem- 
ents does  not  do  as  well  in  showing  the  many  ways  in  which  Jeremiah’s  life  also 
functions  as  a window  into  the  agony  and  passion  of  God.  In  some  of  Jeremiah’s 
laments,  the  words  of  Jeremiah  and  the  words  of  God  become  fused  and  indistin- 
guishable. Clements  emphasizes  Jeremiah’s  insistence  on  God’s  transcendence 
above  all  human  symbols  (Davidic  kingship,  temple).  But  Clements  often  misses  the 
equally  important  dimension  in  Jeremiah  of  God’s  intimacy  and  close  involvement 
with  the  prophet  and  with  the  people  with  whom  God  relates  as  parent,  spouse, 
and  lover.  The  God  of  Jeremiah  seems  more  down  to  earth  than  Clements  allows. 

Nevertheless,  this  is  a rich  and  very  useful  commentary.  It  will  be  an  effective 
foundation  for  much  good  preaching  and  teaching  on  one  of  the  most  interesting 
prophets  of  the  Old  Testament. 

Dennis  T.  Olson 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


291 


Nelson,  C.  Ellis,  ed.  Congregations:  Their  Power  to  Form  and  Transform.  Atlanta: 
John  Knox  Press,  1988.  Pp.  287.  $14.95. 

Among  theological  educators,  C.  Ellis  Nelson  is  a leading  proponent  of  the  cen- 
trality of  the  congregation  in  the  structure,  life,  and  mission  of  the  church.  In  1967, 
at  a time  when  the  emphasis  was  on  finding  alternatives  to  the  congregation,  he 
insisted,  “the  basic  unit  remains  the  congregation,”  which  he  saw  in  holistic  terms 
as  “the  self-conscious  human  group  worshiping,  living,  and  working  together,”  in 
interactive  worship,  fellowship,  searching,  and  confronting  issues  (see  C.  Ellis  Nel- 
son, Where  Faith  Begins). 

At  that  time,  Nelson  stressed  the  congregation’s  power  to  form  persons  into  a 
community  of  faith.  Now,  in  this  carefully  edited  book,  he  turns  also  to  the  congre- 
gation’s power  to  transform  itself  and  its  members. 

In  addition  to  Nelson,  ten  authors  are  represented.  But  great  care  is  taken  to 
develop  and  maintain  focus  and  unity.  Three  persons  to  whom  the  congregation 
has  been  a central  concern  helped  to  plan  the  book  and  choose  the  authors.  The 
chapters  were  submitted  to  critique  by  congregational  leaders  in  a two-day  meeting 
at  Austin  Seminary,  and  then  rewritten.  Nelson’s  first  chapter  clarifies  the  book’s 
purpose,  special  features,  and  assumptions,  and  provides  a chapter-by-chapter  guide 
to  its  thought. 

The  purpose  of  the  book  is  “to  help  ministers,  Christian  educators,  and  lay  lead- 
ers explore  the  major  factors  which  create,  sustain,  critique,  and  transform  the 
unique  characteristics  of  congregations  and  to  propose  ways  they  can  influence  the 
character  and  mission  of  the  congregations  in  which  they  have  a leadership  role” 
(p.  2).  Ten  factors  affecting  congregational  life  are  singled  out,  and  a chapter  is 
given  to  each. 

Chapters  2-5  suggest  conditions  for  formation  and  transformation.  Bruce  C. 
Birch’s  “Memory  in  Congregational  Life”  stresses  the  biblical  roots  of  the  congre- 
gation as  a people  of  God.  Conscience  is  the  core  of  Jackson  W.  Carroll’s  “The 
Congregation  as  Chameleon:  How  the  Present  Interprets  the  Past,”  warning  of  the 
distortion  of  our  history  to  suit  our  present  purposes.  In  “Why  Do  People  Congre- 
gate?” David  S.  Steward  deals  with  motives,  indicating  how  differently  people  have 
been  and  are  drawn  to  the  church.  Carl  S.  Dudley’s  “Using  Church  Images  for 
Commitment,  Conflict,  and  Renewal”  shows  how  different  churches  have  different 
characters  and  personalities  because  of  the  nature  of  their  sense  of  identity,  the 
reason  for  which  they  exist  (or  think  they  exist). 

Chapter  6 (Donald  Eugene  Miller’s  “Centers  of  Vision  and  Energy”)  is  pivotal 
because  it  demonstrates  the  holistic  nature  of  the  congregation  as  it  builds  on  these 
prior  conditions,  and  utilizes  the  dynamics  that  are  to  be  analyzed.  It  is  the  whole 
process  of  congregational  transformation  with  which  he  deals,  suggesting  a model 
not  unlike  that  of  Thomas  Groome’s  “shared  praxis.”  The  six  steps  that  he  outlines 
for  examining  the  faithfulness  of  a congregation,  if  followed,  would  expose  the  roots 


292 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


of  its  present  life  and  provide  it  with  a new  vision  of  what  it  could  be.  The  process 
is  applicable  to  a variety  of  types  of  congregations  (which  he  enumerates).  “The 
direction  forward,”  he  says,  “requires  careful  attention  to  the  congregation’s  living 
story,  for  therein  does  the  ever-present  power  of  God  to  form  and  transform  be- 
come most  evident”  (p.  140). 

Chapters  7-1 1 provide  treatments  of  various  dynamics  of  formation  and  trans- 
formation. The  dynamic  with  which  Mary  Elizabeth  Moore  deals  is  that  of  listening 
(“Meeting  in  the  Silence:  Meditation  as  the  Center  of  Congregational  Life”).  “Be- 
longing: A Sacramental  Approach  to  Inclusion  and  Depth  of  Commitment”  is  Rob- 
ert L.  Browning’s  interpretation  of  the  heart  of  membership.  In  “Leading:  Paideia 
in  a New  Key,”  Janet  F.  Fishburn  puts  learning  and  spiritual  formation  at  the 
center  of  leadership.  Charles  R.  Foster’s  “Communicating:  Informal  Conversation 
in  the  Congregation’s  Education”  shows  how  effective  and  pervasive  the  non-struc- 
tured  aspects  of  the  congregation’s  life  can  be  in  learning.  “Teaching:  Forming  and 
Transforming  Grace”  is  Maria  Flarris’s  reconstruction  of  congregational  education 
as  an  art  form  that  touches  the  deepest  levels  of  affective  life. 

Among  the  book’s  special  features,  according  to  Nelson,  is  its  recognition  and 
use  of  the  first-hand  experience  of  parish  leaders  for  the  guidance  of  practice.  “Sup- 
pression of  experiential  knowledge  of  congregations  and  the  substitution  of  theo- 
logical language  would  have  surprised  the  first  Christian  theologian,  the  Apostle 
Paul.  . . . When  properly  related  to  Christian  belief,  experience  is  the  way  we  de- 
velop our  understanding  of  congregational  life”  (p.  3).  The  authors  have,  indeed, 
used  experiential  knowledge,  but  in  most  cases  it  has  been  so  distilled  into  theory 
that  the  result  strikes  the  reader  as  abstract  rather  than  concrete.  The  expressed 
hope  that  the  book  will  be  immediately  useful  to  congregational  leaders  may  there- 
fore be  difficult  to  realize. 

At  the  other  extreme,  perhaps,  is  the  problem  of  analytical  treatment.  The  ex- 
pressed hope  here  is  that  the  book  will  promote  a holistic  view  of  the  congregation, 
and  that  thinking  and  planning  will  reflect  that  holistic  view.  Yet  the  analysis  at 
most  points  is  in  such  familiar  terms  that  it  is  difficult  to  get  over  the  hurdle  of 
subordinating  specific  categories  to  the  whole.  It  might  have  been  useful  if  the  au- 
thors had  dropped  the  familiar  modes  of  analysis  and  subjected  us  to  new  and  more 
holistic  ways  of  thinking.  Maria  Harris  in  her  chapter  has  done  this  for  curriculum. 
She  abandons  the  terms  with  which  curriculum  workers  are  familiar,  and  substi- 
tutes terms  that  make  her  point  about  the  need  for  a new  way  of  looking  at  the 
matter.  She  jars  us  into  a holism  that  we  might  otherwise  miss. 

However,  Congregations:  Their  Power  to  Form  and  Transform  serves  its  stated 
purpose  in  putting  in  one  place  for  its  intended  audience  the  materials,  understand- 
ings, and  processes  by  which,  with  hard  work,  a new  way  of  dealing  with  congre- 
gational change  may  be  achieved. 

D.  Campbell  Wyckoff 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


293 


Aleshire,  Daniel  O.  Faithcare:  Ministering  to  All  God’s  People  Through  the  Ages  of 
Life.  Philadelphia:  The  Westminster  Press,  1988.  Pp.  180.  $12.95  (Paper). 

For  Daniel  Aleshire,  Professor  of  Psychology  and  Christian  Education  at  the 
Southern  Baptist  Theological  Seminary  in  Louisville,  faithcare  “is  the  sensitive 
process  of  attending  to  and  ministering  with  individuals  who  are  struggling — 
sometimes  in  the  most  ordinary  ways — to  let  faith  emerge  and  grow  in  them”  (p. 
13).  The  primary  focus  of  his  book  is  the  “attending  to”  dimension  of  faithcare,  for 
it  is  his  conviction  that  attending  to  or  paying  attention  to  people  “provides  the 
information  required  for  articulate  expressions  of  ministry”  (p.  15).  Thus,  Part  1 of 
Faithcare  is  concerned  with  paying  attention  to  the  way  that  people  of  faith  learn 
and  grow,  while  Part  2 centers  on  paying  attention  to  the  three  major  age  groups 
in  the  community  of  faith:  children,  youth,  and  adults. 

Ministry,  in  Aleshire’s  view,  begins  with  attending  to  people,  and  requires  a com- 
mitment to  giving  attention  rather  than  attracting  it.  Beyond  this  basic  commit- 
ment, there  are  sensitivities  and  skills  which  one  can  cultivate  and  learn,  making 
one  a more  effective  attender  and  hence  a more  effective  minister.  Faithcare  focuses 
primarily  on  developing  the  sensitivities  which  are  conducive  to  attending  to  people, 
and  this  means  acquiring  some  new  learnings  about  people  and  discarding  some 
old  ones.  We  have  a habit  of  attending  to  persons  in  terms  of  their  gender,  their 
occupation,  their  physical  characteristics,  the  region  of  the  country  in  which  they 
were  raised  or  live,  and  so  on.  These  are  not  unimportant,  but,  for  Aleshire,  they 
can  be  misleading  and  superficial,  as  they  fail  to  capture  the  unique  individuality  of 
persons  in  their  complexity,  richness,  and  depth.  Far  better  is  to  pay  attention  to 
persons  in  terms  of  their  development,  in  terms  of  the  way  they  learn,  and,  most 
importantly,  in  terms  of  their  faith,  and  how  it  shapes  their  development  and  learn- 
ing. There  are  more  subtle  and  nuanced  ways  of  attending  to  persons,  and  they  are 
not  as  easily  gotten  hold  of;  but  they  enable  us  to  get  closer  to,  and  to  perceive  more 
accurately  and  penetratingly,  the  persons  we  encounter  in  everyday  life.  Persons 
experience  faith  in  unique  and  particular  ways,  they  develop  in  ways  that  are  pe- 
culiar to  themselves,  and  they  learn  in  ways  that  are  congruent  with  who  they  are 
and  who  they  aspire  to  be.  Attempts  to  generalize,  to  abstract,  to  objectify  these 
ways  of  experiencing,  developing,  and  learning,  cause  us  to  miss  sight  of  individu- 
als’ uniqueness  and  particularity. 

And  yet,  Aleshire  believes  that  some  theorizing  about  these  particularities,  and 
some  attempts  to  generalize  about  them,  can  be  useful,  if  done  with  caution  and 
circumspection.  It  is  possible,  for  example,  to  identify  the  typical  ways  in  which 
persons  experience  faith,  e.g.  as  openness  to  God,  as  relational  and  transforming 
participation,  as  investing  everyday  life  with  meaning,  and  as  ever-changing  and 
renewing.  It  is  also  possible  to  talk  about  and,  to  some  degree,  describe  the  process 
by  which  faith  is  learned,  and  the  means  by  which  faith  is  nurtured  and  enabled  to 
grow.  Such  insights,  to  which  Aleshire  makes  his  own  contributions  in  chapters  on 


294 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


paying  attention  to  the  way  of  faith,  on  learning  in  the  community  of  faith,  and  on 
growing  in  the  community  of  faith,  can  lead  to  active  faithcare,  that  is,  to  the  kind 
of  attending  with  w'hich  we  associate  activities  like  gardening  and  parenting:  at- 
tending which  is  nonaggressive  but  steady,  purposeful,  and,  above  all,  attuned  to 
what  makes  Jenny,  Jenny,  and  Jonathan,  Jonathan. 

It  is  also  possible  to  describe  the  characteristic  ways  in  which  children,  youth,  and 
adults  reflect  and  reflect  upon  their  faith,  as  Aleshire  does  in  the  second  half  of 
Faithcare.  Again,  such  explorations  are  not  to  diminish  the  uniqueness  of  each  per- 
son’s faith  experience,  nor  to  divest  faith  of  its  essential  mystery,  but  it  is  to  claim 
that  there  are  some  discernible  ways  in  which  children  and  youths,  especially,  will 
reflect  and  reflect  upon  their  faith.  Adults,  in  Alshire’s  view,  are  much  more  vari- 
able and  idiosyncratic  in  their  faith-reflections,  but  this  variability  is  itself  charac- 
teristic of  adults,  and  to  be  aware  of  this  fact  is  part  of  what  it  means  to  pay  attention 
to  them,  as  individuals. 

Faithcare  is  intended  for  a dual,  but  overlapping  readership.  It  is  for  pastors, 
especially  those  in  parish  settings,  for  the  context  to  which  it  speaks  is  clearly 
the  congregation;  and  it  is  for  Christian  educators.  I think  it  works  for  both 
readerships,  in  part  because  of  what  it  does  not  do,  which  is  to  address  the  ques- 
tion of  skill  acquisition  or  techniques  for  enhancing  attentional  capacities.  Un- 
like most  pastoral  care  books,  it  does  not  include  case  reports,  though  it  is  sprinkled 
with  illustrations  from  Aleshire’s  own  church  and  family  involvements.  And  un- 
like most  Christian  education  texts,  it  does  not  include  discussion  of  pedagogy 
and  curricular  concerns.  Thus,  neither  readership  is  likely  to  teel  that  the  book 
was  actually  written  for  the  other.  It  may  be,  of  course,  that  each  of  these  reader- 
ships  would  have  w'anted  some  attention  given  to  skill  acquisition,  some  specific 
suggestions  for  how  one  might  nurture  one’s  attentional  capacities,  and  some 
guidelines  for  assessing  one’s  attentional  abilities  against  certain  standards  or  ideals. 
It  may  be  that  some  readers  might  also  wish  for  somewhat  more,  dare  I say, 
theological  discussion,  as  the  whole  question  of  “paying  attention”  raises  the 
theological  issue  of  sin,  especially  in  the  form  of  distortion,  ignorance,  and  in- 
difference. What,  in  other  words,  are  impediments  to  “paying  attention”  to 
others,  and  what  is  the  relationship  between  these  impediments  and  the  faith  pro- 
cess itself? 

Then,  this  minor,  but,  to  an  Eriksonian,  not  insignificant  criticism:  Ale- 
shire claims  that  Erik  Erikson’s  developmental  theory  emphasizes  hereditary  in- 
fluences because  it  posits  that  personality  develops  according  to  an  epigenetic 
principle.  Erikson’s  epigentic  principle  does  not  entail  the  primacy  of  hered- 
itary over  environmental  influences  in  personality  development.  In  fact,  Erik- 
son  is  generally  viewed  as  placing  the  greater  emphasis  on  environmental 
influences. 

Faithcare  is  a good  book.  Aleshire  is  not  atraid  to  confess  that  he  is  dealing  with 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


295 


matters  which  are  difficult  to  put  into  words.  I admire  his  honesty,  his  humility, 
and,  above  all,  his  obvious  humanity. 

Donald  Capps 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 

Webber,  Robert  E.  and  Rodney  Clapp.  People  of  the  Truth.  San  Francisco.  Harper 
& Row,  1988.  Pp.  136.  $14.95. 

These  two  evangelical  authors,  one  a Wheaton  College  professor  and  the  other  a 
Christianity  Today  editor,  urge  us  to  focus  upon  the  church  as  the  central  instrument 
of  social  change  in  the  Christian  scheme  of  things.  Too  many  Christian  activists  on 
the  left  and  the  right,  they  complain,  think  that  if  anything  of  political  importance 
is  going  to  be  done  in  the  world  it  will  be  because  we  have  harnessed  the  power  of 
national  governments.  This  kind  of  social  action  simply  is  not  “radical”  enough. 

What  is  needed,  the  authors  insist,  is  more  Christian  attention  to  “depth  politics”: 
"Depth  politics  is  happening  whenever  anyone  maizes  a deliberate  and  structured  attempt 
to  influence  how  people  live  in  society.”  And  this  is  the  kind  of  political  process  that 
only  the  church  can  effectively  nurture. 

Webber  and  Clapp  do  not  pretend  to  be  theological  innovators.  They  freely  draw 
upon  the  work  of  a wide  variety  of  thinkers,  especially  narrative  theologians  and 
sociologists  of  knowledge.  But  neither  are  they  mere  popularizers  of  other  peoples’ 
work.  They  do  an  excellent  job  of  appropriating  themes  and  insights  for  the  pur- 
poses of  constructing  an  ecclesiological  perspective  that  should  be  very  helpful  to 
those  who  are  immersed  in  the  complexities  of  pastoral  ministry. 

This  book  deals  with  theological  materials  that  usually  get  treated  by  writers  who 
identify  with  liberationist,  Anabaptist  or  “Franciscan”  theological  projects:  e.g., 
structural  evil,  principalities  and  powers,  and  “the  option  for  the  poor.”  But  Webber 
and  Clapp  seem  especially  concerned  to  find  ways  in  which  these  themes  can  be 
applied  to  very  ordinary  North  American  suburban  congregations.  They  want  the 
church  to  be  a “diacritical  community”  wherein  social  evil  is  not  only  identified  and 
criticized,  but  where  an  alternative  social-political  reality  is  effectively  nurtured. 

Readers  who  still  operate  with  older  stereotypes  of  evangelicals  may  be  surprised 
by  the  authors’  strong  liturgical  interests.  Citing  Vatican  II ’s  declaration  that  liturgy 
is  “the  fount  from  which  all  [the  church’s]  power  flows,”  they  explore  the  relation- 
ship of  preaching,  baptism,  and  eucharist  to  the  promotion  of  “depth  politics.”  The 
church’s  liturgy  shapes  us  into  a people  whose  lives  display  and  channel  the  justice 
of  God  in  a broken  world.  Our  Christian  approach  to  specific  social  problems  must 
grow  out  of  our  communal  efforts  to  be  a people  whose  worship  is  an  “epiphany  of 
justice.” 

Webber  and  Clapp  do  not  leave  us  wondering  how  all  of  this  is  to  be  translated 
into  practical  wrestlings  with  specific  social  problems.  In  a concluding  chapter  on 


296 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


“The  Church  and  Current  Social  Issues”  they  offer  brief  but  cogent  discussions  of 
pornography,  aids  and  homosexuality,  abortion,  poverty,  drugs,  and  nuclear  weap- 
onry. There  are  some  gems  here,  even  for  those  of  us  who  think  we  have  read  it  all 
when  it  comes  to  Christian  discussion  of  these  kinds  of  topics. 

This  book  provides  an  excellent  brief  refresher  course  in  practical  ecclesiology 
for  all  who  want  the  church  to  be  a “people  of  the  truth.” 

Richard  J.  Mouw 
Fuller  Theological  Seminary 

Santmire,  H.  Paul.  The  Travail  of  Nature:  The  Ambiguous  Ecological  Promise  of 
Christian  Theology.  Philadelphia:  Fortress,  1985.  Pp.  xiii  + 274.  $16.95. 

In  the  service  of  the  environmental  movement,  which  gathers  strength  daily, 
many  religious  thinkers  have  plunged  into  the  debates  about  a Christian  theology 
of  nature.  Few  have  done  so  with  such  careful  concern  for  sources  and  such  overall 
fairness  as  Paul  Santmire,  who  here  gives  us  a tour  of  major  Christian  thinkers 
from  the  New  Testament  to  the  twentieth  century.  This  is  a learned  and  informa- 
tive work,  a pleasure  to  read;  and  even  if  one  disagrees  with  it  from  time  to  time, 
in  matters  small  and  not  so  small,  one  admires  the  rigorousness  and  honesty  of  the 
research  and  exposition. 

Santmire’s  tactic  is  to  acknowledge  right  at  the  start  that  the  Christian  tradition 
is  complex  and  ambiguous  (see  his  subtitle)  on  the  subject  of  nature,  and  that  it  can 
be  read  in  different  ways  depending  on  one’s  conceptual  framework.  He  chooses  to 
highlight  those  thinkers  and  elements  who  have  a positive  appreciation  of  nature, 
arguing  that  they  represent  as  authentic  a version  of  Christian  faith  as  any  other 
reading.  His  heroes  are  Irenaeus,  Augustine,  and  Francis.  On  the  negative  side,  he 
dislikes  the  attitudes  toward  nature  which  he  finds  in  Thomas  Aquinas,  Bonaven- 
ture,  Bultmann,  Barth,  and  Teilhard  de  Chardin.  Luther  and  Calvin  occupy  an 
ambivalent  middle  position.  His  biblical  exegesis,  which  comes  at  the  end  of  the 
book  after  his  discussion  of  the  post-biblical  tradition,  similarly  divides  the  sheep 
from  the  goats,  with  Paul  in  the  former  camp,  the  Johanine  school  in  the  latter. 

Going  beyond  the  familiar  idea  of  the  goodness  of  creation,  Santmire  singles  out 
for  emphasis  the  eschatological  themes  which  imply  that  nature  will  participate, 
along  with  humanity,  in  the  renewal  of  all  things  in  God’s  consummation  of  history. 
Unless  we  believe  that  nature  has  an  eschatological  future,  he  thinks,  we  will  de- 
value it  and  hence  not  properly  care  for  it.  He  signifies  this  position  with  a couple 
of  “root  metaphors,”  that  of  the  “fecundity”  of  creation,  and  that  of  “migration  to 
a good  land,”  metaphors  he  seeks  out  in  the  writings  he  explores.  The  rejected 
position,  the  “anthropocentric”  one  where  nature  is  backdrop  to  the  divine-human 
drama,  he  signifies  with  the  metaphor  of  “ascent,”  where  the  spiritual  ultimately 
triumphs  over  the  material. 

Naturally  the  chosen  metaphors  organize  the  material  to  favor  the  position  the 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


297 

author  wants.  This  is  not  truly  an  objective  investigation  leading  where  it  will. 
Methodologically  aware  and  sophisticated  as  he  is,  Santmire  admits  this  bias  quite 
openly,  suggesting  it  is  better  to  choose  a direction  self-consciously  than  accept  one 
unconsciously.  Fair  enough.  But  of  course  this  also  means  one  might  write  another 
book,  with  another  viewpoint,  using  the  same  Christian  tradition.  Indeed,  Santmire 
might  help  us  if  we  wished  to  do  so,  since,  to  his  great  credit,  he  reports  his  materials 
faithfully  before  making  his  choices  from  them,  thus  letting  us  see  not  only  his 
principles  of  selection  but  also  some  possible  alternative  hypotheses.  For  example, 
he  acknowledges  the  anthropocentrism  of  Irenaeus  quite  frankly  before  describing 
it  in  a refinement  which  allows  him  to  claim  his  man  for  an  ecological  viewpoint 
after  all.  He  admits  that  Augustine  believed  in  human  “dominion  over  nature,”  but 
fine  tunes  this  notion  till  it  yields  a “kind  of  solidarity  with  nature,”  and  so  lands 
Augustine  in  the  ecological  camp  also. 

Despite  a stubborn  honesty,  one  which  resists  tendentiousness,  Santmire’s  schema 
will  out.  And  if  we  wish  to  object  to  his  conclusions,  if  we  find  ourselves  uncom- 
fortably among  the  goats,  we  will  have  to  offer  different  organizing  principles  and 
different  metaphors  before  being  able  to  reclaim  the  tradition.  It  is  possible,  for 
example,  to  welcome  the  “anthropocentric  view”  not  only  as  thoroughly  supported 
in  biblical  and  traditional  Christian  sources  (Santmire  admits  as  much),  but  also  as 
far  more  valuable  in  the  service  of  ecology  than  a view  focused  on  a future  consum- 
mation of  nature  as  renewed  in  all  its  fecundity.  After  all,  a cosmic  renewal  accom- 
plished only  by  God  at  the  end  of  days  is  one  in  which  we  can  have  no  part  and 
does  not  answer  to  our  need  for  responsible  ecological  action  now.  Such  a vision 
can  also  be  only  a “hope  against  hope,”  considering  the  secular  geological  wisdom 
which  foresees  the  inevitable  death  of  planet  earth  in  fire  and  ice.  Why  not,  then, 
welcome  as  the  best  friend  the  environment  can  have,  the  traditional  idea,  of  which 
Santmire  makes  light,  that  we  are  meant  to  exercise  “dominion”  over  nature  as 
responsible  stewards  for  the  Creator?  Here  anthropocentrism  and  environmental- 
ism marry  each  other  without  desperate  appeal  to  apocalypse. 

There  is,  finally,  the  problem  of  the  relation  of  ecological  theology  to  social  jus- 
tice. Santmire  claims  that  his  vision  of  nature  is  necessary  if  we  are  to  affirm  the 
value  of  the  world  and  thus  deal  adequately  with  its  problems,  while  those  (like  this 
reviewer)  who  frankly  take  an  anthropocentric  position  have  unwittingly  sub- 
scribed to  a “spiritual”  view  which  breeds  indifference  both  to  nature  and  the  ma- 
terial life  of  humanity.  Thus  he  turns  on  its  head  my  argument  that  rejection  of  the 
anthropocentric  means  rejection  of  the  primacy  of  human  concerns  and  leads  to 
indifference  and  even  hostility  to  the  claims  of  social  justice.  History  will  have  to 
judge  between  these  opposing  sides,  and  so  far  the  history  of  the  real  environmental 
movement  is  rife  with  social  elitism  and  indifference  to  the  claims  of  the  poor.  The 
more  mystical  is  the  reverence  for  nature,  it  seems,  the  less  firm  is  our  will  to  man- 
age it  for  human  welfare.  It  may  be  that  the  political  “Green”  movement  is  begin- 
ning to  change  this  class  bias.  Yet  even  this  movement  is  ecological  politics  in  the 


298 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


service  of  humanity,  another  example,  if  one  were  needed,  of  the  enduring  utility  of 
the  anthropocentric  motifs  of  responsible  dominion  and  stewardship  of  God’s  cre- 
ation which  lie  at  the  heart  of  the  Christian  tradition. 

Thomas  Sieger  Derr 
Smith  College 

Chatfield,  Donald  F.  Dinner  with  Jesus  and  Other  Left-Handed  Story -Sermons. 
Grand  Rapids:  Zondervan  Publishing  House.  1988.  Pp.  128.  $6.95  (paper). 

The  author,  who  is  professor  of  preaching  and  worship  at  Garrett-Evangelical 
Theological  Seminary  in  Evanston,  111.,  helps  us  at  the  outset  of  this  volume  by 
defining  what  he  means  by  “left-handed”  in  the  matter  of  the  creation  of  the  ser- 
mon. He  writes:  “A  left-handed  sermon  is  one  that  encourages  the  right  side  of  the 
brain  to  take  the  lead  for  a while.  The  right  hemisphere  of  the  brain  governs  the 
left  side  of  the  body;  so  what  I call  left-handed  sermons  tend  to  come  from  and 
speak  to  the  right  side  of  the  brain  more  than  the  left.  . . . Typical  sermons  tend  to 
favor  the  logical,  imperative  side,  rejecting  the  rich  texture  and  flavor  of  a lot  of  the 
Bible  itself — which  is  largely  and  basically  story ” (p.  9). 

With  this  insight  into  the  processes  of  the  human  psyche,  Professor  Chatfield 
experienced  a complete  revolution  in  his  own  approach  to  and  method  of  sermon- 
izing, both  in  creation  and  delivery.  Composing  his  sermons  now  entirely  orally  he 
felt  “pushed  to  structure  my  sermons  more  like  plots,  and  with  more  images  and 
events”  (p.  11).  Further  he  writes:  “One  result  is  that  I have  increasingly  found  that 
I too  am  a teller  of  stories.  And  more  than  that:  I am  told  by  the  stories  I tell.  And 
most  of  all,  in  the  telling  of  tales  I can  increasingly  see  my  life  as  a tale  told  by  God” 
(p.  12). 

With  this  intention  and  goal  in  mind,  how  does  he  do  it?  What  is  his  modus 
operand /?  Initially  and  by  nature,  Chatfield  has  a quiver  full  of  qualifications,  many 
of  them  basic  and  requisite  to  this  brand  of  pulpit  communication.  He  possesses  a 
very  lively  and  fertile  imagination  which  he  uses  effectively  and  yet  with  appropri- 
ate restraint.  As  a student  of  literature  he  handles  the  contemporary  idiom  easily 
and  some  well-worn  phrases  are  re-minted  with  attention-getting  results.  There  are 
twelve  chapters  here — seven  emerge  directly  trom  a pericope  in  Scripture  and  five 
have  either  a Christian  orientation  or  the  hint  of  a strong  moral  teaching  at  and  for 
their  close. 

It  would  be  unfair  to  attempt  to  evaluate  sermons  of  this  kind  apart  from  the 
context  in  which  they  were  given  originally  or  any  knowledge  of  the  skill  of  the 
storyteller  before  a worshiping  congregation.  There  are,  however,  a number  ot  fea- 
tures here  that  merit  commendation.  Chatfield’s  insight  into  both  the  assets  and 
foibles  of  human  nature  enables  him  to  draw  parallels  between  how  the  average 
person  acts  and  talks  today  with  people  and  events  separated  in  time  from  the  first 
century.  He  is  less  effective,  however,  in  his  mythological  attempts  as  in  his  imper- 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


299 

sonations  of  biblical  characters  in  crucial  events  from  scripture  which  he  does  un- 
commonly well.  The  average  pulpit  today  speaks  to  a biblically  illiterate  generation. 
Chatfield  is  aware  of  this  and  realizes  that  the  story  informs  and  teaches  where 
logical  analyses  and  theological  presuppositions  no  longer  excite  interest.  At  the 
same  time  he  claims  that  his  method  secures  by  implication  the  answers  to  some 
deep  theological  questions  more  effectively  than  by  hitting  them  head  on. 

Certain  cautionary  words,  however,  are  in  order.  Some  preachers  lend  them- 
selves easily  to  the  use  of  story;  others  cannot.  Some  storytellers  make  the  narrative 
so  complex  that  the  hearers  fail  to  sort  out  the  characters  and  hence  they  “sit  this 
one  out.”  Often  biblical  names  familiar  to  the  seminary  graduate  are  foreign  to  the 
layperson’s  ear.  (Incidentally — and  this  is  an  aside — this  reviewer  bristles  when  a 
preacher  uses  “Yahweh”  and  “Sheol”  before  people  whose  common  vocabulary, 
especially  invectives,  features  “God”  and  “Hell”!).  Homiletical  methods  differ 
among  preachers  and  no  one,  including  Chatfield,  would  expect  everyone  to  fit  into 
the  same  system,  because  all  of  us  have  been  engaged  on  occasion  even  by  solidly 
theologically  propositional  preachers  whose  imaginative  powers  were  employed  to 
great  advantage.  On  further  thought,  we  are  fortunately  the  heirs  of  John  Bunyan, 
Alexander  Whyte,  and  Henry  Ward  Beecher,  whether  in  allegory  or  story,  and  we 
read  and  hear  with  fascination  our  contemporaries,  Frederick  Bruce  Speakman, 
Frederick  Buechner,  and  all  others — including  Chatfield — who  follow  in  their 
train. 

Donald  Macleod 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


PRINCETON 

THEOLOGICAL 

SEMINARY 


A SEMINAR  ON  PREACHING 

December  4— R.  Maurice  Boyd 

EARLY  CHRISTIAN  RESPONSES  TO  THE  WORLD: 
1ST  CORINTHIANS  AS  CASE  STUDY 

December  4-7— Vincent  Wimbush 

THE  CHURCH  AND  SOCIAL  CHANGE 

December  4-7— Carl  Geores,  Jr.,  Richard  Fenn 

FIRST  MONDAY— POPULAR  MOVEMENTS, 
CHRISTIAN  BASE  COMMUNITIES.  AND 
LIBERATION  STRUGGLES  IN  CENTRAL  AMERICA 

January  8— Richard  Shaull 

CHRISTIAN  EDUCATION  AND  SCIENTIFIC 
CULTURE 

January  8-10— James  Loder 

THE  FULL  WEALTH  OF  CONVICTION 

January  8-1 1— Diogenes  Allen 
(Off-Campus  Seminar,  Seattle,  WA) 

THE  LETTER  TO  THE  HEBREWS 

January  8-11— Bruce  Metzger 

STUDY  TOUR  OF  THE  HOLY  LAND 

January  10-25— James  Charlesworth 

WITH  THE  EYES  OF  FAITH:  APPRECIATING 
THE  CONTENT  OF  CHRISTIAN  ART 

January  15-18 — Karlfried  Froehlich 

CHURCH-BASED  COMMUNITY  ORGANIZING 

January  15-18 — Wesley  Woo 

LEADERSHIP  II  (A  COURSE  FOR  LAITY) 

January  19-21— Roy  Pneuman,  Margaret  Bruehl 


CHRIST  IN  CONTEXT 

January  22-25—  Daniel  Migliore 

HUMAN  INTERACTION 

January  22-25— Roy  Pneuman 

EFFECTIVE  GROUP  LEADERSHIP 

January  22-25— Margaret  Bruehl 

THE  PERSONAL  DIMENSION  OF  EVANGELISM 

January  22-25— Ben  Johnson 

BIOETHICAL  QUANDARIES  AND  THE  CHRISTIAN 
FAITH 

January  29-February  1— Jack  McConnell,  Abigail 
Rian  Evans 

MINISTERING  TO  THE  EMOTIONAL  NEEDS  OF 
CONGREGATIONS 

February  5-8— John  Talbot 

FIRST  MONDAY— CHILDHOOD  CANCER:  WHY  IS 
IT  DIFFERENT 

February  5— American  Cancer  Society 

PASTORAL  CARE  AND  COUNSELING  WITH 
WOMEN 

February  12-15— Christie  Neuger 

PRAYER  AND  THE  BIBLE 

February  12-15— Patrick  Miller 
(Off-Campus  Seminar,  Sarasota,  FL) 

"STEAL  AWAY  TO  JESUS”:  THE  DISCIPLINE  OF 
SOLITUDE 

February  19— Kent  Groff 

THE  QUESTION  OF  ORDAINED  MINISTRY: 
CURRENT  ECUMENICAL  DIALOGUE 

February  19-23— David  Adams 


Center  of  Continuing  Education  (609)  497-7990 


Princeton  Theological  Seminary,  12  Library  Place,  Princeton,  NJ  08540 


Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Librai 


012  01467  8736 


for  USE  IN  LIBRARY  ONLY 
PERIODICALS 


FOR  USE  IN  LIBRARY  ONLY 


FOR  USE  IN  LIBRARY  ONLY